Home

Avaya Configuring WAN Lines Services User's Manual

1. eS ON S KG84A KG84A Network Configuration KG84A Router LS0017A The Nortel Networks router attaches to the KG84A device using a modified V 35 synchronous cable The encryption decryption process is usually transparent to the router However occasionally two KG84A devices can lose cryptographic synchronization When this occurs the modified cable allows the router to initiate cryptographic resynchronization The modified cable also allows the router to detect and monitor the local KG84A device resynchronization whether the resynchronization is initiated locally or remotely by a KG84A device The router detects the loss of synchronization between KG84A devices by monitoring the number of FCS errors and valid frames received If the router detects FCS errors and it does not receive a valid frame within a time period you specify the router requests resynchronization The router also requests resynchronization if it determines that the previous resynchronization request was not completed in the specified time period You can also force a resynchronization of the local KG84A device by pressing its RESYNC button The router can detect this type of remote resynchronization and can request a new one if resynchronization is not completed in the specified time period Use the following parameters in the Edit SYNC Parameters window to configure KG84A support on synchronous lines that connect to KG8
2. sese 9 3 w ueB s9nodldcpor qe 9 3 Siig iidcib or 9 4 Using Site Manager senate aei erent T okee T s 9 4 Customizing FE1 Services Using the BCC or Site Manager cccccsssceessesteeeeeeeneaes 9 5 Disabling and Reenabling the FE1 Port ssssssssssseeeenen 9 5 Using the BOG sssusssrwiss A EE E E E E sinkt T 9 6 Hano Ste Manan EN rnai AE A NA 9 6 Settman EET LDIN TYDE cinigis aan iNO iA AA uid 9 6 Using Me BOG sriain a a e E AN 9 6 Leng ate Manager aana S 9 6 Setting the FE1 Line Coding peeps T eer M TU Seanad 9 7 B heR is dem MH 9 8 Using Sne TRIAGE oci epos barco esa bag ASTE Ru CH Ra 9 8 Setting the Alarm Threshold Time T P ETT naea T eteieeis 1119 8 Hang me BOG e E REER 9 8 Using soit EISE CRBIE icone nni a a E marae 9 8 Setting the Alarm Threshold Clear TIME riimien corine 9 8 Leno Te BOG arrasin hennir A AR 9 9 Using Site Manager rar PATERE REN ey TS maaan ea 9 9 308648 14 00 Rev 00 xix Accepting or Rejecting Loopback Requests cccsssccceeeseecceeeeeeeeceeeeeneeceeeneneaes 9 9 Setting a Loopback Configuration ET Dessus oboed ET secus Noe 9 9 Usmg the BOG oeicuscectizsestetcdsic eec px Eraci don aetas tn E Reisepass Em tede uel A oees 9 10 Using Swe Menige E D E DOS 9 10 Enabling or Disabling the International Bit cornet penal ere
3. subcommand Table B 2 show fte Commands lt container gt lt keyword gt lt arguments gt lt filter_flags gt lt filter_arguments gt alerts circuit lt circuit_name gt bert stats circuit lt circuit_name gt detail circuit lt circuit_name gt errors circuit lt circuit_name gt fdl ansi fdl att framer port sample circuit lt circuit_name gt stats circuit lt circuit_name gt summary circuit lt circuit_name gt timeslot 308648 14 00 Rev 00 B 11 Configuring WAN Line Services show ft1e1 alerts The show ft1e1 alerts command displays all circuits that are enabled but not up Use this display to identify the interfaces that are not working This command allows for the following command filters flags and filter arguments circuit circuit name Displays information about the specified circuit only circuit name Displays information about the specified circuit only The output contains the following information Slot Conn Name of the physical interface Circuit Name of the circuit associated with this line Admin State Configured state of the FT1 or FE1 module HW Address Physical address of the line The line driver fills in this address from the 48 bit address stored in the link module number PROM for this connector WAN Protocol WAN protocol enabled on this interface Operational Current operating state of the FT1 or FE1 line driver State Errors Displays error
4. 308648 14 00 Rev 00 2 35 Configuring WAN Line Services Cancel OK Values Help Enable ENABLE Station Type DTE Control Field MODULO 8 Max N1 Frame Size octets 1600 Window Size Max N2 Retries Max T1 Acknowledge Timer seconds Max T2 ficknowledge Timer seconds Max T3 Disconnect Timer seconds Initiate Link Setup Action ACTIVE Figure 2 3 Edit LAPB Parameters Window Enabling or Disabling LAPB Services The router enables LAPB line services when you configure a synchronous circuit for the X 25 protocol You can disable and reenable LAPB services on the interface without moving any cables Using Site Manager See the Enable parameter on page A 18 for information Setting the Station Type The Station Type parameter identifies whether the device is a DTE or DCE for this interface If you have DTE devices select DTE If you have DCE devices select DCE 2 36 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring Synchronous Services If you do not want to assign a specific station type and instead want the network to determine the station type select DXE This value indicates that the router is in unassigned mode it is neither a DTE nor a DCE If you select DXE the router will send an exchange identification XID but negotiation will not occur until the network assigns a station type By default the station type is DTE Set the station type of the interface to DCE or DTE Using Site Manager
5. Enable or disable local loopback 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 3 1 10 Loopback Configuration MCTI Connector gt Edit Logical Lines gt Port Details gt MCT1 Port Parameters No Loopback No Loopback Payload Loopback Line Loopback Forces the DS1 interface to go into loopback The remote or intermediate equipment then performs diagnostics on the network between that equipment and the DS1 interface No Loopback This option deactivates any loopback Payload Loopback The received signal on this interface is looped through the device Typically the received signal is looped back for retransmission after it has passed through the framing device Line Loopback The received signal does not go through the framing device minimum penetration but is looped back out Select the loopback configuration option for testing After testing set this parameter to No Loopback to return the interface to normal operation 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 4 1 10 308648 14 00 Rev 00 A 33 Configuring WAN Line Services QMCT1 and DMCT1 Port Parameters In addition to the parameters described in the previous section the Port Parameters window for the QMCT1 and QMCTI w DSOA link modules and the DMCT net module includes four configurable parameters Parameter Send Performance Measurement CR Addr Path QMCTI Connector gt Edit Logical Lines gt Port Details gt MCT1 Port Parameters Default Customer Inst Options Customer Inst Carrier
6. Figure 7 3 Default Circuit Name for ASN Net Modules 308648 14 00 Rev 00 7 37 Configuring WAN Line Services Customizing Logical Line Parameters Table 7 13 lists the logical line configuration tasks described in this section and indicates whether you can use the BCC or Site Manager to perform each task Table 7 13 MCE1 and MCT1 Logical Line Configuration Tasks Task BCC Site Manager Page Enabling or Disabling the Logical Line V V 7 39 Enabling or Disabling BofL Messages V V 7 40 Setting the BofL Timeout V V 7 40 Enabling or Disabling Logical Line Loopback V V 7 41 Viewing the Configured WAN Protocol V V 7 41 Setting the HDLC Service Type P4 4 7 42 Setting the Local HDLC Address V V 7 42 Setting the Remote HDLC Address V V 7 43 Setting Rate Adaption 4 4 7 44 Setting the Interframe Time Fill Pattern V V 7 45 Setting the CRC Size V V 7 46 Setting the MTU Size V V 7 46 Enabling or Disabling Remote Loopback Detection V V 7 47 Configuring BERT Diagnostic Pattern Tests V V 7 47 re Disabling Fractional T1 Loopback 748 Configuring NRZI Line Encoding V V 7 49 Setting the Transmit Queue Length 4 7 50 Setting the Receive Queue Length V 7 51 Using the BCC To edit parameters for a logical line navigate to the mcel or mct1 prompt for example stack mce1 1 2 1 and type mcel 1 2 1 logical line mce1 121 1
7. Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Sync B Channel Override COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit SYNC Parameters Default BCHANNELI BCHANNEL2 DEFAULT FLOATINGB Specifies which B channel this line is using for ISDN By default the B channel is associated with the selected connector On AN and ANH routers you can use this parameter to override the Site Manager default and connect the B channel to a specific serial communications controller SCC Select DEFAULT to use the channel Site Manager assigns Select BCHANNELI or BCHANNEL2 to explicitly assign the B channel Select FLOATINGB to use only one B channel of ISDN which becomes BCHANNELI or BCHANNEL2 depending on the call setup procedures COMI and COM2 become available in this mode 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 94 Sync Force IFTF COM Connector Edit Line Edit SYNC Parameters Default Default HDLC Flags Idles Specifies an interframe time fill IFTF pattern that the router transmits when there is no data to transmit on a synchronous line There are two IFTF patterns HDLC Flags an Ox7E pattern 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 idles an OxFF pattern 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 HDLC Flags is the default IFTF pattern for all synchronous media types except ISDN BRI For ISDN BRI the default pattern is Idles To use these defaults leave the Sync Force IFTF parameter set to Default To override the defaults set this parameter to HDLC Flags or Idles For
8. PA EEPE E E AE A E E 8 10 Setting the Alarm Threshold Clear TIME sirsiran 8 10 Una PE BOO Sowa ix xs ss tue ta Sues aere a abk da laa a etu pn ua meals 8 10 Using Site Manager uisus ATAA aent Aran T T T 8 11 xvi 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Setting the FDL Mode for ESF Line Types cccccccsscecesseeeeeeceeeeseeeteaeeeseeeeeseeeee Bod 1 EI UO e E en ck A E E PE asta FULGOR Dia dinates OU OK Ld rd uc 8 11 Blue aa ils titel lal EE LE LS 8 11 Setting the Remote FDL HDLC Address Mode sse 8 12 Using the BOG acs ssraidacetapieasd tI E ub EU ds Ce rer ERROR N errr MUR PEN 8 12 Gano Sie ISIE oeoa ee EE EE 8 12 Accepting or Rejecting Port Loopback Requests ccccccccseeeseeeeesteeeceeeeeeeeeeees 8 12 Using the BCC TA decus TS nEaN ere eae ee a T Be Leng site Manno opi ra pleas cloacae abo e Pria abu ad CC dA 8 13 Setting the Loop Retention Interframe Time Fill eese 8 13 Using he BOG e M 8 13 Setting a Logpback Configuratio iiecus ncc ortae aga a ene E oec t D4 Using the BCC re ip epic rere Gens SET T San PUR 8 14 St Tite ie Vea MaE ques eee Edi Doe d ctas more d ae E terete e ns 8 14 Setting the Source of Send Performance Messages sss 8 15 Using ihe BOG Lus toresa te Eae E eed dS ERE PE LOB EPRHA UR E EB ia X ED FPEX SEDE X RE T 8 15 Using e RULES LS BP TT TTL TTD TT TT 8 15 Setting the Source of
9. line loop Line Loopback Received signals do not go through the framing device before being looped back out no loop No Loopback The default this option deactivates any current loopback 308648 14 00 Rev 00 9 9 Configuring WAN Line Services Using the BCC To set a loopback configuration navigate to the fel prompt for example box fe1 1 1 and type loopback mode variable For example fel 1 1 loopback mode no loop Using Site Manager See the Loopback Configuration parameter on page A 61 for information Enabling or Disabling the International Bit By default the FE1 interface does not use the International Bit in FE1 frames You can enable use of the International bit for this FE1 interface Using the BCC To set the International Bit navigate to the fel prompt for example box fe1 1 1 and type international bit variable For example e1 1 14 international bit enabled Using Site Manager See the International Bit parameter on page A 61 for information 9 10 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring FE1 Services Setting the Primary Clock Source Setting the Timing is independent for the port on an FE1 E1 WAN adapter module For this module you select the timing source for the FE1 port Table 9 6 lists the options for this parameter Table 9 6 Primary Clock Option BCC Options Site Manager Options Description internal Internal Uses the internal clock c
10. 10 11 Grouping Logical Lines into a Multiline Circuit eeseeeeeseeeeeeeeess 10 11 Appendix A Site Manager Parameters Asynochnronous Ling Farameters eiue eaaet esee pete qase rp ee pana UAM RAN E TR NARRA EDU lE pM A 2 DSUWGCGSU CSI I PRI E A 8 E1 Line Parameters aie TT TOUR TT TT quence TT e sachets A 10 Hos ne Paralelo rtace Rer io rece EP Esa pue capitu ty readers eas A 13 dco MET D D A 18 MCE1 Port Application and Clock Parameters sssssseeeeeneene A 24 Rib Port PESE a eiveppoaad ain nube adeb aA Ro RI op ERE dob Cp ER ab RR A 25 MCT1 Port Application and Clock Parameters sess A 28 MGTI Part ces Us cy acai e dtt rema en Pea ebur eae arb reo Race u re en ee ee ee A 29 GMUOT I and DMCT1 Port Parameters uuiussevezi a vv kd EGER KR I VERE ER ERU MIR ERR Mad Y VERLA A 34 MCE1 and MCT1 Logical Line Parameters tese RUE A 36 FT1 Port Application and Clock Parameters ueoieeccccc etse ce ampie epDas n nie Ee pb EGER A 43 FU Ont Fhe ENS a A A N E O EN EE E TE A 44 FT1 Logical Line Parameters cine T a E ariaa eae Galil re A 50 FET Eine eat BE oo ce Due n dra Ep a ae A 56 micat cs Mabe les RETE S DL SOT A 57 FET POP IBIOUR uerus epi dehaq SN A 58 FET Gegicall Lire Farsi tent orca periit aai Upepc pure arto tad aane apr A 63 Synchronous Line Parameters TE TRO Aruna AT T O A 69 TTA US
11. 255 to 399 ft dsx1 plus point8 0 8 dB 399 to 533 ft dsx1 plus1 point1 1 1 dB 533 to 655 ft dsx1 plus1 point5 1 5 dB By default the signal level is set to 0 0 dB Set the long haul or short haul signal level for this MCTI interface according to the length of the cable or as the carrier specifies Using the BCC To change the signal level navigate to the mct1 prompt for example box mct1 1 1 and type signal level variable For example mct1 1 14 signal level ds1 minus 15 Using Site Manager See the Signal Level dB parameter on page A 31 for information 7 20 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring MCE1 and MCT1 Services Setting the Alarm Threshold Time By default the MCT1 interface waits 2 seconds before logging a performance defect or anomaly as an event message Change the alarm threshold time to any value from 2 to 10 seconds Using the BCC To change the alarm threshold time navigate to the mct1 prompt for example box mct1 1 1 and type setup alarm threshold integer For example mctl1 1 14 setup alarm threshold 3 Using Site Manager See the Setup Alarm Threshold seconds parameter on page A 31 for information Setting the Alarm Threshold Clear Time By default the clear time for performance failure conditions is 2 seconds If the defect or anomaly clears in this time interval MCTI records a performance cleared condition and logs an event message You can change the ala
12. Description internal Internal Uses the clock chip on the MCT1 module loop1 Port 1 Ext Loop The default uses the signal coming in from port 1 loop2 Port 2 Ext Loop Uses the signal coming in from port 2 loop3 Port 3 Ext Loop Uses the signal coming in from port 3 on a QMCT1 loop4 Port 4 Ext Loop Uses the signal coming in from port 4 ona QMCT1 external Auxiliary Ext Uses an external source via port 1 ona QMCT1 Note External clocking via port 1 requires a special Y cable Nortel Networks Order No AA0018006 308648 14 00 Rev 00 7 27 Configuring WAN Line Services Using the BCC To set the primary clock source navigate to the mct1 prompt for example box mct1 1 1 and type primary clock variable For example mct1 1 1 primary clock loop1 Using Site Manager See the Primary Clock parameter on page A 35 for information Setting the Secondary Clock Source On DMCT1 net modules and QMCT1 or QMCT1 w DSOA link modules only you can specify a backup source for timing signals BCC Options Site Manager Options Description internal Internal The default uses the clock chip on the link or net module loop1 Port 1 Ext Loop Uses the signal coming in from port 1 loop2 Port 2 Ext Loop Uses the signal coming in from port 2 loop3 Port 3 Ext Loop Uses the signal coming in from port 3 ona QMCT1 loop4 Port 4 Ext Loop Uses the signal coming in from port 4 ona QMCT1 exte
13. Number of retransmission underflow errors These occur when the FIFO buffer empties before the device obtains the next DMA request Internal device errors B 52 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Commands for Serial Services BCC show Commands The show serial lt container gt commands display configuration status and statistical information about serial lines Table B 5 lists all of the serial show commands The filter flags and filter arguments are options that you can use with each keyword also called subcommand Table B 5 Serial show Commands lt container gt lt keyword gt lt arguments gt lt filter_flags gt lt filter_arguments gt alerts circuit lt circuit_name gt slot lt slot gt detail circuit lt circuit_name gt slot lt slot gt eia status errors circuit lt circuit_name gt slot lt slot gt sample period lt period_in_seconds gt circuit lt circuit_name gt slot lt slot gt stats circuit lt circuit_name gt slot lt slot gt summary circuit lt circuit_name gt slot lt slot gt 308648 14 00 Rev 00 B 53 Configuring WAN Line Services show serial alerts The show serial alerts command displays all serial circuits that are enabled but not up Use this display to identify the interfaces that are not working This command allows for the following command filters flags and filter arguments circuit circuit name Displays infor
14. Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Retry Count COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit SYNC Parameters 16 attempts 1 to 64 attempts Indicates the number of retransmission attempts allowed per frame before a line is declared down Accept the default 16 or specify a number from 1 to 64 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 19 Link Idle Timer COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit SYNC Parameters 9 seconds 1 to 9999 seconds Indicates the number of seconds that can pass before a line is considered idle An idle line is disabled Accept the default 9 seconds or specify a number from 1 to 9999 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 20 Retry Timer COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit SYNC Parameters 300 tenths of a second 3 seconds 1 to 99999 tenths of a second Indicates the time the router waits for a response from the link The router sends link control frames when this timer expires resends the frames up to the value of the Retry Count parameter then disconnects the link Specify a timeout value in tenths of a second 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 21 308648 14 00 Rev 00 A 75 Configuring WAN Line Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter
15. Specify a unique MAC address for the remote interface making sure that the second digit is a zero for example 1 0fffabc5432 Be sure to reverse the local and remote MAC addresses at the remote synchronous pass through interface 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 33 WAN Protocol COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit SYNC Parameters None Standard PassThru PPP SMDS Frame Relay X 25 ATM DXI LAPB SDLC Indicates which WAN protocol has been enabled on this synchronous circuit Accept the current value Use the Circuit List window to change WAN protocols 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 34 CRC Size COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit SYNC Parameters 16 bit 16 bit 32 bit Specifies an error detection scheme You can choose either 16 bit standard or 32 bit extended frame check sequence FCS to detect errors in the packet Set this parameter to 16 bit or 32 bit 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 35 308648 14 00 Rev 00 A 79 Configuring WAN Line Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Sync Media Type COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit SYNC Parameters Default Default T1 E1 RAISEDTR V25BIS ISDN BRI ISDNLEASEDLINE HAYES Specifies the signaling method that the router uses for this l
16. customer premise equipment cyclic redundancy check catrier sense multiple access collision detection clear to send data communications equipment digital data system data link switching Nortel Networks Dual Port Multichannel T1 link or net module digital signal level zero 0 digital signal level zero subrate A digital signal level one data set ready data service unit channel service unit digital system cross connect level 1 data terminal equipment extended superframe format frame check sequence Fiber Distributed Data Interface facility data link fractional T1 Government Open Systems Interconnection Protocol high density bipolar coding high level data link control high speed serial interface xxxvi 308648 14 00 Rev 00 IP ISDN ISO ITU T LAPB LAN MAC MAU MCEI MCTI MTU NBMA NCP NLPID NRZ NRZI NSAP OSI OSPF PCM PDU PHY PMD PPP PTT QMCTI RMT RR Preface Internet Protocol Integrated Services Digital Network International Organization for Standardization International Telecommunications Union Telecommunications formerly CCITT Link Access Procedure Balanced local area network media access control media access unit Multichannel E1 Multichannel T1 maximum transmission unit nonbroadcast multi access Network Control Protocol network layer protocol identifier nonreturn to zero nonreturn to zero inverted network service access point Open Systems Interconne
17. 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 3 1 7 A 26 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Clear Alarm Threshold seconds MCE Connector gt Edit Logical Lines gt Port Details gt MCEI Port Parameters 2 seconds 2 to 10 seconds Specifies the clear time in seconds for performance failure conditions If the defect or anomaly clears in this time interval MCEI records a performance cleared condition and logs an event message Set the timer value 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 3 1 8 International Bit MCE1 Connector gt Edit Logical Lines gt Port Details gt MCEI Port Parameters Disable Enable Disable Specifies whether the international bit is set in the E1 frame Select Enable to set the international bit select Disable to disable it 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 3 1 16 Line Impedance ASN MCE I Connector gt Edit Logical Lines gt Port Details gt MCEI Port Parameters 120 Ohm 120 Ohm 75 Ohm For the ASN MCEI net module only specifies the line impedance Set the line impedance 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 3 1 20 308648 14 00 Rev 00 A 27 Configuring WAN Line Services MCT1 Port Application and Clock Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions
18. 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 4 1 6 Line Coding MCTI Connector gt Edit Logical Lines gt Port Details gt MCT1 Port Parameters B8ZS AMI B8ZS Specifies a line coding method B8ZS line coding replaces a block of eight consecutive binary zeros with an 8 bit B8ZS code containing bipolar violations in the fourth and seventh bit positions of the substituted code In the receive direction the B8ZS code is detected and replaced with eight consecutive binary zeros AMI line coding is also bipolar a binary zero is transmitted as zero volts and a binary 1 is transmitted as either a positive or negative pulse opposite in polarity to the previous pulse When configured for AMI line coding the MCTI link module remains synchronized upon receiving up to 45 consecutive zeros Select the line coding method 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 4 1 7 A 30 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Signal Level dB MCTI Connector gt Edit Logical Lines gt Port Details gt MCT1 Port Parameters 0 0 dB 15 dB 7 5 dB 0 0 dB 0 5 dB 0 8 dB 1 1 dB 1 5 dB Specifies the T1 transmit power level in decibels dB The DS1 values of 15 and 7 5 dB are long haul the carrier determines these values if 0 0 dB is not sufficient The DSX1 values of 0 0 0 5 0 8 1 1 and 1 5 dB
19. 7 39 A 36 A 56 A 63 A 69 Fractional Loopback 7 41 A 37 Interframe Time Fill Character 7 45 A 39 Local HDLC Address 7 42 A 38 A 66 MTU Size 7 46 A 40 A 64 Rate Adaption 7 44 A 39 Remote HDLC Address 7 43 A 38 A 67 Remote Loopback Detection 7 47 A 40 A 69 Service 7 42 A 37 Timeslots 7 52 308648 14 00 Rev 00 WAN Protocol A 37 A 67 WAN protocol 7 35 logical lines defining 7 35 to 7 36 multiline groupings 10 11 parameters NRZI Type 7 32 7 34 Rate Adaption 7 32 7 34 7 44 A 39 Remote HDLC Address 7 43 A 38 A 67 Remote Loopback Detection 7 47 A 40 A 69 Service 7 42 A 37 BERT Alarm Type 7 58 BERT Mode 7 58 BERT mode 7 56 7 61 BERT Test Pattern 7 59 BofL Timeout seconds 7 40 Clear Alarm Threshold seconds 7 11 A 27 A 60 A 61 Enable Disable 7 8 A 25 A 58 External Clock State 7 12 FDL Configuration 7 60 FDL Loop Interframe Fill 7 13 International Bit 7 11 7 61 A 27 A 61 Line Coding 7 59 A 26 A 59 Line Impedance 7 13 A 27 Line Type 7 9 7 59 A 25 A 58 Loop Clock State 7 12 Port Application Mode 7 4 10 12 A 24 A 28 Primary Clock 7 5 7 6 A 24 A 28 Secondary Clock 7 6 7 7 A 25 A 29 Setup Alarm Threshold seconds 7 10 A 26 Timeslots 7 52 WAN Protocol 7 32 7 35 A 37 A 67 logical lines defining 7 35 to 7 36 parameters Accept Fractional Loopback 7 65 Accept Loopback Request 7 23 A 33 Accept Perf Measurement CR Ad
20. All other numbers indicate Explicit which means that the user has selected the address This parameter is used only when the logical line HDLC service is LLC1 It is a value in the range 1 through 7 in the address field of the HDLC packet 1 indicates DCE 3 indicates DTE All other numbers indicate Explicit which means that the user has selected the address B 38 308648 14 00 Rev 00 BCC show Commands show mct1e1 bert stats ll The show mct1e1 bert status Il command displays statistics about BERT logical line testing for the circuit This command allows for the following command filter flag and filter argument circuit circuit name Displays information about the specified circuit only The output contains the following information Slot Module Conn Name of the physical interface Circuit Name of the logical line Logical Line Index Index number given to the logical line and assigned by the creation Bert Mode State of BERT mode enabled or disabled In BERT mode the router introduces deliberate error patterns into the transmitted bit stream on a single logical line Bits Continuous bit counter Bit Errors Number of bit errors received on this interface 308648 14 00 Rev 00 B 39 Configuring WAN Line Services show mct1e1 bert stats port The show mct1e1 bert stats port command displays statistics about BERT testing for the port This command allows for the following command filter flag and
21. Configuring FE1 Services Table 9 8 Logical Line Configuration Tasks continued Configuration Task BCC Site Manager Page Setting the Remote HDLC Address 4 4 9 20 Viewing the Configured WAN Protocol V 9 21 Setting the CRC Size V V 9 21 Setting Synchronous Line Coding 4 V 9 21 Enabling or Disabling Extended Addressing V v 9 22 Enabling or Disabling Remote Loopback Detection y 4 9 23 Editing Line Resources V 9 23 Assigning Timeslots V V 9 23 Setting FE1 Line Priority 4 9 24 Setting the Hold Down Interval 4 9 25 Viewing the External Clock Speed v Dos After you finish adding the logical line for a non PRI interface using Site Manager the Adapter Module FE1 Logical Line window displays each logical line This window also displays the parameter values for the highlighted logical line Use the scroll bar to view additional logical line parameters To edit parameters for a logical line complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Adapter Module FE1 Logical Line window select the line and circuit name from the logical lines list Site Manager displays the circuit s parameters 2 Edit the parameters 3 Click on Apply 308648 14 00 Rev 00 9 15 Configuring WAN Line Services Disabling and Reenabling the Logical Line The logical line is enabled by default
22. Not Pres Module is enabled but not yet started This state occurs for several reasons For example the link module may not be physically present in the chassis The software may be booting and has not yet initialized the driver software the slot may be running diagnostics or there may be a problem with the configuration continued B 26 308648 14 00 Rev 00 BCC show Commands Total Time Up If the line is not up Operational State does not equal Up then three Down dashes appear If the line is up Operational State equals Up then the value appears in the form hhhmmmsss where hhis hours mm is minutes and ss is seconds For example the value might appear as 5h31m05s If the value is greater than 24 hours it appears in the form dadhhhmmm where dd is days hh is hours and mm is minutes For example the value might appear as 2d10h15m Errors Displays errors for a specific circuit MTU Maximum transfer unit size the buffer size for the HSSI port also the largest frame that can be transmitted or received across the HSSI port The value ranges from 3 to 4608 bytes show hssi detail The show hssi detail command displays detailed configuration and statistical information This command allows for the following command filters flags and filter arguments circuit circuit name Displays information about the specified circuit only slot lt slot gt Displays information about the specified slo
23. Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID You access the FT1 clock parameters from the Edit Adapter Module window Primary Clock FE1 Connector gt Adapter Module FE1 Logical Lines gt Port Details gt Edit Adapter Module FE1 Port Parameters For QMCT1 Internal For FE1 Port 1 Ext Loop For QMCT1 Internal Port 1 Ext Loop Port 2 Ext Loop Port 3 Ext Loop Port 4 Ext Loop Auxiliary Ext For FE1 Internal Port 1 Ext Loop Identifies the primary source of the timing signals Internal Uses the clock chip on the link module Port n Ext Loop Uses the signal coming from Port n Auxiliary Ext Uses an external source via the DB9 interface Select Internal to use the clock chip on the link or net module Select Port 1 Ext Loop to use the signal coming from port 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 18 1 3 Secondary Clock FE1 Connector gt Adapter Module FE1 Logical Lines gt Port Details gt Edit Adapter Module FE1 Port Parameters For QMCT1 Internal For FEI Internal Internal Port 1 Ext Loop Identifies the secondary source of the timing signals The router uses the secondary clock only when the primary clock is unavailable Internal Uses the clock chip on the link module Port n Ext Loop Uses the signal coming from Port n Auxiliary Ext Uses an external source via the D
24. See the Station Type parameter on page A 18 for information Setting the Control Field The Control Field parameter specifies the desired window size or modulo of the sequence numbering the router uses to number frames The parameter options are as follows e Modulo 8 e Modulo 128 By default the Control Field parameter is set to Modulo 8 Set the control field on the interface Using Site Manager See the Control Field parameter on page A 19 for information 308648 14 00 Rev 00 2 37 Configuring WAN Line Services Setting the Maximum N1 Frame Size The Max NI Frame Size parameter specifies the frame size in bytes for a frame that the router or network transmits This number excludes flags and 0 bits inserted for transparency By default the Max N1 Frame Size parameter is set to 1600 bytes Select a frame size from 3 to 4500 bytes to suit your network configuration Using Site Manager See the Max N1 Frame Size parameter on page A 19 for information Setting the Window Size The Window Size parameter specifies the default transmit and receive window size for the interface This value is the maximum number of unacknowledged frames that you allow from the router or network at any one time By default the window size is 7 frames Select a window size from 1 to 127 frames to suit your network configuration Using Site Manager See the Window Size parameter on page A 19 for information Setting the Maximum N2
25. The FDL address mode determines how the local FDL responds to HDLC addresses in messages from the remote FDL 308648 14 00 Rev 00 B 51 Configuring WAN Line Services show mct1e1 timeslot The show mct1e1 timeslot command displays timeslot assignments for all circuits or for a specific circuit The output contains the following information Slot Module Conn Line Number Line Name Logical Line Index Timeslot show mct1e1 tx errors Name of the physical interface Line number for this line assigned during configuration This line number uniquely identifies this interface and is not equal to any of the line numbers assigned to logical lines configured through this port Name of this logical line Logical line number for this line Circuit s timeslot assignment A number under the timeslot indicates that the logical line is using the timeslot T1 lines have 24 slots and E1 lines have 31 The show mct1e1 tx errors command displays statistical information about transmission errors for all circuits or for a specific circuit This command allows for the following command filter flag and filter argument circuit circuit name Displays information about the specified circuit only The output contains the following information Slot Module Conn Circuit Logical Line Index Underflow Frames Descriptor Errors Name of the physical interface Description of circuit Logical line number for this line
26. These clock parameters define the timing sources for the selected port only e Configured DMCTI net module QMCTI link module or QMCT1 w DSOA link module Display the MCT1 Port Parameters window MCT1 Connector gt Edit Logical Lines gt Port Details gt MCT1 Port Parameters See Customizing MCT Port Parameters on page 7 16 You customize the clock parameters as you would any other QMCT1 or DMCTI port parameter For MCEI networks see the Primary Clock parameter on page A 24 for information For MCT1 networks see page A 28 For QMCTI and QMCTI w DSOA link modules and the DMCTI net module see page A 35 The router uses the secondary clock only when the primary clock is unavailable For MCEI networks see the Secondary Clock parameter on page A 25 for information For MCT1 networks see page A 29 For QMCTI and QMCTI w DSOA link modules and the DMCTI net module see page A 35 Customizing MCE1 Port Parameters The MCEI port parameters apply to each of the DSO channels timeslots provided by an MCEI port connector Table 7 2 lists the MCEI configuration tasks described in this section and indicates whether you can use the BCC or Site Manager to perform each task Table 7 2 MCE1 Port Configuration Tasks Task BCC Site Manager Page Enabling or Disabling the MCE1 Port v 4 7 8 Setting the MCE1 Line Type V V 7 9 Setting the MCE1 Line Coding 4 V is Setting the MCE1
27. Using Site Manager See the Carrier Loss Debounce Time out parameter on page A 16 for information Setting Up DTE Loopback Testing On ASN and System 5000 platforms the DTE loopback diagnostic function provides loopback testing to the DCE When the DTE router transmits a loopback signal to the DCE the DTE waits for the DCE to acknowledge and return the signal The DCE provides the transmit and receive clock signals over a full duplex DTE to DCE connection The DCE provides the transmit and receive clock signals 5 8 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring HSSI Services There are four DTE loopback settings e No_Loopback Prevents the DTE from sending loopback signals to the DCE e Local Digital Loop A Allows the DTE to check the DTE DCE interface In a Loop A test the DTE transmission is returned to the DTE on the received local DCE data circuit The CA LED DCE Ready must be on e Local Line Loop B Allows the DTE to check the DTE DCE interface and the transmit and receive sections of the local DCE In a Loop B test the output of the transmitting section of the DCE is returned to the receiving section of the DCE The CA LED DCE Ready must be on e Remote Line Loop C Allows the DTE to check the functions of the transmission path to the remote DCE interface Figure 5 2 illustrates how the DTE and DCE transmit loopback signals over Local Digital Loop A Local Line Loop B and Remote Line Loop C Loop
28. You do this System responds 1 Start at the Configuration Manager window 2 Click on the appropriate link module The Add Circuit window opens connector You must select an E1 T1 Figure 10 3 MCT1 MCE1 HSSI or synchronous link or net module connector 3 Click on any of the other connectors you want to add to the multiline circuit 4 Click on OK 5 Add the necessary protocols to this circuit See Configuring Bridging Services or the appropriate routing protocol guide for instructions The connectors that you selected now form a group with a single circuit name For example in Figure 10 3 the lines connecting to COM2 COM3 and COM4 now form one circuit called S42 which distributes traffic using address pairs To change the default traffic distribution method go to Changing the Traffic Distribution Method later in this chapter 10 6 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring Multiline Services Add Circuit Configuration Mode SNMP Agent Circuit Name S42 Color Key Available Select lines from available connectors Slot Connectors 5 I XCVR4 V XCVR3 XCVR2 XCVR1 MCT1 2 T CLOCK MCT1 1 MCE1 2 I CLOCK M MCE1 1 T CONSOLE Figure 10 3 Add Circuit Window Adding Physical Lines to a Circuit The data paths that form a multiline circuit must share the same bandwidth maximum transmission unit MTU and encapsulation method T1 E1 MCT1 MCEI HSSI and Nortel Networks Standar
29. logical line mcel 121 1 7 38 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring MCE1 and MCT1 Services You can edit the logical line parameters from the logical line mce1 121 1 prompt See the following sections for information about editing logical line parameters Using Site Manager To edit parameters for a logical line complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the MCE1 or MCT1 Logical Lines Site Manager displays the circuit s window select the line and circuit name parameters from the logical lines list 2 Edit the parameters 3 Click on Apply Enabling or Disabling the Logical Line The logical line is enabled by default You can disable or reenable each logical line Using the BCC To enable or disable the logical line navigate to the logical line prompt for example stack mce1 1 2 1 logical line mce1 121 1 and type state variable For example logical line mcei 121 14 State disabled Using Site Manager See the Enable Disable parameter on page A 36 for information 308648 14 00 Rev 00 7 39 Configuring WAN Line Services Enabling or Disabling BofL Messages Transmission of BofL packets is enabled by default on a logical line A BofL packet is sent as often as the value you specify for the BofL Timeout parameter Using the BCC To enable or disable BofL messages on the logical line navigate to the logical line prompt for
30. meets IEN T SiS pois T iene MN B hegpu iz s be phe asc tired catecdaepalceeanieyanediataen sae a E a aY 7 10 DS MES CACTUS 7 10 Setting the MCE1 Alarm Threshold Time 2 errante tenen tna nun 7 10 DB juego b Pr T 7 10 Uema Suc EEEF sruni dan adeo sadaian i n oap Dui Re Ox Eust D d 7 11 Setting the Alarm Threshold Clear Time sese 7 11 d usi ic rU I i 7 11 Using Site Manager E E ETE E EEE E d 7 11 Enabling or Disabling the International Bit iiie rte reete enean 7 11 Umg PE BOC eate v m 7 11 Using Site Manager T ATAA T E P T T s 71 xii 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Getting ihe Loop CBE 5 vaccinia ONAN IERNTE OEE UMIDE BOC neon rao iod akon as ddl asian adie ane aera tanaka 7 12 Seting he Exetel COCK seisena he ares ated ee 7 12 Leno DTe 4 28 TIN reer rrr rnerre tre err re 7 12 Setting the Line Impedance MCE1 Net Modules Only osasse 7 13 a hebu ic p A 7 13 Lg SI RT ARNON i 5 preys tan xn silee atta N E inscia dust sa ioni nad mca Geeks 7 13 Setting the FDL Loop Interframe Fill ueo m Airie oe Geta ee ad Lang me BOG T 7 13 Setting Butler Credits for MOET sicscassismcssienencusienmcutidanisstinedaakineaiinaacaniedin 7 14 Setting the Transmit Buffer Use Credits for MCE1 seseesssss 7 15 Setting the Receive Buffer Use Credits for MCE1 sssssssssss 7 15 Customizing M
31. the chassis the software may be booting and has not yet initialized the driver software the slot may be running diagnostics or there may be a problem with the configuration Number of receive errors Number of transmit errors Number of octets received without error Number of octets transmitted without error Number of frames received without error Number of frames transmitted without error Average packet size number of bytes divided by number of frames received without error Average packet size number of bytes divided by number of frames transmitted without error Number of packets received that are not unicast packets 308648 14 00 Rev 00 show serial summary BCC show Commands The show serial summary command displays summary information for all circuits The output contains the following information Slot Conn Circuit Admin State HW Address WAN Protocol Operational State Name of the physical interfaces Name of the circuit associated with each line Configured state of the serial modules Physical addresses of the lines Each line driver fills in this address from the 48 bit address stored in the serial number PROM for this connector WAN protocol enabled on these interfaces State of the line drivers as follows e Down Driver is not operational DSR Wait External equipment such as a modem DSU or CSU is not currently up and is not asserting a Data Set Ready
32. the router retransmits received data to the sender Select Enable only if you want the port to be in loopback mode 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 6 1 10 WAN Protocol Configured FT1 Connector gt FT1 Logical Lines Standard Standard Passthru PPP SMDS Frame Relay Specifies the WAN protocol for this logical line Accept the current value 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 6 1 14 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring WAN Line Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Service Configured FT1 Connector gt FT1 Logical Lines LLCI Transparent LLC1 Sets the HDLC service type for this logical line Transparent is basic HDLC mode LLC1 adds the HDLC address and control fields as a prefix to the frame Select the HDLC service type for this logical line 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 6 1 15 Local HDLC Address Configured FT1 Connector gt FT1 Logical Lines 7 DCEI21IDTElIA4151617 Specifies the 1 byte local HDLC address of this logical line The DCE address is 1 the DTE address is 3 Select DCE DTE or specify an explicit address value 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 6 1 16 Remote HDLC Address Configured FT1 Connector gt FT1 Logical Lines g DCEI21IDTElIA4151617 Specifies the 1 byte remote HDLC address of this logical line The DCE addres
33. 10 seconds You can change the number of seconds over which you want to sample the data and you can display sampled data for a specific circuit This command allows for the following command filters flags and filter arguments period lt number_of_seconds gt circuit lt circuit_name gt lt circuit_name gt Displays data sampled during the period number of seconds specified Displays information about the specified circuit only Displays information about the specified circuit only The output contains the following information Slot Conn Circuit Input Rate bytes sec Input Rate pkts sec Output Rate bytes sec Output Rate pkts sec Input Lack of Resource Output Lack of Resource Name of the physical interface Name of the circuit associated with this line Number of octets received without error Number of packets received without error Number of octets transmitted without error Number of packets transmitted without error Number of packets received and discarded because of lack of resources for example buffers Number of transmit packets discarded because of lack of resources for example buffers 308648 14 00 Rev 00 B 21 Configuring WAN Line Services show ft1e1 stats The show ft1e1 stats command displays FT1 or FE1 input output statistical information for all FT1 or FE modules or for a specific circuit This command allows for the following command filters flags and filte
34. 1989 ANSI T1 403 specification Carrier to Customer Installation DSI Metallic Interface att 54016 AT amp T 54016 Conforms to the 1989 AT amp T specification Requirements for Interfacing Digital Terminal Equipment to Services Employing the Extended Superframe Format none None Disables the FDL mode Using the BCC To set the FDL mode navigate to the ftl prompt for example box ft1 1 1 and type facilities data link integer For example ft1 1 14 facilities data link att 54016 Using Site Manager See the FDL Configuration parameter on page A 47 for information 308648 14 00 Rev 00 8 11 Configuring WAN Line Services Setting the Remote FDL HDLC Address Mode You can select the FDL HDLC address mode to determine how the local FDL responds to HDLC addresses in messages from the remote FDL Set the FDL address mode to by the default or az for this FT1 interface Using the BCC To set the FDL HDLC address mode navigate to the ft1 prompt for example box ft1 1 1 and type fdl target hdlc address variable For example ft1 1 1 fdl target hdlc address az Using Site Manager See the Remote FDL HDLC Address Mode parameter on page A 47 for information Accepting or Rejecting Port Loopback Requests By default the FT1 port accepts requests from a remote device to go into loopback mode During loopback the port loops receive data back onto the T1 transmit path The remote or intermediate
35. 2 43 Chapter 3 Configuring BayStack AN and ANH Asynchronous Services Enabling or Disabling the Asynchronous Driver iuiieuccseesecc cesse eene 3 2 pun rd pic ETT 3 3 Specifying the TCP Start Protocol T ere err T TET T E ELE Setting the Remote IP Address EN UI I I 3 3 Speciiing the Remote POM osaicce end tension entes edad aan 3 4 operino he Local POD c m 3 4 Se Hb Te Baud PAIS iaasa pobbgad aate Kc pebaat Hanna o ad etl anil aaa 3 4 Setting the Idle Timer nd dbi ipee gis em T oshni RE P a Md Setting the TCP Receive Window Size 3 5 Setting the TCP Keepalive Message Interval sessssseeee 3 5 Setting the TCP Inactive Limit TT miter T E tesis etpecace 3 6 Setting the Maximum Transmit Queue Length esses 3 6 Setting the Maximum Receive Queue Length sss 3 6 Chapter 4 Configuring BayStack DSU CSU Services Configuring DOSU GSLI Services 1 iseierr ies cusin ttd RUBRA a naani tt XL N Fe akiai 4 2 Using the BOG 1ueececiistrereae ipods E beides commited m bens 4 2 Heina Sie MODE Lecossit einn rona de hop aaa ba eects i rl ea UO br a aba 4 2 Customizing DSU CSU Services Using the BCC or Xn et PH M 4 3 Seid To CONI ModE iu costa dass iuo asi Crea nebro dt pda sendeanapsaclad cu dg frac Ond 4 4 Using the BCC Stents seein PEET TRU seems T T aa TT eee 44 Heng site Man
36. 25 Configuring WAN Line Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Line Coding MCE1 Connector gt Edit Logical Lines gt Port Details gt MCEI Port Parameters HDB3 AMI HDB3 Specifies a line coding method AMI line coding is bipolar a binary 0 is transmitted as zero volts and a binary 1 is transmitted as either a positive or negative pulse opposite in polarity to the previous pulse When configured for AMI line coding the MCEI link module remains synchronized upon receiving up to 45 consecutive zeros HDB3 line coding maintains sufficient 1s density in the E1 data stream It replaces a block of eight consecutive binary zeros with an 8 bit HDB3 code containing bipolar violations in the fourth and seventh bit positions of the substituted code In the receive direction the HDB3 code is detected and replaced with eight consecutive binary zeros Select the line coding method 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 4 1 7 Setup Alarm Threshold seconds MCE1 Connector gt Edit Logical Lines gt Port Details gt MCEI Port Parameters 2 seconds 2 to 10 seconds Specifies the time in seconds that MCEI tolerates a performance defect or anomaly If the performance defect or anomaly is still present when this time interval expires MCEI records a performance failure and logs an event message Set the timer value
37. 41 A 23 Initiate Link Setup Action 2 40 A 22 Max NI Frame Size octets 2 38 A 19 Max N2 Retries 2 38 A 20 Max T1 Acknowledge Timer seconds 2 39 A 20 Max T2 Acknowledge Timer seconds 2 39 A 21 Max T3 Disconnect Timer seconds 2 40 A 21 Network Link Type A 23 Station Type 2 36 A 18 WAN Protocol 2 42 A 23 Window Size 2 38 A 19 line defined Glossary 1 logical Glossary 1 line build out LBO MCT1 C 2 line coding A 45 C 1 FEI 9 7 9 28 FT1 8 8 8 38 MCEI 7 59 A 26 A 59 MCTI 7 19 A 30 line loopback 7 24 7 62 8 14 8 42 9 9 9 29 line tests FEI 9 26 9 29 FT1 8 35 8 41 internal DSU CSU 4 8 MCE1 7 56 7 61 MCTI 7 56 7 62 line type C 1 Index 4 Link Access Procedure Balanced LAPB protocol See LAPB LLCI HDLC service type 7 42 8 27 9 18 log MCTI filter C 1 logical line tests 7 66 logical lines FEI 9 14 FT1 8 22 in multiline circuit 10 2 loopback 7 41 8 26 loopback A 33 A 48 Fractional T1 7 48 7 65 FT1 logical line 8 26 line 7 24 7 62 8 14 8 42 9 9 9 29 logical line 7 41 8 26 MCE logical line 7 41 MCT1 logical line 7 41 MCT port 7 62 payload 7 24 7 62 8 14 8 42 remote 7 47 8 30 V 54 4 8 Loopback Configuration parameter A 17 MCEI logical line parameters BERT mode A 41 BERT Test Pattern A 41 BofL Enable A 36 A 63 BofL Enable Disable 7 40 BofL Timeout A 36 A 64 Circuit Name 7 35 CRC Size 7 46 A 40 A 68 Enable Disable
38. 5 Configuring a Non PRI Logical Line 8 20 Testing FT1 Lines 8 35 Note This guide assumes that you are working with a router configuration file that already contains the appropriate WAN circuits for the hardware configuration See Configuring and Managing Routers with Site Manager for information about adding circuits to a configuration file Overview of FT1 Services Nortel Networks supports FT1 circuits on ARN AN and ANH routers using the BCC and Site Manager FT 1 interfaces provide high density access to a digital access and crossconnect system DACS An FT interface can transmit or receive up to 24 DSO channels per DS1 frame over leased point to point links with a line rate between 64Kb s and 1 536Mb s in 64Kb increments 308648 14 00 Rev 00 8 1 Configuring WAN Line Services All FT1 modules include an integrated DSU CSU for direct connection to a T1 network The interfaces provide integrated support for loopback testing and bit error rate test BERT line testing FT1 T1 and ISDN Phone Line Configuration If you configure FT1 T1 after configuring an ISDN ST or U interface you may experience line manager faults if you have a 2B D channel one physical RJ 45 cable with two phone circuits with only one phone line configured To avoid any line manager faults configure both phone lines Configuring FT1 Services You can configure an FT1 port using the BCC or Site Manager Note The default serial li
39. 6 10 Enabling or Disabling High Density Bipolar Coding HDBS3S rate Cre 710 Seting ihe ork DOUCE Met m 6 10 Assigning Chamel FONCIONS 1 teniente reinan a su EU 6 11 Circuit Assignment epu A naia E NR T 6 11 Data and Voce PSSSeT QUEM iuussudaecuka arit epe D REDPUS GR prAK IG a UR e ORA 6 11 Chapter 7 Configuring MCE1 and MCT1 Services Overview of MCEI arid MCTI SEIVIDBS eie cetaceiei tenes Focoseib t tee eS eue sb nee nea rac aaa 7 2 Conngurigg MOET and MOTI POIS isses ei iu eric etes nd nonna agis 7 3 re OCUING ihe Part ABDIGSDON a2 cccconcsxaccutopsscencdecavandetnensaceuanimraudonetartsaasepoeavicaetomncaiues 7 3 Lemno ice 7 3 Linc SE eTe e a naan sats deb ob bat D xe lr ENDO Cx OR UE KFR COR kaa DU MER 7 4 Seting he ock Parameter T a 7 5 Leng ne BOG m TUE 7 6 Using Site Manager TEE E E E E anion ba 7 6 Customizing MCEI Part Pars mblelg ucc ee conte ciccasras iaa aaa Ro n E EEEN 7 7 Enabling or Disabling the MCEI Port ss ccscissnsirscinesstidanniseicsanorndansiindaalies ncaa 7 8 Using the BCC rere TT TE beds seals Sree ee theta re anse ae Leng ate Manager oec abiere p aa opt reer eri ate a Perper Tree er ui a rere Rud rere 7 8 Sonn mon ET Line TD cune cue piae eot tid aas cabo raro Qua Cub Cobb zc cud 7 9 Using he BOC ae V MA 7 9 Hang Site Manigat casera pertgaa aora at bbc aon d adeo nee cond aa 7 9 Setting the MCE1 Line Coding
40. 8 FDL Configuration MCTI Connector gt Edit Logical Lines gt Port Details gt MCT1 Port Parameters ANSI 403 ANSI 403 AT amp T 54016 None Selects a facility data link FDL mode only when the line is configured with an ESF line type The default ANSI 403 conforms to the 1989 ANSI T1 403 specification Carrier to Customer Installation DSI Metallic Interface AT amp T 54016 conforms to the 1989 AT amp T specification Requirements for Interfacing Digital Terminal Equipment to Services Employing the Extended Superframe Format Specify the FDL mode 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 4 1 14 Remote FDL HDLC Address Mode MCTI Connector gt Edit Logical Lines gt Port Details gt MCT1 Port Parameters BY AZ BY Selects the FDL address mode to determine whether the local FDL responds to HDLC address BY or AZ in messages from the remote FDL Specify the FDL address mode 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 3 1 9 A 32 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Accept Loopback Request MCTI Connector gt Edit Logical Lines gt Port Details gt MCT1 Port Parameters Enable Enable Disable Enables or disables loop up and loop down code detection When this parameter is enabled this port accepts and complies with requests to go into loopback mode from a remote device
41. 8 71 FTT and ISDN Phone Line Configuration ceca esee ttt eese ine itae 8 2 Mosa elg s FT STEES NET TD OD 8 2 Contiguring an FT1 Port Using tha BOS erect rena aceto atentos to Pep vdd Tis 8 2 Satling the Extertial Clock SIAE imussa o rat Rer aaro a 8 2 Configuring FT1 Services Using Site Manager seseeeeeene 8 3 Sening he Clock lig assis ascent eo aparea aaa aan A eeentert 8 3 Leno me BOG asitiani TUE 8 4 Using Site Manager T E T vU Lo pulsu uter Rae tieu Rant eae 8 4 Customizing FT1 Services Using the BCC or Site Manager sueeesesss 8 5 Enabling or Disabling he PT T POEL 2s sasaxueu becmacsisadeususs itc uk UE rd qu ub E uc dU ga 8 6 Using the BCC Shin AT ES Siete ET ETT an PAT eee Lemo ste ROTA OI cats cpa veces re pas rp setae aita ped ae i a POR RU 8 6 SII he ETT EI TD cccuiuuo cac ru Eco OR UE OREL EDU O ELI Cub Cobol zo cce 8 7 B hegul fcoeo pq 8 7 Hang Ske Maraga eee portdn dan ta A coat actae 8 7 Setting the FT1 Line Coding T salman oreki E EA eins 111 8 8 LOY me BOG vrr sce caavasaeetinulotieiaacenanste cede sia as eee ante acide ebhaeaieta dee 8 8 Using Sue Manager orrainn a Ea aaa DiN 8 9 eR NAS SAU IV Mem 8 9 Hemo we P PTT A 8 9 Uema Me KEO EF resikana danas so D E O 8 10 Setting the Alann Threshold TIME idees e eoe aapa aa Foot qon S 8 10 Ueno me BOC gaani RT A 8 10 Using Site Manager
42. 84 Idle RR Frames 2 26 A 80 Internal Clock Speed 2 9 A 72 KG84A Cycle 2 23 A 80 KG84A Remote Resync Wait 2 23 A 81 KG84A Sync Loss Interval 2 23 A 81 KG84A Sync Pulse 2 24 A 82 Link Idle Timer 2 25 A 75 Local Address A 77 Minimum Frame Spacing 2 14 A 66 A 77 MTU 2 6 A 71 Network Link Level 2 24 A 83 Pass Thru Local Address 2 17 A 78 Pass Thru Remote Address 2 17 A 79 Promiscuous 2 7 A 65 A 71 Remote Address 2 16 A 78 Remote Loopback Detection 2 28 A 84 Retry Count 2 25 A 75 Retry Timer 2 27 A 75 RTS Enable 2 11 A 73 Service 2 12 A 65 A 74 Signal Mode 2 10 A 73 Sync B Channel Override 2 29 A 85 Sync Force IFTF A 85 Sync Hold Down Time 2 29 A 83 Sync Line Coding 2 21 A 68 A 84 Sync Media Type 2 19 A 80 Sync Polling 2 20 A 82 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Sync Priority 2 28 A 86 Transmit Window Size 2 13 A 76 WAN Protocol 2 17 A 79 T T1 6 10 configuring for multiline 10 2 connection configuring 7 31 7 33 DSX 1 6 6 frame format 6 4 overview 6 1 parameters B8ZS Support 6 6 A 89 Clock Mode A 89 Enable 6 4 A 88 Frame Type 6 5 A 88 Line Buildout 6 7 A 89 Mini Dacs 6 7 A 90 signals 6 5 6 10 7 9 7 19 8 8 8 38 synchronization 6 10 technical publications xxxviii technical support xxxix text conventions xxxiv time fill pattern interframe 2 30 7 45 A 85 timeslots FEI 9 23 FT1 8 33 MCEI and MCTI 7 52 traffic priorities HSSI 5 10 V V 5
43. 85 Poou nE TOO cs oaseccscss ean ahiveaina sb iuaean auconapsaiedos tuscan iebiaetiad pie BRAN RaNRRIeIaK CAIRNE 8 35 Seting Port Test POIBIDIOTS 2 ciniscseienrtaatluaseiledisiaandaatintuntra Guinan dn ai a 8 36 Mu dst cT TT 8 36 Enabling or Disabling BERT Mode uuscsssnkes rura e d ep c ace Ra ec aco 8 37 Setting the BERT Alarm Type abate iat eae Resets T bieti 8 37 Seting The BERT Test PaUO BU a acce scitote het PESE Oo cen Eie e iedadneeeieneae 8 37 xviii 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Setting the Line Coding Method 00 eccccscccesecceeeeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeaeeestseeeeesaeeeeees B 38 NHC Thi LNE DDE sia shit ais uoi e oou ibid ke de ln a d OL c Dabo 8 39 Seting FOL COTES e Gaceracuedacktreatnaand Site cave aed tin ade eaee ks 8 39 Sata the SIDE Rai op ey repre ere e ee tery rer errr rer rT ery 8 40 Using Site Manager UNE 8 40 xiQaieBg gl A 8 41 Uinc S EOE orioa deltas e binos S toan ON DER A acida 8 41 Entering BERT Test Commands ees jidostsids erates T neq atag 8 41 Entering FTT Port Loopback Commarids 1 creat arti pner reet eua 8 42 Chapter 9 Configuring FE1 Services i i RcdgcuE i10 0 t 9 1 GONGD FET OBERE oinaan de Sem nier ae uadis ERR dna ed 9 2 Configuring an FE1 Port Using the BCC OT AT ee bends m 9 2 Setting the Extrema Clack SIBI usb de Deoa i ln OR Es acta 9 2 Configuring FE1 Services Using Site Manager
44. 9 4 1 6 A 58 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter Line Coding Path FE1 Connector gt Adapter Module FE1 Logical Lines gt Port Details gt Edit Adapter Module FE1 Port Parameters Default For MCTI B8ZS For MCEI and FE1 HDB3 Options For MCTI AMI B8ZS For MCEI and FE1 AMI HDB3 Function Specifies a line coding method AMI line coding is bipolar a binary 0 is transmitted as zero volts and a binary 1 is transmitted as either a positive or negative pulse opposite in polarity to the previous pulse When configured for AMI line coding the MCT1 MCEI or EI FEI module remains synchronized upon receiving up to 45 consecutive zeros For MCT1 B8ZS Bipolar with 8 Zero substitution line coding replaces a block of 8 consecutive binary zeros with an 8 bit B8ZS code containing bipolar violations in the 4th and 7th bit positions of the substituted code In the receive direction the B8ZS code is detected and replaced with 8 consecutive binary Zeros For MCEI and FE1 HDB3 line coding maintains sufficient 1s density in the E1 data stream It replaces a block of eight consecutive binary zeros with an 8 bit HDB3 code containing bipolar violations in the fourth and seventh bit positions of the substituted code In the receive direction the HDB3 code is detected and replaced with eight consecutive binary zeros Instructions Select the line coding method MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 4 1 7 308648
45. A Local DTE Local DCE T Loop B Local DTE Local DCE Remote DCE Remote DTE I HSSI 2 Loop C Local DTE Local DCE Remote DCE Remote DTE ij HSI0005A Figure 5 1 DTE to DCE Loopback Testing 308648 14 00 Rev 00 5 9 Configuring WAN Line Services Using Site Manager See the Loopback Configuration parameter on page A 17 for information Sending Traffic Across a HSSI Interface You can set priorities for traffic sent across a HSSI line interface by using a process called protocol prioritization This protocol enables you to prioritize traffic so that the router transmits traffic with the highest priority first You must manually start protocol prioritization on a HSSI interface For information on how to configure protocol prioritization see Configuring Traffic Filters and Protocol Prioritization 5 10 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Chapter 6 Configuring E1 and T1 Services This chapter describes customizing line parameters for E1 and T1 WAN interfaces It contains the following sections Section Page Overview of E1 and T1 Services 6 1 Editing T1 Services 6 2 Editing E1 Services 6 8 Overview of E1 and T1 Services T1 services use digital signals to allow two pairs of wires to carry 24 voice or data transmissions El services use digital signals to allow two pairs of wires to carry 30 voice or data transmissions E1 services 2 048 CEPT are the European equivalent of T1 s
46. AND CONDITIONS LICENSEE FURTHER AGREES THAT THIS AGREEMENT IS THE ENTIRE AND EXCLUSIVE AGREEMENT BETWEEN NORTEL NETWORKS AND LICENSEE WHICH SUPERSEDES ALL PRIOR ORAL AND WRITTEN AGREEMENTS AND COMMUNICATIONS BETWEEN THE PARTIES PERTAINING TO THE SUBJECT MATTER OF THIS AGREEMENT NO DIFFERENT OR ADDITIONAL TERMS WILL BE ENFORCEABLE AGAINST NORTEL NETWORKS UNLESS NORTEL NETWORKS GIVES ITS EXPRESS WRITTEN CONSENT INCLUDING AN EXPRESS WAIVER OF THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT iv 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Contents Preface inire e 125 ee eee eee E T eer ener er reine ener td tren EAE E mt eerrr tr err try xxxiii TO ipi rm xxxiv PHC OVNI dues epoca REMEDIA pU D Pp SV UI aD pr RE RE or ARR CROIRE ber aa pU Ra n Ran XXXV Hard Gopy Technical BIS uiia enc eredecadani ttd nd b dc a pra tad xxxviii a to Get HEN cece cca waceesicndct ice atetse inctiae aai XXXix Chapter 1 Getting Started Whais ihe Delteult CORIBDISIDIIS upcoietirqitestesvxcie uec qqdit bekam ate ed on Unt Priv cene iU da 1 2 Summary of WAN Line Configuration Services sess 1 2 Staring the Contguraton TOJE ocosusba ususscaucndtiattrsrxx unix pact cde ddnde saddle aaa 1 3 Accessing Line Paremelele usse dicet ied in i r dup erEEU 1 4 Using tho BE eger EE 1 4 Usmg pie Mandai MEL T PE SR ERN 1 5 Chapter 2 Configuring Synchronous Services Overview of Synchronous Services uus sese dac kenex ibunt sedare du pas esa xd kd dual 2 2 Customizing Synchronous Services Using th
47. Alarm Threshold Time J V 7 10 Setting the Alarm Threshold Clear Time V V 7 11 Enabling or Disabling the International Bit V V FN continued 308648 14 00 Rev 00 7 7 Configuring WAN Line Services Table 7 2 MCE1 Port Configuration Tasks continued Task BCC Site Manager Page Setting the Loop Clock 4 7 12 Setting the External Clock V 18 Setting the Line Impedance MCE1 Net Modules V V 7 13 Only Setting the FDL Loop Interframe Fill v 7 3 Setting the Transmit Buffer Use Credits for MCE1 V Tis Setting the Receive Buffer Use Credits for MCE1 V 7 15 Enabling or Disabling the MCE1 Port An MCE1 port is enabled by default when you add the circuit You can disable or reenable this MCEI port without moving any cables Using the BCC To enable or disable the MCE port navigate to the mcel prompt for example stack mce1 1 2 1 and type state variable For example mcel 1 2 1 state disabled Using Site Manager See the Enable Disable parameter on page A 25 for information 7 8 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring MCE1 and MCT1 Services Setting the MCE1 Line Type Select one of the following line types frame formats to match your E1 equipment Table 7 3 MCE1 Line Type Options BCC Option Site Manager Option el E1 the default e1 crc E1 CRC e1 mf E1 MF1 e1 crmf E1 CRC MF Using the BCC To change the line type navigate
48. BCC or Site Manager Table 4 1 lists the DSU CSU configuration tasks described in this chapter and indicates whether you can use the BCC or Site Manager to perform each task Table 4 1 DSU CSU Configuration Tasks Site Task BCC Manager Page Setting the Option Mode J 4 4 4 Selecting the Transmit Clock Source V V 4 4 Resetting the Router Jv 4 5 Enabling or Disabling the 64K Transmit Monitor V V 4 6 Configuring Line Availability V 4 6 Setting the Poll Rate V 4 7 Resetting the CQMS Counters 4 4 7 Configuring the V 54 Loopback Test State V V 4 8 Configuring the V 54 Loopback Timer V V 4 9 308648 14 00 Rev 00 4 3 Configuring WAN Line Services Setting the Option Mode The DSU CSU module supports communication with either 56 Kb s digital data system DDS or 64 Kb s clear channel CC service The data rate of the DSU CSU must match the network service Use the Option Mode parameter to identify the type of Telco service to which the DSU CSU is connected Table 4 2 lists the Telco service options Table 4 2 Telco Service Options BCC Option Site Manager Option Descriptions dds156kbps DDS1 56KBPS The default use when connected to a DDS1 56 Kb s line cc64kbps CC 64KBPS Use when connected to a CC 64 Kb s line Using the BCC To change the option mode navigate to the dsucsu prompt for example box dsucsu 1 1 and type telco service variable For exam
49. Connection This section assumes that you have isolated a problem to a multichannel T1 MCT1 connection To troubleshoot an MCT1 connection 1 Filter the log to display only messages from the MCT1 entity running on the slots experiencing the problem The Technician Interface command is as follows log fftwid eDS1E1 s s ot no Example If you are filtering events from slots 3 and 4 enter the following command log fftwid eDS1E1 s3 s4 2 Check the following MCT1 MIB entries by entering the following Technician Interface commands get wfDrivers 14 0 Or use this Quick Get path wfSoftwareConfig gt wfDrivers gt wfMunichLoad get wfLinkModules 17 0 Or use this Quick Get path wfSoftwareConfig gt wfLinkModules gt wfMCTIElILoad 3 Make sure that the Line Type and Line Coding supplied by the T1 provider match the associated settings in the MCT1 configuration 4 Make sure that the digital signal level 0 DS0 channels match at both the router and the central office 308648 14 00 Rev 00 C 1 Configuring WAN Line Services 10 11 12 Watch the LEDs on the back of the MCT1 module If the Sync LED keeps flashing the line build out LBO is not in sync This indicates impedance or resistance on the line Ask the T1 carrier if you should set it to long haul or short haul and configure the LBO parameter accordingly The Sync LED stays on when the framer is in sync with the carrier s clock Ma
50. Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Local Port COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit Asynchronous Parameters 2100 1 to 65535 Specifies a local port on the router for the TCP connection for asynchronous communications Enter a local port number The local port number is used only when the Start Protocol parameter is set to Answer 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 3 1 28 Baud Rate COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit Asynchronous Parameters 9600 300 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 Specifies the asynchronous line speed Select the appropriate line speed for this configuration 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 3 1 29 Idle Timer COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit Asynchronous Parameters 20 seconds 1 to 300 seconds Specifies the asynchronous idle timer in seconds Specify an appropriate idle timer value 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 3 1 30 A 4 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Receive Window COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit Asynchronous Parameters 4096 bytes 512 to 65535 bytes Specifies the size of the TCP receive window for received asynchronous packets Spec
51. EC AER 2 27 Using Site Manager E E E mU DR FR meena eee E au CT an 2 27 Enabling or Disabling Extended Addressing esee 2 27 UST Tape o a eT e eee ee ia dx aane eM re Retr nee b Cc 2 27 Enabling or Disabling Remote Loopback Detection esecceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeees 2 28 308648 14 00 Rev 00 vii Ucro Te BOG T 2 28 Using Site Manager T TOT ee genes ar fot seeing T ieri 2 28 Setna a POON Mem Et 2 28 OLET In Ae EOC ognora E T T Tm 2 28 Using Site Manager mE 2 29 Seting thie Hold Down TIME ioci ac ba anb pcc aa abc ac GR aet a ERE 2 29 ME iz T np 2 29 Using Site AMIS ge 2 29 Setting the B Channel Override 2 ete xu til aive eet Ap ERR RR BRUT RD EE 2 29 Using the BCC aureas PE E p Gon P E E SR EP ER PE 2 30 Lento oe TINE acea e edi E E EEE 2 30 Sokma he lE TE PA aiiai ASA a EE sam d 2 30 Using Site Manager T ere eTR ET T oboa A 2 31 Gaafigurning Asynchronous Series 12 sre ee ia pa ia LER ADLER RD ORREE 2 31 Setting the WAN Serial Interface Type sesssesessseeeeene 2 31 Setting the Asynchronous Baud Rate ssssssssesseeeerennes 2 32 Configuring Polled Asynchronous over TCP IP Line Parameters 2 32 Setting the Pasync Parity Type Sekta t obiecit NT m 2 33 Seting The Pasune Data BIS 2 uisu pcuedo ev meo er coco pesi tendre bieten dic EE 2 33
52. Enable parameter on page A 42 for information For information about the NRZI Type parameter see page A 43 Setting the Transmit Queue Length In the BCC the Transmit Queue Length parameter specifies the transmit queue length for each logical line This is the maximum number of buffers present on the transmit descriptor ring on a logical line at any given time You can set this parameter from 0 to 512 A value of zero causes the router to use its default values Nortel Networks recommends that you do not change the default setting of this parameter without careful consideration of the traffic flow in and out of the T1 E1 logical lines Caution You can affect router performance severely by over allocating buffer credits See Setting Buffer Credits for MCE1 on page 7 14 for more information 7 50 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring MCE1 and MCT1 Services Using the BCC To set this parameter navigate to the logical line prompt for example box mce1 1 1 logical line mce1 11 1 and type transmit queue length variable For example logical line mcel 11 1 transmit queue length 100 Note This parameter is not supported on the ASN Setting the Receive Queue Length In the BCC the Receive Queue Length parameter specifies the receive queue length for each logical line This is the maximum number of buffers present on the receive descriptor ring on a logical line at any given time You can set this p
53. Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Remote HDLC Address Configured FE1 Connector gt Adapter Module FE1 Logical Lines 7 1 to 255 Specifies the 1 byte HDLC address of the remote synchronous interface Specify 1 for remote DCE 3 for remote DTE or any other remote HDLC address between 1 and 255 Use unique HDLC addresses for the local and remote interfaces at either end of a point to point circuit If you configure a device at one end of the point to point connection with a local address of DCE and a remote address of DTE you must configure the device at the other end with a local address of DTE and a remote address of DCE If you configure X 25 on this line set this parameter to either 1 DCE or 3 DTE When you send packets to this interface use this HDLC address 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 31 WAN Protocol Configured FE1 Connector Adapter Module FE1 Logical Lines Standard Standard Pass Thru PPP SMDS Frame Relay X 25 ATM DXI LAPB SDLC AOT Indicates which WAN protocol has been enabled on this synchronous circuit Accept the current value 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 34 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring WAN Line Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID
54. GOUDE 1nd coup aont dst b pli dana ta nr cc tao b 2 12 Using the BCC ene T is aeua T aun ee sues ktm 2 12 LISA Sme UMN ler n a a E r 2 12 Specifying the Eink Eevel Protocol 1 1 iacere adi oe rca cubus Romi eras 2 12 Using the BOG scicciusstesssvees Tn peius DEEP itenim 2 13 Lemo Site Manage Edna eee S er er dead debo dino ga 2 13 Seiting the Transr t Window Size qiia sne iacu tace NiE Eana an cix da 2 13 BllweEwidnr rl see eee eee ee eee ere R eer ee herr 2 13 Seine Minimum Frame 3Sp3bIbE sicstesit stateside teens ud dr xt en ca oahu 2 14 Using the BCC auus A ETA EUN 2 14 B hege dtgcslM S 2 14 Specifying Point to Point Addresses 1 assente nta ta had ua keanaan 2 14 Local Address n aeeti T oobi TU T seeders ere Galante 2 16 Pem a Kc 2 16 Viewing the Configured WAN Protocol ccccsescceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaeeeeneeeessaeeesenees 2 17 B hvRu is P 2 17 Usmo dtes DUTCH aoc cedi aee d pedit adn aet Pa Pn aa pcc adeb d loca d 2 17 Setting Pass Through Addresses T TER T T T T eR 2 17 Setting the Pass Thru Remote Address esses 2 18 vi 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Setting the Pass Thru Local Address c cccsssceesececeeeeceeeeaeeeeeceeseaeeeeaaeeenaes 2 18 inm Thus CRO ORE Loos danni dpi concione dion Gd cu AR DA RE RD 2 19 Using he BOG ca e vents areaientastinanticacde eee tea 2 19 Leno ste Maneno aat as pae zag dad e PaL ez age E b ae c ad i 2
55. LOCAL FILE Protocols Slot Lines M XCYR4 I XCVR3 XCVR2 M XCYR1 Pini va MCE1 2 F CLOCK M CONSOLE Figure 10 9 Circuit Definition Window Cancel Figure 10 10 Select Logical Line Window EP ins 10 16 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring Multiline Services EE Select Logical Line d el Figure 10 11 Selecting an Unused Logical Line E tid Add Delete MCE1 22 5 Apply Port Details Circuit Timeslots Values Help Enable Disable ENABLE Breath Of Life BOFL Enable Disable ENABLE BOFL Timeout seconds 5 Fractional Loopback DISABLE WAN Protocol STANDARD Service LLC1 Figure 10 12 Two Logical Lines in a Multiline Circuit 308648 14 00 Rev 00 10 17 Appendix A Site Manager Parameters The following sections in this appendix contain reference information about Site Manager line services parameters Asynchronous Line Parameters DSU CSU Parameters El Line Parameters HSSI Line Parameters LAPB Parameters MCE Port Application and Clock Parameters MCE Port Parameters MCTI Port Application and Clock Parameters MCTI Port Parameters OMCT and DMCT1 Port Parameters MCEI and MCTI Logical Line Parameters FT1 Port Application and Clock Parameters ET1 Port Parameters FTI Logical Line Parameters FE1 Line Parameters FE1 Clock Parameters FE Port Parameters FE1 Logical Line Parameters Synchronous Line Parameters T1 Line P
56. MCE1 and MCT1 Lines later in this chapter for more information about running BERT diagnostics Enabling or Disabling Fractional T1 Loopback Detection QMCTI and QMCTI w DSOA link modules only can detect and generate fractional T1 FT1 loopback codes as specified in ANSI T1 403 Annex B FT1 loopback channel loopback is an ANSI standard 127 octet loop FT1 loopback detection allows remote test equipment to put one channel logical line or DSO group on any port into loopback testing mode without affecting the other logical lines See Running Logical Line Tests later in this chapter for information about generating fractional loopback codes Note Although the DMCTI net module does not support FT1 loopback it does provide BERT testing on selected DSOs as described in Running Logical Line Tests later in this chapter 7 48 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring MCE1 and MCT1 Services Using the BCC To enable or disable FT1 loopback navigate to the logical line prompt for example box mct1 1 1 logical line mct1 11 1 and type accept fractional loop code variable For example logical line mct1 11 1 accept fractional loop code disabled Using Site Manager See the Accept Fractional Loopback Code parameter on page A 42 for information Configuring NRZI Line Encoding On DMCT1 net modules and QMCT1 or QMCTI w DSOA link modules only you can configure the NRZI Encoding NRZI Enable parameter in Site Man
57. Mode 8 37 Setting the BERT Alarm Type 8 37 Setting the BERT Test Pattern 8 37 Setting the Line Coding Method 8 38 Setting the Line Type 8 39 Setting FDL Options 8 39 Setting the Signal Level 8 40 Running Port Tests 8 41 Using Site Manager To set the port test parameters complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this 1 In dynamic mode click on a configured FT1 connector in the Configuration Manager window System responds The Logical Line window opens Click on Port Details The Port Parameters window opens 3 Click on Line Tests Note that the Line Tests option appears only in dynamic mode The Port Actions window opens Edit the port action parameters located in the upper portion of the window After setting a parameter click on Apply Site Manager sets the parameters to the values you specified Click on Done when you are finished setting port action parameters 8 36 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring FT1 Services Note All changes you apply to the port in the Port Actions window are in effect only while the window is active When you exit the Port Actions window all port settings revert to the original settings Enabling or Disabling BERT Mode To initiate BERT testing you must enable BERT mode By setting the BERT mode parameter you enable or disable BERT mode on all logical lines On these interfaces you can enabl
58. NRZI Type logical line parameter Valid options are Mark or Space Like the NRZ Enabled parameter the NRZI Type on a router connecting a host side is unrelated to and can differ from that connecting a remote access side The subscriber s host and remote access settings can also be different 7 30 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring MCE1 and MCT1 Services Frame Relay Frame Relay over T1 EL S EL te over T1 BayStream CPE SDLC Controller PC PC ea cB a PC m i RYSO060A Figure 7 1 SDLC Connection Using Frame Relay over T1 Lines Setting Parameters Using the BCC You can configure a T1 connection to an unconfigured port on a QMCT1 DS0A link module to carry SDLC traffic 1 To configure the T1 connection navigate to the mct1 prompt for example box mct1 1 1 and type logical line circuit name For example mct1 1 14s logical line mct1 11 1 308648 14 00 Rev 00 7 31 Configuring WAN Line Services The circuit name identifies the following e Type of circuit MCT1 e Physical connector slot and port number Number of the logical line on the MCT1 port 2 To configure SDLC as the WAN protocol type logical line mcti 11 14 Wan protocol sdlc 3 Tosetthe Rate Adaption parameter to 9 6 adaption 9dot6k or 19 2 Kb s adaption 19dot2k type logical line mcti 11
59. Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters MTU COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit SYNC Parameters 1600 bytes 3 to 4608 bytes Specifies the largest frame MTU that the router can transmit on this line Set this parameter to a value appropriate for your network For X 25 specify a value of at least 5 bytes more than the maximum packet size for the packet level 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 9 Promiscuous COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit SYNC Parameters Disable Enable Disable Specifies whether the interface filters packets for addresses other than its own local address or whether address filtering is based on both the local and remote addresses When this parameter is set to Enable the interface receives all frames When this parameter is set to Disable the interface receives only frames destined for its local address Set this parameter to Enable or Disable 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 11 308648 14 00 Rev 00 A 71 Configuring WAN Line Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Clock Source COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit SYNC Parameters External External Internal Specifies the origin of the synchronous timing signals clock If you set th
60. PRATT Ret A 88 Multiline Configuration Parameter sssssssssssssssseeeeeene netten nnne tnn A 91 Appendix B BCC show Commands su M S aA B 1 Commands for DSU CSU Services TT ree TTE TT dde NEE AET B 1 ap eme 1d eee B 2 Show CES SS PICT uice t bs utar tacto Geo ae ductu onc Rae De Sato Eo br i Exe DRE etu USER B 3 Receive Errors P E nan E T ER E EEEE B 5 TPS AE UES ceresna teet oo de aO PRAG E Aa B 5 xxii 308648 14 00 Rev 00 SPS te RMS aai ossi pebaa tad poda ca RR b i penne Enc Aa nu RAID B 6 aped iU e UNDIS DEM E E T EORUM B 6 PURE RONG e EUN B 6 esit US eo cose b Qu ve b vende dg vb RR ERR ra RR OR Rena B 7 Bey ECLA ENOS Loop USO treet erect rise reerr rrr cere rrr cert re tet crr RO B 7 show dSuUCSU p J e B 8 SDN eS e Ne AE A S SE E E bod breue edP Ee decis oso FUERON E MERE B 9 show dsucsu summary eile AS eee TE m thee AT Tm B 10 Commands Tor FTT and FE SarviGasi iuit ioi a e e d beet ibd and B 11 SII RINT ESI PCT OO SDN B 12 sbow TOS T SNS ca ode pU MH AU SEM C em MEPEsi tA PNci CEU did RIRs d QAM TAE QUSE B 12 show TUIS T dela uunuscxasiixpibx bp cte Epp e tha ded acp bo aa delP ape E E Receive Errors ete T EE TET traii Sionti T Missing B 15 nrinelgci meer mE B 15 Ducem VIO Si Gnectonc oux cns op ams oftia deduc a RUD UR LIENS CUORE ES Niue B 16 show 11101 err
61. Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID CRC Size Configured FE1 Connector gt Adapter Module FE1 Logical Lines 16 bit 16 bit 32 bit Specifies an error detection scheme You can chose either 16 bit standard or 32 bit extended frame check sequence FCS to detect errors in the packet Set this parameter to either 16 bit or 32 bit 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 35 Sync Line Coding Configured FE1 Connector gt Adapter Module FE1 Logical Lines NRZ NRZ NRZI NRZI Mark Specifies the line coding of the physical synchronous line On AN or ASN routers and on a router with an Octal Sync link module you can change the value to match the line coding of a device at the other end of the line NRZ indicates Non Return to Zero coding NRZI indicates Non Return to Zero Inverted coding NRZI Mark indicates Non Return to Zero Inverted Mark coding Select the appropriate coding for this synchronous line 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 88 Extended Address Configured FE1 Connector gt Adapter Module FE1 Logical Lines Disable Enable Disable Enables or disables testing of the address length When you set this parameter to Enable the router tests the first bit of the address to determine the length of the address in octets Accept the default or select Enable 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 22 A 68 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object
62. Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Extended Address COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit SYNC Parameters Disable Enable Disable Enables or disables testing of the address length When you set this parameter to Enable the router tests the first bit of the address to determine the length of the address in octets Accept the default or select Enable 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 22 Extended Control S and I frames COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit SYNC Parameters Disable Enable Disable Allows the control fields of all S and I frames to 2 octets in length instead of 1 octet Numbering of all I frames becomes Modulo 128 instead of Modulo 8 Accept the default or select Enable 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 24 Transmit Window Size COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit SYNC Parameters 1 frame 1 to 7 frames Specifies the number of I frames that can be transmitted without acknowledgment Accept the default 1 frame or specify a new value 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 27 A 76 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Minimum Frame Spacing COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit SYNC Parameters 1 flag 1 to 32 flags Specifies the number of flags transmitted between adjacent frames Set this parameter to the a
63. Set the Port Application Mode parameter to NONPRI For information on this parameter click on Help or see page A 43 3 Click on OK A window containing the clock parameters opens Clock Parameters Clock parameters define the timing sources that apply to ports and DSO timeslots that an FT1 link module supports The primary clock identifies the primary source of the timing signals The router uses the secondary clock only when the primary clock is unavailable 308648 14 00 Rev 00 8 3 Configuring WAN Line Services The options for the clock parameters are as follows Table 8 1 Clock Parameter Options BCC Option Site Manager Option Description internal Internal Uses the clock chip on the link module loop1 Port 1 Ext Loop Uses the signal coming in from port 1 loop2 Port 2 Ext Loop Uses the signal coming in from port 2 external Auxiliary Ext Uses an external clock source Using the BCC To set the clock parameters navigate to the ft1 1 1 prompt for example box ft1 1 1 and type primary clock variable secondary clock variable For example ft1 1 1 primary clock internal ft1 1 1 secondary clock loop2 Using Site Manager You access the clock parameters via the window that opens after you set the port application mode How you access this window is based on whether or not you have already configured the port e Foran unconfigured FT1 link module The first time you confi
64. Site Manager Parameters 64K Transmit Monitor COM Connector gt Edit DSU CSU gt Edit DSU CSU Parameters Disabled Enabled Disabled Valid only in 64K Clear Channel mode Option Mode set to CC 64KBPS When enabled the parameter suppresses data to prevent unintended duplication of a network control code For example user data that happens to include the text of a loopback control code could place the remote end of the connection into a loop Specify Enabled to monitor and suppress user data keep the default Disabled to allow all data 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 30 1 1 9 V 54 Loopback COM Connector Edit DSU CSU Edit DSU CSU Parameters NO LOOP NO LOOP ANALOG DIGITAL REM DIGITAL REM DIG PATTERN ANALOG PATTERN PATTERN 2047 Configures a V 54 loopback test state within the DSU CSU Note that selecting a loopback test state disrupts user data transmission through the DSU CSU for the period specified by the V 54 Timer parameter Select a test state or keep the default NO LOOP 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 30 1 1 12 308648 14 00 Rev 00 A 9 Configuring WAN Line Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID V 54 Timer COM Connector gt Edit DSU CSU gt Edit DSU CSU Parameters 0 0 to 255 seconds Sets the duration in seconds for the loopback testing specified in the V 54 Loopback parameter Zero 0 indicates that loopback testing runs indefinitely Speci
65. The Cfg TxQ Length parameter specifies the maximum length of the transmit queue for the asynchronous interface If the driver transmit queue length is larger than the value of this parameter it is reduced to the value of this parameter Set the maximum transmit queue length for this interface to a value from 1 to 255 bytes See the Cfg TxQ Length parameter on page A 6 for information Setting the Maximum Receive Queue Length The Cfg RxQ Length parameter specifies the maximum receive queue length for an asynchronous interface If the driver receive queue length is larger than the value of this parameter it is reduced to the value of this parameter Set the maximum receive queue length for this interface to a value from 1 to 255 bytes See the Cfg RxQ Length parameter on page A 7 for information 3 6 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Chapter 4 Configuring BayStack DSU CSU Services You configure and customize services for an internal DSU CSU installed in a BayStack AN ANH or ARN router by setting parameters as described in the following sections Section Page Configuring DSU CSU Services 4 2 Customizing DSU CSU Services Using the BCC or Site Manager 4 3 Configuring V 54 Loopback Tests 4 BayStack routers support an optional integrated DSU CSU serial adapter module with one interface connector for direct connection to Telco leased line circuits Note This guide assumes that you are working with a
66. The T1 timer is the link retransmission timer Link control frames are retransmitted when the T1 expires This timer tracks the number of timeouts Memory Errors Number of memory errors detected A memory error occurs when the DMA cycle expires without obtaining the bus within 26 ms Memory errors may indicate faulty hardware If this count exceeds five contact your Nortel Networks Technical Solutions Center show serial sample The show serial sample command displays data sampled from serial lines over a period of 10 seconds You can change the number of seconds over which you want to sample the data and you can display sampled data for a specific circuit or slot This command allows for the following command filters flags and filter arguments period lt number_of_seconds gt circuit lt circuit_name gt Slot lt slot gt lt circuit_name gt Displays data sampled during the period number of seconds specified Displays information about the specified circuit only Displays information about the specified slot only Displays information about the specified circuit only B 60 308648 14 00 Rev 00 BCC show Commands The output contains the following information Slot Conn Name of the physical interface Circuit Name of the circuit associated with this line Input Rate bytes sec Number of octets received without error Input Rate pkts sec Number of packets received without error Output Rate bytes
67. Ud E EN ES Sync Details Cancel Figure 6 4 E1 Line Entry Window See Chapter 2 for information about editing synchronous line parameters by clicking on Sync Details in the E1 Line Entry window 308648 14 00 Rev 00 6 9 Configuring WAN Line Services Enabling or Disabling E1 Services By default the router enables E1 line services when you add the interface You can disable or reenable this interface without moving the cables See the Enable parameter on page A 10 for information Enabling or Disabling CRC Some E1 equipment expects a 4 byte CRC trailer at the end of each frame By default the CRC trailer is not added to received E1 frames Set the Line Type parameter to E1CRC4 if the E1 equipment expects a 4 byte CRC trailer at the end of each frame See the Line Type parameter on page A 12 for information Enabling or Disabling High Density Bipolar Coding HDB3S E1 uses bipolar format for signals In bipolar format alternating positive and negative pulses on the digital line signify the number 1 and the absence of a pulse signifies 0 see Figure 6 2 on page 6 5 A long string of zeros on an E1 line would cause the line to lose synchronization due to lack of pulses For synchronization Nortel Networks provides HDB3S which is a mechanism to maintain sufficient 1s density in the E1 data stream HDB3S support is disabled by default You can enable or disable HDB3S on this interface depending on the abi
68. a period of 10 seconds You can change the number of seconds over which you want to sample the data and you can display sampled data for a specific circuit or slot This command allows for the following command filters flags and filter arguments period Displays data sampled during the period number of number of seconds seconds specified circuit circuit name Displays information about the specified circuit only slot lt s ot gt lt circuit_name gt Displays information about the specified slot only Displays information about the specified circuit only B 32 308648 14 00 Rev 00 BCC show Commands The output contains the following information Slot Conn Name of the physical interface Circuit Name of the circuit associated with this line Input Rate bytes sec Number of octets received without error Input Rate pkts sec Number of packets received without error Output Rate bytes sec Number of octets transmitted without error Output Rate pkts sec Number of packets transmitted without error Input Lack of Resource Number of packets received and discarded because of lack of resources for example buffers Output Lack of Resource Number of transmit packets discarded because of lack of resources for example buffers show hssi stats The show hssi stats command displays HSSI input output statistical information for all HSSI modules or for a specific circuit or slot This comma
69. a dial on demand interface set this parameter to Idles 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 96 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring WAN Line Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Sync Priority COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit SYNC Parameters 1 1 to 50 Used by dial or switched services to assign priority to lines in the same demand or backup pool For example the router uses a line of priority 1 before it uses a line of priority 2 Assign a priority number to each line in the backup pool The lower the number the higher the priority 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 97 WAN Serial Interface Type COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit SYNC Parameters Sync Sync Async Determines whether this interface uses synchronous or asynchronous communication If you are using asynchronous PPP select Async otherwise accept the default 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 109 Async Baud Rate COM Connector Edit Line Edit SYNC Parameters 9600 1200 2400 4800 9600 14400 19200 28800 38400 57600 64000 76800 96000 115200 When the WAN Serial Interface Type parameter is set to Async determines the transmission speed between the modem and this interface Select a value that is greater than or equal to the spe
70. access the MCE1 and MCT1 logical line parameters from the Configuration Manager window Enable Disable Configured MCE1 or MCT1 Connector gt MCEI or MCTI Logical Lines Enable Enable Disable Enables or disables the logical line Select Enable or Disable 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 6 1 2 Breath of Life BofL Enable Disable Configured MCE1 or MCT1 Connector gt MCEI or MCTI Logical Lines Enable Enable Disable When you set this parameter to Enable a BofL packet is sent as often as the value you specify for the BofL Timeout parameter Set to Disable only if you want to end transmission of BofL packets 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 6 1 8 BofL Timeout Configured MCE1 or MCT1 Connector gt MCEI or MCT1 Logical Lines 5 seconds 1 to 60 seconds Indicates the time between transmissions of BofL packets Specify the time in seconds between transmissions of BofL packets 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 6 1 9 A 36 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Fractional Loopback Configured MCE1 or MCT1 Connector gt MCEI or MCT1 Logical Lines Disable Enable Disable Specifies whether to use diagnostic loopback mode on this circuit In this mode the router retransmits received data to t
71. anomaly as an event message Change the alarm threshold time to any value from 2 to 10 seconds Using the BCC To set the alarm threshold time navigate to the ft1 prompt for example box ft1 1 1 and type setup alarm threshold integer For example ft1 1 1 setup alarm threshold 4 Using Site Manager See the Setup Alarm Threshold seconds parameter on page A 46 for information Setting the Alarm Threshold Clear Time By default the clear time for performance failure conditions is 2 seconds If the defect or anomaly clears in this time interval FT1 records a performance cleared condition and logs an event message You can change the alarm threshold clear time to any value from 2 to 10 seconds Using the BCC To set the alarm threshold clear time navigate to the ftl prompt for example box ft1 1 1 and type clear alarm threshold integer For example ft1 1 14 clear alarm threshold 3 8 10 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring FT1 Services Using Site Manager See the Clear Alarm Threshold seconds parameter on page A 47 for information Setting the FDL Mode for ESF Line Types The FT1 interface selects a facility data link FDL mode only when the Line Type parameter is configured as ESF see Setting the FT1 Line Type on page 8 7 Select one of the following ESF line types Table 8 6 ESF Line Types BCC Option Site Manager Option Description ansi 403 ANSI 403 The default conforms to the
72. asynchronous communications By default the local port number is 2100 You can specify any valid local port number from 1 to 65535 for this interface See the Local Port parameter on page A 4 for information Setting the Baud Rate The Baud Rate parameter specifies the line speed for this asynchronous interface By default the baud rate is 9600 Select one of the following valid baud rates e 300 e 1200 e 2400 e 4800 e 9600 e 19200 See the Baud Rate parameter on page A 4 for information 8 4 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring BayStack AN and ANH Asynchronous Services Setting the Idle Timer By default the router determines that the asynchronous interface is idle after 20 seconds of inactivity The router disables an idle line You can set the idle timer from 1 to 300 seconds See the Idle Timer parameter on page A 4 for information Setting the TCP Receive Window Size By default the router sets the TCP receive window size for asynchronous packets to 4096 bytes Set the Receive Window parameter to a value from 512 to 65535 bytes See the Receive Window parameter on page A 5 for information Setting the TCP Keepalive Message Interval The TCP keepalive message interval specifies how often the local router sends TCP keepalive messages to a remote router The default interval is 8 seconds When the local router sends a TCP keepalive message on the asynchronous interface it expects an acknowledgment ACK
73. example stack mce1 1 2 1 logical line mce1 121 1 and type bofl variable For example logical line mcei 121 14 bofl disabled Using Site Manager See the Breath of Life BofL Enable Disable parameter on page A 36 for information Setting the BofL Timeout The time period between transmissions of BofL packets is 5 seconds by default You can change the BofL timeout to any value from 1 to 60 seconds Using the BCC To set the BofL timeout navigate to the logical line prompt for example stack mce1 1 2 1 logical line mce1 121 1 and type bofl timeout integer For example logical line mcei 121 14 bofl timeout 10 Using Site Manager See the BofL Timeout parameter on page A 36 for information 7 40 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring MCE1 and MCT1 Services Enabling or Disabling Logical Line Loopback In logical line channelized loopback mode the router retransmits received data for specified timeslots only This proprietary SNMP based form of loopback passes data through the HDLC controller and therefore only supports HDLC data Logical line loopback mode is disabled by default Using the BCC To enable or disable logical line loopback navigate to the logical line prompt for example stack mce1 1 2 1 logical line mce1 121 1 and type fractional loopback variable For example logical line mcel 121 14 fractional loopback enabled Using Site Manager See the Fractional Loopback param
74. for example box fe1 1 1 and type setup alarm threshold integer For example fel 1 1 setup alarm threshold 2 Using Site Manager See the Setup Alarm Threshold seconds parameter on page A 60 for information Setting the Alarm Threshold Clear Time By default the clear time for performance failure conditions is 2 seconds If the defect or anomaly clears in this time interval the FE1 interface records a performance cleared condition and logs an event message You can change the alarm threshold clear time to any value from 2 to 10 seconds 9 8 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring FE1 Services Using the BCC To set the alarm threshold clear time navigate to the fel prompt for example box fe1 1 1 and type clear alarm threshold integer For example fel 1 14 clear alarm threshold 2 Using Site Manager See the Clear Alarm Threshold seconds parameter on page A 60 for information Accepting or Rejecting Loopback Requests Note Although the accept loopback request BCC and Accept Loopback Request Site Manager parameters appear to be available they are not supported by the FE services software Setting a Loopback Configuration Setting this parameter immediately places the port in loopback mode without a request from the remote test equipment Table 9 5 lists the loopback configuration options Table 9 5 Loopback Configuration Options BCC Option Site Manager Option Description
75. from the remote router The ACK then resets the inactive limit timer If the local router does not receive an ACK from the remote router within the time limit specified by the TCP Inactive Limit parameter the TCP connection is disabled To prevent an error or alarm condition set the TCP Inactive Limit parameter to a value that allows enough time for multiple TCP keepalive messages Set the TCP KeepAlive parameter to a value from 3 to 180 seconds The router uses this parameter with the TCP Inactive Limit parameter See the TCP KeepAlive parameter on page A 5 for information 308648 14 00 Rev 00 3 5 Configuring WAN Line Services Setting the TCP Inactive Limit When the TCP inactive limit timer expires the TCP connection between the local router and the remote router is lost By default the TCP connection on an asynchronous interface times out in 300 seconds To prevent a TCP connection loss set this parameter to a value that allows enough time for multiple TCP keepalive messages and ACKs from the remote TCP router If the interface is listening for an incoming connection request you can specify a negative value for this parameter to mark the connection as inactive and defer resetting the connection until a connection request is received Set the TCP Inactive Limit parameter to a value from 65536 to 65535 seconds See the TCP Inactive Limit parameter on page A 6 for information Setting the Maximum Transmit Queue Length
76. intermediate equipment then performs diagnostics on the network between that equipment and the DS1 interface No Loopback This option deactivates any loopback Payload Loopback The received signal on this interface is looped through the device Typically the received signal is looped back for retransmission after it has passed through the framing device Line Loopback The received signal does not go through the framing device minimum penetration but is looped back out Select the loopback configuration option for testing After testing set this parameter to No Loopback to return the interface to normal operation 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 4 1 10 A 48 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Send Performance Measurement CR Addr FT1 Connector gt Edit Logical Lines gt Port Details gt FT1 Port Parameters Customer Inst Customer Inst Carrier Specifies the source of performance messages Customer Inst indicates that the customer installation supplies the messages Carrier indicates that the carrier supplies the messages Select the source for outgoing performance messages 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 3 1 18 Accept Perf Measurement CR Addr FT1 Connector gt Edit
77. level in decibels dB Line buildout conditions the signals to mitigate attenuation Line buildout also depends on the physical length of the T1 line The carrier determines signal levels on a long haul 0 to 6000 ft of cable T1 network interface If 0 0 dB is not sufficient for long haul the carrier determines values of 15 ds1 minus15 and 7 5 dB ds1 minus 7point5 Signal power for DSX 1 short haul 0 to 655 ft is based on cable length For DSX 1 decibel levels correspond to cable length as follows Table 8 5 Signal Level Options Cable Length BCC Option Site Manager Option 0 to 133 ft zero pointO 0 0 dB 133 to 255 ft dsx1 plus point5 0 5 dB 255 to 399 ft dsx1 plus point8 0 8 dB 399 to 533 ft dsx1 plus1 point1 1 1 dB 533 to 655 ft dsx1 plus1 point5 1 5 dB By default the signal level is 0 0 dB zero pointO Set the long haul or short haul signal level for this FT1 interface according to the length of the cable or as the carrier specifies Using the BCC To set the signal level navigate to the ft1 prompt for example box ft1 1 1 and type signal level variable For example ft1 1 1 signal level ds1 minus15 308648 14 00 Rev 00 8 9 Configuring WAN Line Services Using Site Manager See the Signal Level dB parameter on page A 46 for information Setting the Alarm Threshold Time By default the FT1 interface waits 2 seconds before logging a performance defect or
78. not count these code words as bipolar violations Number of CRC 4 errors The FDL calculates CRC 4 on the incoming data Each time the calculation does not match the CRC 4 code in the incoming enhanced super frame ESF data stream this count increments Number of far end block error counts Number of loss of frame failures occur when an out of frame event or carrier loss occurs An out of frame event occurs when at least two of four consecutive framing bits are in error Number of loss of signal failures occur when the receive carrier is lost Number of alarm indication failures occur when two consecutive frames have less than three zeros total in the data stream Number of remote alarm failures occur when the yellow alarm is detected 308648 14 00 Rev 00 B 45 Configuring WAN Line Services show mct1e1 rx errors The show mct1e1 rx errors command displays error for all circuits or for a specific circuit This command allows for the following command filter flag and filter argument circuit circuit name Displays information about the specified circuit only The output contains the following information Slot Module Conn Name of the physical interface Circuit Description of circuit Logical Line Index Logical line number for this line Null Frames Number of frames containing no data bytes received Short Frames Number of frames received with only one or two data bytes CRC Errors Number of frame
79. number of packets transmitted without error Total Errors Receive Total number of errors received Total Errors Transmit Total number of errors transmitted Number of Buffers Number of packets received without error Receive Number of Buffers Number of packets transmitted without error Transmit Protocols Configured Protocols configured on this interface Receive Errors The output contains the following information Bad Frames Number of bad receive frames caused by Frame Check Sequence FCS errors or nonoctet aligned errors Runt Frames Number of runt frames received on this line Frame Rejects Number of frame reject errors received on this line Frames Too Long Number of frames received on this line that exceed the MTU Overflow Frames Number of overflow frames received on this line in which the device s FIFO buffer overflowed before obtaining the next DMA cycle No buffer resources are available Transmit Errors The output contains the following information Underflow Frames Number of retransmission underflow errors These occur when the device s FIFO buffer empties before the device obtains the next DMA request 308648 14 00 Rev 00 B 5 Configuring WAN Line Services System Errors The output contains the following information Receive Rejects Number of reject frames received Transmit Rejects Number of reject frames transmitted T1 Timeouts Number of T1 timeouts detected The T1 timer is the link r
80. number uniquely identifies this interface and is not equal to any of the line numbers assigned to logical lines configured through this port Line Name Name of this line Logical Line Index Index number assigned to the line Timeslot Circuit s timeslot assignment An number under the timeslot indicates that the logical line is using the timeslot FT1 lines have 24 slots and FE1 lines have 31 B 24 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Commands for HSSI Services BCC show Commands The show hssi lt container gt commands display configuration status and statistical information about high speed serial interface HSSI lines Table B 3 lists all of the hssi show commands The filter flags and filter arguments are options that you can use with each keyword also called subcommand Table B 3 HSSI show Commands lt container gt lt keyword gt lt arguments gt lt filter_flags gt lt filter_arguments gt alerts circuit lt circuit_name gt slot slot detail circuit circuit name slot slot errors circuit circuit name slot lt slot gt sample period lt period_in_seconds gt circuit lt circuit_name gt slot lt slot gt stats circuit lt circuit_name gt slot lt slot gt summary circuit lt circuit_name gt slot lt slot gt 308648 14 00 Rev 00 B 25 Configuring WAN Line Services show hssi alerts The show hssi alerts command displays all HSSI circuits that
81. of the physical interface Admin State Configured state of the FT1 or FE1 module Operational State Current operating state of the FT1 or FE1 line driver continued 308648 14 00 Rev 00 B 13 Configuring WAN Line Services Total Time Up Down MAC Address MTU WAN Protocol Local Address Remote Address BOFL BOFL TMO Receive Bytes Receive Frames Receive Average Packet Transmit Bytes Transmit Frames Transmit Average Packet Total Errors Receive Total Errors Transmit If the line is not up Operational State does not equal Up then three dashes appear If the line is up Operational State equals Up then the value appears in the form hhhmmmsss where hh is hours mm is minutes and ss is seconds For example the value might appear as 5n31m05s If the value is greater than 24 hours it appears in the form dddhhhmmm where ad is days hh is hours and mm is minutes For example the value might appear as 2d10h15m Media access control address the physical address of the line The line driver fills in this address from the 48 bit address stored in the link module number PROM for this connector Maximum transfer unit size the buffer size for the FT1 or FE1 port also the largest frame that can be transmitted or received across the FT1 or FE1 port The value ranges from 3 to 4608 bytes WAN protocol enabled on this interface The 1 byte local HDLC address of this interface The 1 byte remote HD
82. option appears only in dynamic Port Actions window opens For a mode QMCT1 link module the Edit QMCT1 Logical Line Actions window opens 4 Click on Logical Lines The MCT1 Logical Line Actions window opens 5 Edit the logical line action parameters located in the upper portion of the window 6 After setting a parameter click on Apply 7 Click on Done when you are finished setting logical line action parameters The following sections describe each logical line action parameter e Configuring BERT Patterns e Configuring Fractional Loopback Requests Note All changes you apply to the port in the Logical Line Actions window are in effect only while the window is active When you exit the Logical Line Actions window all logical line settings revert to their original values Configuring BERT Patterns To enable BERT diagnostics on a DMCT1 or QMCTI logical line you must e Enable BERT mode e Set the bit test pattern When a line is in BERT mode it generates patterns such as all ones all zeros or a QRSS pattern 7 64 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring MCE1 and MCT1 Services To enable BERT diagnostics on a DMCT1 or QMCTI logical line complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 Set BERT Mode to Enable Site Manager enables BERT mode Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 41 2 Set the BERT Test Pattern or keep th
83. or T1 network The interfaces provide integrated support for loopback testing and bit error rate test BERT line testing 7 2 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring MCE1 and MCT1 Services Configuring MCE1 and MCT1 Ports Note This guide assumes that you are working with a router configuration file that already contains the appropriate WAN circuits for the hardware configuration See Configuring and Managing Routers with Site Manager for information about adding circuits to a configuration file Complete the steps in this section to enable MCE1 or MCTI services 1 Select the port application 2 Set the clock parameters 3 Accept or customize the default MCE1 or MCT1 port configuration See Configuring Non PRI Logical Lines on page 7 34 or Configuring ISDN PRI B Channels on page 7 54 to complete the configuration Selecting the Port Application You configure an MCE1 or MCTI interface port based on whether you will use the lines for ISDN Primary Rate Interface PRI switched circuits or permanent circuit non PRI applications See Configuring ISDN PRI B Channels later in this chapter for information about ISDN PRI services Using the BCC To configure an MCEI or MCTI interface for use with non PRI applications navigate to the stack or box prompt and type stack mce1 slot 1 module 2 connector 1 OR stack mce1 1 2 1 To configure an MCElor MCTI interface for use with PRI switched circuits applicati
84. or altered files data or programs 308648 14 00 Rev 00 iii 4 Limitation of liability IN NO EVENT WILL NORTEL NETWORKS OR ITS LICENSORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY COST OF SUBSTITUTE PROCUREMENT SPECIAL INDIRECT INCIDENTAL OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES OR ANY DAMAGES RESULTING FROM INACCURATE OR LOST DATA OR LOSS OF USE OR PROFITS ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE PERFORMANCE OF THE SOFTWARE EVEN IF NORTEL NETWORKS HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES IN NO EVENT SHALL THE LIABILITY OF NORTEL NETWORKS RELATING TO THE SOFTWARE OR THIS AGREEMENT EXCEED THE PRICE PAID TO NORTEL NETWORKS FOR THE SOFTWARE LICENSE 5 Government Licensees This provision applies to all Software and documentation acquired directly or indirectly by or on behalf of the United States Government The Software and documentation are commercial products licensed on the open market at market prices and were developed entirely at private expense and without the use of any U S Government funds The license to the U S Government is granted only with restricted rights and use duplication or disclosure by the U S Government is subject to the restrictions set forth in subparagraph c 1 of the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause of FAR 52 227 19 and the limitations set out in this license for civilian agencies and subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause of DFARS 252 227 7013 for agencies of the D
85. or for a specific circuit or slot This command allows for the following command filters flags and filter arguments circuit lt circuit_name gt Displays information about the specified circuit only slot lt s ot gt Displays information about the specified slot only lt circuit_name gt Displays information about the specified circuit only The output contains the following information Slot Conn Name of the physical interfaces Circuit Name of the circuits associated with these lines Admin State Configured state of the DSU CSU modules HW Address Physical addresses of the lines Each line driver fills in this address from the 48 bit address stored in the link module number PROM for this connector WAN Protocol WAN protocols enabled on these interfaces Operational State Current operating state for each line driver Errors Number of errors for each circuit MTU Maximum transfer unit size the buffer size for each DSU CSU port also the largest frame that can be transmitted or received across the DSU CSU port The value ranges from 3 to 4608 bytes 308648 14 00 Rev 00 BCC show Commands Commands for FT1 and FE1 Services The show ft1e1 lt container gt commands display status and statistical information about the FT1 or FE1 drivers Table B 2 lists all of the fte show commands The filter flags and filter arguments are options that you can use with each keyword also called
86. page A 65 for information Setting the Service Type The logical line HDLC service is LLC1 by default LLC1 adds the HDLC address and control fields as a prefix to the frame You can change the service to basic HDLC transparent based on the requirements of the E1 equipment Using the BCC To set the service type navigate to the logical line prompt for example box fe1 1 1 logical line boston and type service variable For example logical line boston service llc1 9 18 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring FE1 Services Using Site Manager See the Service parameter on page A 65 for information Setting Minimum Frame Spacing The Minimum Frame Spacing parameter specifies the minimum number of flags transmitted between adjacent frames on this interface The interface transmits one frame by default Set frame spacing to a value from 1 to 32 flags for the interface Using the BCC To set the minimum frame spacing navigate to the logical line prompt for example box fe1 1 1 logical line boston and type minimum frame space integer For example logical line bostont minimum frame space 1 Using Site Manager See the Minimum Frame Spacing parameter on page A 66 for information Setting the Local HDLC Address You can specify the 1 byte HDLC address of this logical line as follows e dce e dte e An explicit address value 2 4 5 6 or 7 You must use unique HDLC addresses for the local and remote int
87. received on this line in which the device s FIFO buffer overflowed before obtaining the next DMA cycle No buffer resources are available The output contains the following information Slot Conn Underflow Frames System Errors Name of the physical interface Number of retransmission underflow errors These occur when the device s FIFO buffer empties before the device obtains the next DMA request The output contains the following information Slot Connector Receive Rejects Transmit Rejects T1 Timeouts Memory Errors Name of the physical interface Number of reject frames received Number of reject frames transmitted Number of T1 timeouts detected The T1 timer is the link retransmission timer Link control frames are retransmitted when the T1 expires This timer tracks the number of timeouts Number of memory errors detected A memory error occurs when the DMA cycle expires without obtaining the bus within 26 ms Memory errors may indicate faulty hardware If this count exceeds five contact your Nortel Networks Technical Solutions Center 308648 14 00 Rev 00 B 7 Configuring WAN Line Services show dsucsu sample The show dsucsu sample command displays data sampled from DSU CSU lines over a period of 10 seconds You can change the number of seconds over which you want to sample the data and you can display sampled data for a specific circuit or slot This command allows for the following command f
88. received that were aborted due to the memory bandwidth of the FIFO buffer overrunning during DMA Aborts Number of frames received with abort errors Frames Too Long Number of frames received on this line that exceed the MTU Transmit Errors The output contains the following information Slot Conn Name of the physical interface Aborts Number of transmit frames with abort errors on this circuit Underruns Number of transmit frames aborted with underrun errors on this circuit 308648 14 00 Rev 00 B 31 Configuring WAN Line Services System Errors The output contains the following information Slot Conn Rx Ring Errors Tx Ring Errors Internal Op Errors Host Errors Port Errors show hssi sample Name of the physical interface Number of errors that the DMA controller has detected while processing the receive ring Number of errors that the DMA controller has detected while processing the transmit ring Number of internal operation errors Number of parity errors occurring while the host driver accesses a register on the DMA controller Host errors may indicate faulty hardware If this count exceeds five contact your Nortel Networks Technical Solutions Center Number of DMA controller port operation errors Port errors may indicated faulty hardware If this count exceeds five contact your Nortel Networks Technical Solutions Center The show hssi sample command displays data sampled from HSSI lines over
89. receiving up to 45 consecutive zeros Table 9 4 lists the line coding options Table 9 4 FE1 Line Coding Options BCC Option Site Manager Option Description hdb3 HDB3 The default the FE1 interface uses HDB3 line coding High density bipolar coding HDB3 is a mechanism used to maintain sufficient ones density in the E1 data stream ami AMI AMI line coding is also bipolar a binary 0 is transmitted as zero volts and a binary 1 is transmitted as either a positive or negative pulse opposite in polarity to the previous pulse When configured for AMI line coding the FT1 link module remains synchronized upon receiving up to 45 consecutive zeros Note If the El receive path detects a HDB3 code word when the line is configured for AMI coding the router generates a log message and an SNMP trap 308648 14 00 Rev 00 9 7 Configuring WAN Line Services Using the BCC To set the line coding navigate to the fel prompt for example box fe1 1 1 and type line coding variable For example fel 1 1 line coding ami Using Site Manager See the Line Coding parameter on page A 59 for information Setting the Alarm Threshold Time By default the FE1 interface waits 2 seconds before logging a performance defect or anomaly as an event message You can change the alarm threshold time to any value from 2 to 10 seconds Using the BCC To set the alarm threshold time navigate to the fel prompt
90. scheme Choose either 16 bit standard ITU T or 32 bit extended to detect errors in the packet The remote end of the HSSI connection must be configured for the same CRC size Set the CRC size for this HSSI interface Using the BCC To set the CRC size navigate to the hssi prompt for example box hssi 2 1 and type crc size variable For example hssi 2 1 crc size crc32bit hssi 2 1 crc size crc16bit Using Site Manager See the CRC Size parameter on page A 16 for information 308648 14 00 Rev 00 5 7 Configuring WAN Line Services Setting the Carrier Loss Debounce Timeout The Carrier Loss Debounce Time out parameter determines how many seconds the line driver waits after losing the carrier signal before transitioning to the Carrier Lost state If the carrier signal returns before reaching this threshold the driver never enters the Carrier Lost state For most lines you want the driver to immediately transition to the Carrier Lost state upon detecting carrier loss For a problem line however you can specify a number of seconds for the router to detect carrier loss before entering the Carrier Lost state By default the value is zero 0 seconds Set this parameter to a value from 0 to 2147483647 for this HSSI interface Using the BCC To set the carrier loss debounce timeout navigate to the hssi prompt for example box hssi 2 1 and type carrier delay integer For example hssi 2 1 carrier delay 100
91. several reasons For example the link module may not be physically present in the chassis The software may be booting and has not yet initialized the driver software the slot may be running diagnostics or there may be a problem with the configuration MAC Address Media access control address The physical address of the line The line driver fills in this address from the 48 bit address stored in the link module number PROM for this connector continued 308648 14 00 Rev 00 B 55 Configuring WAN Line Services MTU WAN Protocol Local Address Remote Address BOFL BOFL TMO Receive Bytes Receive Frames Receive Average Packet Transmit Bytes Transmit Frames Transmit Average Packet Total Errors Receive Total Errors Transmit Number of Buffers Receive Number of Buffers Transmit Protocols Configured Maximum transfer unit size the buffer size for the DSU CSU port also the largest frame that can be transmitted or received across the DSU CSU port The value ranges from 3 to 4608 bytes WAN protocol enabled on this interface The 1 byte local HDLC address of this interface The 1 byte remote HDLC address of this interface Enables the transmission of proprietary BofL messages over a point to point connection between the local router and a remote peer BofL Timeout the time between transmissions of BofL messages from this interface Number of octets received without error Number of frames rec
92. specify nonreturn to zero inverted NRZI line encoding to communicate state changes between the subscriber s devices across the frame relay network You can also specify the NRZI encoding format in the frame on the logical line Using the BCC The sync line coding command specifies the encoding format in the frame on the logical line Valid options are e nrz The default this format uses nonreturn to zero coding e nrzi This format uses nonreturn to zero inverted coding e nrzimark This format uses a 0 bit to indicate a state change and a 1 bit to indicate no state change To change the NRZI encoding format navigate to the logical line prompt for example box ft1 1 1 logical line 1 1 and type sync line coding variable For example logical line 1 14 Sync line coding nrzimark Using Site Manager You can configure the NRZI Enable and NRZI type parameters If applicable see Configuring a Non PRI Logical Line on page 8 20 When enabled the NRZI Enable parameter specifies NRZI line encoding to communicate state changes between the subscriber s devices across the frame relay network You can disable communication of such state changes by setting this parameter to Disable See the NRZI Enable parameter on page A 55 for information The NRZI Type parameter specifies the NRZI encoding format in the frame on the logical line Ignore NRZI Type if you set NRZI Enable to Disable 8 32 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Co
93. tas un tie E anc kiss Eaa 5 1 Customizing HSSI Services Using the BCC or Site Manager sesser 5 2 Using the BCC RH uate TR ree abetis anai T AEN T R Using Sale WA NN rone E a aaa 5 2 Enabling er Disabling HSSI LINES cc sssiestnctitisismecstrianiiieindenius alien 5 3 Using the BCC eS 5 3 Using Site MANAGE sini Eee bbb a 5 3 Enabling er LMS AI BOIL 5 ints csantsa anaes desi diio e entstanden ak lcu nce cm DO e danda 5 3 Uong p ac eigen 5 4 Leno ste PUDERCIBT sabe ead E e ener a RR ou Rad ae 5 4 Setting the BofL Interval TRU 5 4 B ehul Ace pae 5 4 Weke eA eE aetate idR mina Paso Dd ido Ecc OM EI OR ODE OG ddr one 5 5 Setting the MTU ET tis E P T T T S x 308648 14 00 Rev 00 M Jugo do ub rr AS H 5 5 using We TNR sott pide hni bici pa Gb ian a ed dcc Ka D 5 5 Viewing the Configured WAN Protocol uestre eorr titre rrent eee tree tos e anime pde 5 5 Lemo ate Nanan cope rad npa asc ren ee rer re rere reer reerer DOC pb P Tere 5 5 Setting the Transmission Interface ssesssssss Siem 5 6 n hehul Ac Pope RO 5 6 Weke eaa ee e A E E Papeete des bob Cea xs OL 5 6 Setting the External Clock Speed weave TER lacius Robbe ids TET PETE oeni E Leno ne BOG C TEE 5 7 Using Ste Manager uasa e ia a a ai 5 7 Seting he CAL DIZE eria aa ea TEE 5 7 Hemno me B
94. the form ddd hhh mmm where dd is days hh is hours and mm is minutes For example the value might appear as 2d10h15m Number of errors for each circuit Maximum transfer unit size the buffer size for each HSSI port also the largest frame that can be transmitted or received across the HSSI port The value ranges from 3 to 4608 bytes B 36 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Commands for MCT1 MCE1 Services BCC show Commands The show mctie1 container commands display configuration status and statistical information about MCTI MCEI drivers Table B 4 lists all of the mctie1 show commands Table B 4 MCT1 MCE1 show Commands lt container gt lt keyword gt lt arguments gt lt filter_flags gt lt filter_arguments gt alerts circuit lt circuit_name gt bert stats ll circuit lt circuit_name gt bert stats port circuit lt circuit_name gt clock state clock summary elport fdl ansi fdl att framer rx errors circuit circuit name stats circuit circuit name summary circuit circuit name system errors circuit circuit name tiport timeslot tx errors circuit lt circuit_name gt 308648 14 00 Rev 00 B 37 Configuring WAN Line Services show mct1e1 alerts The show mct1e1 alerts command displays all MCT1 MCE1 circuits that are enabled but not up Use this display to identify the interfaces that are not working This command a
95. to the mcel prompt for example stack mce1 1 2 1 and type port line framing variable For example mcel 1 2 14 port line framing e1 crc Using Site Manager See the Line Type parameter on page A 25 for information Setting the MCE1 Line Coding E1 uses bipolar format for signals In bipolar format alternating positive and negative pulses on the digital line signify the number 1 and the absence of a pulse signifies 0 see Figure 6 2 in Chapter 6 A long string of zeros on an E1 line would cause the line to lose synchronization due to lack of pulses Nortel Networks provides a line coding mechanism to maintain synchronization By default the MCEI interface uses high density bipolar HDB3 line coding You can select alternate mark inversion AMI line coding instead 308648 14 00 Rev 00 7 9 Configuring WAN Line Services HDB3 line coding replaces a block of eight consecutive binary zeros with an 8 bit HDB3 code containing bipolar violations in the fourth and seventh bit positions of the substituted code In the receive direction the HDB3 code is detected and replaced with eight consecutive binary zeros AMI line coding is also bipolar a binary 0 is transmitted as zero volts and a binary is transmitted as either a positive or negative pulse opposite in polarity to the previous pulse When configured for AMI line coding the MCE1 port remains synchronized upon receiving up to 45 consecutive zeros Using the BCC To cha
96. when the primary clock is unavailable Internal Uses the clock chip on the link module Port n Ext Loop Uses the signal coming from Port n Auxiliary Ext Uses an external source via the DB9 interface Select Internal to use the clock chip on the link or net module Select Port 1 Ext Loop to use the signal coming from port 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 18 1 4 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters FE1 Logical Line Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID You access the FEI Logical Line parameters from the Adapter Module Logical Line window Enable Disable Configured FE1 Connector gt Adapter Module FE1 Logical Lines Enable Enable Disable Enables and disables this synchronous line Select Enable or Disable 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 2 Breath of Life BofL Enable Disable Configured FE1 Connector gt Adapter Module FE1 Logical Lines Enable Enable Disable Enables the transmission of proprietary Breath of Life messages over a point to point connection between the local router and a remote peer Set to Enable or Disable depending on whether you want to transmit BofL messages over this synchronous interface If you enable BofL locally the remote peer must also be configured to enable BofL Note We recommend that you enable BofL for point to point connections betw
97. which result when an out of frame event or carrier loss occurs Number of loss of signal failures which result when receive carrier loss occurs Number of alarm indication signal failures which occur when two consecutive frames have less than 3 zeros total in the data stream Number of remote alarm failures which occur when the yellow alarm is detected The show ft1e1 port command The output contains the following information Slot Connector State MTU Loopback State Accept Loopback Name of the physical interface Indicates whether the port is enabled or disabled Maximum transfer unit size the buffer size for the FT1 or FE1 port also the largest frame that can be transmitted or received across the FT1 or FE1 port The value ranges from 3 to 4608 bytes Indicates the current status of the line driver Whether loopback requests are accepted enabled or rejected disabled by this port continued B 20 308648 14 00 Rev 00 BCC show Commands Bert Mode Indicates whether BERT Mode is enabled or disabled on this port Line Coding Indicates the line coding method used for lines configured in association with this port FDL Type The facilities data link FDL mode ANSI 403 AT amp T 54016 None used for this port FDL Address The facilities data link FDL address mode AZ or BY for this port show ft e1 sample The show ft1e1 sample command displays data sampled from drivers over a period of
98. y 8 24 Setting the Clock Source 4 8 25 Enabling or Disabling BofL Messages 4 4 8 25 Setting the BofL Timeout V J 8 26 Enabling or Disabling Logical Line Loopback V V 8 26 Viewing the Configured WAN Protocol y v 8 27 Setting the HDLC Service Type 4 V 8 27 Setting the Local HDLC Address P4 4 8 28 Setting the Remote HDLC Address 4 4 8 28 Setting the CRC Size 4 V 8 29 Setting the MTU Size 4 4 8 30 Enabling or Disabling Remote Loopback Detection 4 8 30 Configuring BERT Diagnostic Pattern Tests V V 8 231 Configuring NRZI Line Encoding V V 8 32 Assigning Timeslots V V 8 33 Editing Line Resources J 8 35 308648 14 00 Rev 00 8 23 Configuring WAN Line Services After you finish adding the logical lines for a non PRI interface using Site Manager the FT1 Logical Line window displays each logical line This window also displays the parameter values for the highlighted logical line Use the scroll bar to view additional logical line parameters To edit parameters for a logical line complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the FT1 Logical Line window select the Site Manager displays the circuit s line and circuit name from the logical lines parameters list 2 Edit the parameters Site Manager sets the values that you specify for each parameter 3 Click on Apply Enabling or Disabling the Logical Line The logical line is enabled by default Y
99. you press the RES YNC button on the local KG84A device the router responds as if it detected a remotely initiated resynchronization Use different settings at each end of the point to point link to avoid a possible race condition Configure the KG84A remote resynchronization wait on this interface 308648 14 00 Rev 00 2 23 Configuring WAN Line Services Using Site Manager See the KG84A Remote Resync Wait parameter on page A 81 for information KG84A Sync Pulse By default the router transmits a 10 ms pulse to the KG84A device when it needs to initiate KG84A resynchronization The router uses the RTS signal of the V 35 interface which connects to the KG84A device s synchronous signal via a special cable to initiate KG84A resynchronization When the router needs to initiate KG84A resynchronization it changes the value of the synchronous signal from low to high The KG84A pulse length is the number of milliseconds that the synchronous signal retains its high value Set the pulse length from 2 to 4096 ms on this interface Using Site Manager See the KG84A Sync Pulse parameter on page A 82 for information Specifying the Network Link Level By default the network link level for a synchronous point to point connection is NET2 Change this parameter to GOSIP when the synchronous point to point connection is part of a Government Open Systems Interconnection Protocol GOSIP compliant network such as the Department of Def
100. 0 2 25 Configuring WAN Line Services Enabling or Disabling Receiver Ready Signals By default the synchronous interface does not send a receiver ready RR signal when the Link Idle Timer expires Enable the Idle RR Frames parameter if you want the router to send RR signals Enable or disable idle RR signals for the interface Using Site Manager See the Idle RR Frames parameter on page A 80 for information Setting the Cable Type If the synchronous interface is connected to a dial up device for switched services you can specify the cable interface type of the device that connects the dial unit You can select one of the following cable types Null e RS232 e RS422 e V35 e X21 By default the cable type is set to Null If you start SDLC on your interface the system sets the cable type to RS232 Using the BCC To set the cable type navigate to the serial prompt for example box serial 2 1 and enter cable type lt type gt type is one of the following null rs232 rs422 v35 x21 2 26 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring Synchronous Services For example the following command sets the cable type to V35 serial 2 1 cable type v35 Using Site Manager See the Cable Type parameter on page A 83 for information Setting the Retry Timer By default the router waits 3 seconds for a response from the interface When the timer expires the router 1 Sends link control frames 2 Resends the frames
101. 00 or 38400 b s e 56 64 125 230 420 625 or 833 Kb s e 1 25 2 5 or 5 Mb s Certain routing protocols use this parameter value for route selection If you configure protocol prioritization the router uses this parameter to calculate line delay See Configuring Traffic Filters and Protocol Prioritization for information about protocol prioritization latency and queue depth Set the internal clock speed for the interface Using the BCC To set internal clock speed navigate to the serial prompt for example box serial 2 1 and type internal clock speed variable For example serial 2 1 internal clock speed clk32000b serial 2 1 internal clock speed clk625k serial 2 1 internal clock speed clkimb Using Site Manager See the Internal Clock Speed parameter on page A 72 for information 308648 14 00 Rev 00 2 9 Configuring WAN Line Services Setting the External Clock Speed The External Clock Speed parameter sets the clock speed of an externally supplied clock when the Clock Source parameter is set to External You cannot set this parameter when the Clock Source parameter is set to Internal By default the external clock speed is 64102 b s Set the clock speed for the external clock to the data transmission rate that most closely corresponds to the speed of the external clock You can set the external clock to a value from 1200 to 6000000 b s Certain routing protocols use this parameter value for route selecti
102. 06 308648 14 00 Rev 00 7 5 Configuring WAN Line Services Using the BCC To set the clock parameters navigate to the mct1 1 1 prompt for example box mct1 1 1 and type primary clock variable secondary clock variable For example mct1 1 14 primary clock internal mct1 1 14 secondary clock internal Using Site Manager To set the clock parameters complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Edit Clock Parameters window select a primary clock source option 2 Select the secondary backup clock source option 3 Click on OK The MCE1 Port Parameters window or MCT1 Port Parameters window opens You access the Edit Clock Parameters window based on which link or net module you are configuring and whether you have already configured the port Newly installed Single or Dual Port MCE1 or MCTI link module The Edit DS1E1 Clock Parameters window opens automatically the first time you configure an interface e Configured Single or Dual Port MCEI or MCTI link or net module Click on the CLOCK connector for the MCE1 or MCT1 module on the Configuration Manager window e Newly installed DMCT1 net module QMCT1 link module or QMCT1 w DSOA link module 7 6 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring MCE1 and MCT1 Services The Edit QMCT1 Clock Parameters window opens automatically the first time you configure a port
103. 1 403 specification Carrier to Customer Installation DSI Metallic Interface AT amp T 54016 conforms to the 1989 AT amp T specification Requirements for Interfacing Digital Terminal Equipment to Services Employing the Extended Superframe Format Specify the FDL mode 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 4 1 14 Remote FDL HDLC Address Mode FT1 Connector gt Edit Logical Lines gt Port Details gt FT1 Port Parameters BY AZ BY Selects the FDL address mode to determine whether the local FDL responds to HDLC address BY or AZ in messages from the remote FDL Specify the FDL address mode 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 3 1 9 308648 14 00 Rev 00 A 47 Configuring WAN Line Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Accept Loopback Request FT1 Connector gt Edit Logical Lines gt Port Details gt FT1 Port Parameters Enable Enable Disable Enables or disables loop up and loop down code detection When this parameter is enabled this port accepts and complies with requests to go into loopback mode from a remote device Enable or disable local loopback 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 3 1 10 Loopback Configuration FT1 Connector gt Edit Logical Lines gt Port Details gt FT1 Port Parameters No Loopback No Loopback Payload Loopback Line Loopback Forces the DS1 interface to go into loopback The remote or
104. 1 interface encountered in the previous 24 hour interval Number of Path Code Violations PCV that a DS1 interface encountered in the previous 24 hour interval Number of Line Errored Seconds LES that a DS1 interface encountered in the previous 24 hour interval Number of Burst Errored Seconds BES that a DS1 interface encountered in the previous 24 hour interval Number of Degraded Minutes DM that a DS1 interface encountered in the previous 24 hour interval Number of Line Code Violations LCV that a DS1 interface encountered in the previous 24 hour interval 308648 14 00 Rev 00 show mctte1 framer BCC show Commands The show mctie1 framer command displays error information about the T1 and El framers The output contains the following information Slot Module Conn Num Vid Intv Bipolar Violation Counts CRC 4 Error Counts Far End Block Errors Loss of Frame Failures Loss of Signal Failures Alarm Indicat Failures Remote Alarm Failures Name of the physical interface Number of previous time intervals for which valid data was collected The value is 96 unless the interface was brought on line within the last 24 hours In this case the value is the number of complete 15 minute intervals since the interface has been on line Number of bipolar line code violations The FDL counts bipolar violations whether its synchronizer is in sync or not If the FDL is set to receive B8ZS code words it does
105. 14 00 Rev 00 A 59 Configuring WAN Line Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Setup Alarm Threshold seconds FE1 Connector gt Adapter Module FE1 Logical Lines gt Port Details gt Edit Adapter Module FE1 Port Parameters 2 seconds 2 to 10 seconds Specifies the time in seconds that the device driver tolerates a performance defect or anomaly If the performance defect or anomaly is still present when this time interval expires the device driver records a performance failure and logs an event message Set the timer value 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 3 1 7 Clear Alarm Threshold seconds FE1 Connector gt Adapter Module FE1 Logical Lines gt Port Details gt Edit Adapter Module FE1 Port Parameters 2 seconds 2 to 10 seconds Specifies the clear time in seconds for performance failure conditions If the defect or anomaly clears in this time interval the device driver records a performance cleared condition and logs an event message Set the timer value 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 3 1 8 Accept Loopback Request FE1 Connector gt Adapter Module FE1 Logical Lines gt Port Details gt Edit Adapter Module FE1 Port Parameters Enable Enable Disable Enables or disables loop up and loop down code detection
106. 14 rate adaption adaption 9dot6k 4 To enable for NRZI line coding or disable for NRZ line coding the NRZI Encoding parameter type logical line mct1 11 1 nrzi encoding enabled 5 If you enabled NRZI encoding set the NRZI Type parameter to mark or space frame format as specified by the subscriber Type logical line mct1 11 14 nrzi type mark Table 7 12 provides a matrix of supported line encoding configurations Table 7 12 Line Encoding for SDLC Connections IBM Host IBM CPE NRZI Type NRZI Mark NRZ NRZI Mark NRZ NRZ NRZ NRZI Space NRZ NRZI Space NRZ NRZI Mark NRZ NRZI Mark NRZI Space NRZ 7 32 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Using Site Manager Configuring MCE1 and MCT1 Services You can configure a T1 connection to an unconfigured port on a QMCT1 DS0A link module to carry SDLC traffic Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Port Application window opens click on the QMCT1 link module connector 2 Click on OK to accept the default value The Edit Slot MCT1 window opens Non PRI 3 Click on OK The Slot MCT1 Port Parameters window opens 4 Click on OK to accept the default port The Slot MCT1 Logical Lines window parameters or edit them as described in opens Configuring MCE1 and MCT1 Ports earlier in this chapter 5 Click on Add The Add Circuit window opens 6 Cl
107. 19 Setting the Signaling Method m T 2 19 LIS TG BOG M 2 20 Uema we KIGGET a2 euismo uh aaar aa nondnm picti dag 2 20 Enabling or Disabling DSR Polling TRUE TOIT T TE ornan TS 2 20 Ueno ote PARI ioo ate IP eaa er e bb e a na up GC tud 2 20 Seting TA LA Coding e D S 2 21 B hRu is Pet 2 21 Weim Site MIAN amissis rao odit nbn abb PU cba aac a bbc larga 2 21 Configuring KG84A Security M Tm Moped Goratu A obi hobetu 2 21 KOMA YN ariani a aa cee cae cee ta ed ede actaee 2 23 nies EE D LOSS ACE a a 2 23 KGB4A Remote Bssyho Wall serisinin ie R 2 23 KOSIA Sie UL aana a E 2 24 Specifying the Network Link Level css csnscsesnscssaereeeaoiannnns canes aaiue 2 24 Beppe a E R 2 24 Seting ihe Belly COON niens tbe an A AEN EAA 2 25 ae id Manage REO o i 2 25 Seting N Link uM irssi sceneaseeachednmnedciesamnpcicnesmededacaaneegactecance 2 25 WT e kE eae E 2 E er ee ere ee A E E E rey 2 25 Enabling or Disabling Extended Control seai dokira eee e abron sgeecda unde ee Ueno odes DEDERE a Cei tb d Ra ada eng aab Un bet d trey eed d d 2 25 Enabling or Disabling Receiver Ready Signals sssssssssssssss 2 26 Ew 2 26 Seting Ne Cable TYPE TS 2 26 Using the BCC rere abu ae etd Seance ears TOT mute Saas 2 26 Beware t 2 27 Seling tie Retty TRO aaueicsesatxcinesistkac entes kien kasd equ Ue Dese d a eS e TUR
108. 2 ATM ARE Configuring ATM Services Ethernet FDDI Token Ring Configuring Ethernet FDDI and Token Ring Services 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Chapter 2 Configuring Synchronous Services You configure and customize line services for synchronous WAN circuits and the Link Access Procedure Balanced LAPB protocol by setting synchronous and LAPB parameters as described in the following sections Section Page Overview of Synchronous Services 2 2 Customizing Synchronous Services Using the BCC or Site Manager 2 2 Editing LAPB Protocol Services 2 34 Displaying EIA Signals 2 42 Resetting EIA Signal Status 2 43 Note Throughout this chapter we use synchronous and serial interchangeably to refer to an interface or service However in the BCC we use serial exclusively 308648 14 00 Rev 00 2 1 Configuring WAN Line Services Overview of Synchronous Services Each synchronous interface e Connects a Nortel Networks router or switch to data communications equipment DCE devices such as DSUs CSUs and modems e Supports a range of physical connections including V 35 X 21 RS 232 and RS 449 422 balanced e Supports both leased and dial up circuits See Configuring Dial Services for information about configuring dial up circuits e Supports many WAN software services including PPP X 25 frame relay SMDS HDLC encapsulation and ATM DXI e Operates from 1200 b s t
109. 2 14 burst count disabled Using Site Manager See the Burst Count parameter on page A 74 for information Specifying the Link Level Protocol The Service parameter specifies the link level protocol for this interface You can set the link level protocol to one of the following e Transparent LLCI LAPB The synchronous interface is configured for LLC1 by default 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring Synchronous Services Setting this parameter to Transparent enables raw HDLC mode LLC1 specifies connectionless datagram service it inserts the HDLC address and control fields at the beginning of the frame If X 25 is enabled on this line this parameter must be set to LAPB See Setting the IFTF Pattern on page 2 30 Set the link level protocol for the interface Using the BCC To specify the link level protocol navigate to the serial prompt for example box serial 2 1 and type service variable For example serial 2 1 service llc1 serial 2 1 service transparent serial 2 1 service llc2 serial 2 1 service lapb Using Site Manager See the Service parameter on page A 74 for information Setting the Transmit Window Size The Transmit Window Size parameter controls the number of I frames that can be transmitted without acknowledgment The default is 1 frame Set the transmit window size to a value from 1 to 7 I frames Using Site Manager See the Transmit Window Size parameter on page A 76 for info
110. 4 00 Rev 00 Configuring HSSI Services Using Site Manager See the BofL Frequency parameter on page A 14 for information Setting the MTU The default buffer size or maximum transmission unit MTU determines the largest frame that can travel across the HSSI interface The default value is 4608 bytes Specify an MTU from 3 to 4608 bytes on this interface Using the BCC To set the MTU size navigate to the hssi prompt for example box hssi 2 1 and type mtu integer For example hssi 2 1 mtu 2000 Using Site Manager See the MTU parameter on page A 14 for information Viewing the Configured WAN Protocol The WAN Protocol parameter indicates which WAN protocol is enabled on a HSSI circuit However do not change the current value Caution Changing the WAN protocol does not reconfigure the interface and could disable it Using Site Manager See the WAN Protocol parameter on page A 14 for information 308648 14 00 Rev 00 5 5 Configuring WAN Line Services Setting the Transmission Interface You can select the appropriate MIB for the local management interface LMI to use provided you enable LMI and configure SMDS or frame relay on the HSSI interface Select one of the following MIBs depending on the carrier services that the attached DCE provides e DSI at 1 54 MB s specified by RFC 1233 e DS3 at 44 736 MB s specified by RFC 1232 The HSSI driver enables the DS1 MIB by default but provi
111. 4 loopback 4 10 4 11 Ww WfMCTIEILoad C 1 wfMunichLoad C 1 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Index 7
112. 48 14 00 Rev 00 4 11 Configuring WAN Line Services lt AN ANH ARN Network LS0024A Figure 4 2 Remote Digital Loopback CCITT V 54 Loopback Local Analog Loopback AL Local Analog Loopback is a self diagnostic local test Figure 4 3 AN ANH ARN Network LS0023A Figure 4 3 Local Analog Loopback During the local loop test the CSU transmits data to the network to avoid causing a carrier alarm 4 12 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring BayStack DSU CSU Services Pattern 2047 BERT Test In the Pattern 2047 BERT test the DSU sends a 2047 bit error rate test BERT pattern to the carrier network without initiating loopback Figure 4 4 CSU AN ANH ARN gt Network LS0026A Figure 4 4 Pattern 2047 BERT Test This test allows you to connect a BERT tester at the remote end of a DDS line to verify that data is passing over the line Telco Activated Loopback In addition to the tests you can initiate in the BCC or Site Manager the DSU CSU supports two standard DDS loopback conditions to test local loops and DDS termination equipment The Telco facility initiates these tests upon customer request e CSU Loopback Isolates trouble in the network e DSU Loopback Like Digital Loopback tests the local DSU CSU and the Telco circuit 308648 14 00 Rev 00 4 13 Chapter 5 Configuring HSSI Services You customize line services for high speed serial interface
113. 48 14 00 Rev 00 7 61 Configuring WAN Line Services Table 7 22 Send Commands for MCT1 Port Loopback Site Manager Send Command Function Loop Up Sends a loop up code to the remote end to initiate line loopback After a minimum of 4 5 seconds the port loops receive data back onto the T1 transmit path at the T1 interface The line type setting determines the coding scheme Loop Down Sends a loop down code to the remote end to stop the line loopback condition FDL Payload Loop Sends a loop up code to the remote end to initiate payload loopback FDL Disable Payload Sends a loop down code to the remote end to stop the payload loopback FDL Line Loop Cl FDL Line Loop IA Sends a Customer Installation Cl loopback message Sends a Cl loopback message indicating that it originates from the CSU FDL Line Loop IB FDL Disable Line Loop Sends a Cl loopback message indicating that it originates from the DSU Disables generation of FDL line loopback codes FDL Disable All Sends a universal loopback deactivate code to stop all loopback activity In payload loopback the signal loops through the T1 framing device before the received signal is looped back for retransmission In line loopback the signal does not go through the framing device Caution Wait for the window to update before selecting another command 7 62 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring MCE1 and
114. 4A cryptographic devices e KG84A Cycle e KG84A Sync Loss Interval e KG84A Remote Resync Wait e KG84A Sync Pulse Note Be sure to also set the RTS Enable parameter to Enable 2 22 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring Synchronous Services KG84A Cycle By default the timer cycle is set to 100 milliseconds ms This cycle value is used by the timers on the other KG84A devices on the network This value also becomes the polling cycle for monitoring FCS errors Set the KG84A timer cycle to 5 10 25 50 100 200 or 500 ms on this interface Using Site Manager See the KG84A Cycle parameter on page A 80 for information KG84A Sync Loss Interval By default the router waits 50 cycles after detecting an FCS error to receive a valid frame before declaring a loss of synchronization Set the KG84A loss interval to 5 10 25 50 100 200 or 500 cycles on this interface Using Site Manager See the KG84A Sync Loss Interval parameter on page A 81 for information KG84A Remote Resync Wait By default the router waits 200 cycles when synchronization is lost and a remotely initiated resynchronization has been detected You can set the number of cycles that the router waits for the remote KG84A device to complete a resynchronization operation to 2 5 10 25 50 100 200 or 500 After this number of cycles the router determines that the resynchronization failed and initiates another resynchronization Note that if
115. 5 Local HDLC Address 8 28 Loopback Configuration A 48 MTU 8 16 MTU Size 8 30 Port Application Mode A 43 A 56 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Primary Clock A 44 A 57 A 62 Remote FDL HDLC Address Mode A 47 Remote HDLC Address 8 28 Secondary Clock A 44 A 57 A 62 Service 8 27 Setup Alarm Threshold seconds 8 10 A 46 Signal Level dB 8 40 A 46 power level T1 transmit A 46 testing the line 8 35 8 41 timeslots 8 33 H HDB3 line coding 7 9 7 59 A 26 A 30 A 45 A 59 HDBSS line coding 6 10 HDLC FDL address mode 7 23 8 12 A 32 A 47 local address 7 42 8 28 9 19 remote address 7 43 8 28 9 20 service type 7 42 8 27 9 18 HSSI configuring for multiline 10 2 parameters BofL 5 3 A 13 BofL Frequency 5 4 A 14 Carrier Loss Debounce A 16 CRC Size 5 7 A 16 Enable 5 3 A 13 External Clock Speed 5 6 A 15 Loopback Configuration A 17 MTU 5 5 A 14 traffic priorities 5 10 Transmission Interface 5 6 A 15 WAN Protocol 5 5 A 14 Inter Frame Time Fill parameter C 2 interface defined Glossary 1 interframe time fill pattern IFTF 2 30 7 45 A 85 internal clocking MCTI C 2 ISDN PRI B channels 7 55 description 7 54 selecting 7 4 Index 3 K KG84A configuring 2 21 cryptographic device 2 11 A 73 L LAPB description 2 34 parameters Command Response Address 2 41 A 22 Control Field 2 37 A 19 Enable 2 36 A 18 Enable Rx Tx of XID Frames 2 40 A 22 Idle RR Frames 2
116. 648 14 00 Rev 00 7 29 Configuring WAN Line Services Configuring a DSOA Connection This section describes how to configure a T1 connection to a QMCTI w DSOA link module to carry SDLC traffic Gathering Required Information You need the following information from the subscriber The data rate of the SDLC connection between the IBM host and the customer premise equipment CPE see Figure 7 1 Use this rate to set the Rate Adaption logical line parameter for both the router connecting the host side and the router connecting the remote access side Valid options are 9 6 Kb s or 19 2 Kb s To establish a connection the subscriber must match this rate to that of the SDLC connection between the controller and CPE on the remote access side The line encoding settings of both the host and CPE and the controller and CPE on the remote access side Use these settings to set the NRZI Enabled logical line parameter Valid options are Enable to configure NRZI nonreturn to zero inverted or Disable to configure NRZ nonreturn to zero The setting of the NRZI Enable parameter on a router connecting the host side is unrelated to and can differ from that of a router connecting the remote access side The NRZI type setting for The host side if the line encoding settings of the host and CPE do not match The remote access side if the line encoding settings of the controller and CPE do not match You need these settings to set the
117. 7 7013 Notwithstanding any other license agreement that may pertain to or accompany the delivery of this computer software the rights of the United States Government regarding its use reproduction and disclosure are as set forth in the Commercial Computer Software Restricted Rights clause at FAR 52 227 19 Statement of Conditions In the interest of improving internal design operational function and or reliability Nortel Networks NA Inc reserves the right to make changes to the products described in this document without notice Nortel Networks NA Inc does not assume any liability that may occur due to the use or application of the product s or circuit layout s described herein Portions of the code in this software product may be Copyright 1988 Regents of the University of California All rights reserved Redistribution and use in source and binary forms of such portions are permitted provided that the above copyright notice and this paragraph are duplicated in all such forms and that any documentation advertising materials and other materials related to such distribution and use acknowledge that such portions of the software were developed by the University of California Berkeley The name of the University may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from such portions of the software without specific prior written permission SUCH PORTIONS OF THE SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED AS IS AND WITHOUT ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED
118. 9 10 Leno De BO cr need an aa pea 9 10 WE Ch Se TAMRAC E a TEE cetpa enin AE IENE AA Rc dd 9 10 Seting the Primary Clock SOURS uo e ee Er rete pret cote ter he Ree ido ere ERR 9 11 Lang MGA Eee diyim annan a abate 9 11 Using Site Manager actuals TT EE E NIE 9 11 Setting the Secondary Clock Hound 9 11 DN IgE zoe Pater ETT 9 12 Using Site Manager UN T eee T ibo i endis abosi eas 9 12 Gonmiiguring a Non PRI Logical BIB eR RO loca sd i eire a bkn ce A 9 12 Defining the Logical Line Using the BCCO uiuis ice ii sei tnu renatus cai 9 13 Adding a Logical Line to an FET POTT 12a rettet 9 13 Defining the Logical Line Using Site Manager sss 9 13 Customizing Logical Line Parameters sssse ied Sats ee Disabling and Reenabling the Logical Line esses 9 16 Disabling and Reenabling BofL Messages sse 9 16 Setting the BofL Timeout T ere E ponies 9 17 SEMO he MTU SIZE E E IA Enabling or Disabling Interface Filtering sese 9 18 Seting The Service TV eei cionucc i pn pensio NI eset RePEc dtp is EU Pucci dots naar 9 18 Setting Minimum Fame CUNY aucia stis euet aded di rase c RUEDA 9 19 Setting the Local HDLC Address iesus tpe E HEUS eben Eid 9 19 Setting the Remote HDLC Adress i euieieeeiee tnit ertet rhe tenni e cesa 9 20 Viewing th
119. AN Protocol The WAN Protocol parameter indicates which WAN protocol is configured on this logical line Do not change the current value Caution Changing the WAN protocol does not reconfigure the interface and could disable it To change the configured WAN protocol for an interface you must delete and then reconfigure the circuit See the WAN Protocol parameter on page A 67 for information Setting the CRC Size By default the router uses the 16 bit CRC type The router appends a 16 bit CRC to the transmitted frames and performs a 16 bit CRC on received frames You can change the CRC type to 32 bit CRC where the router appends a 32 bit CRC to transmitted frames and performs a 32 bit CRC on received frames Using the BCC To specify CRC size navigate to the logical line prompt for example box fe1 1 1 logical line boston and type crc size variable For example logical line boston CrC size crc16bit logical line boston CIC Size crc32bit Using Site Manager See the CRC Size parameter on page A 68 for information Setting Synchronous Line Coding You can specify the line coding of the physical synchronous line to match the line coding of a device at the other end of the line Specify the line coding as follows e Select NRZ the default for nonreturn to zero coding 308648 14 00 Rev 00 9 21 Configuring WAN Line Services e Select NRZI for nonreturn to zero inverted coding e Select NRZI Mark f
120. Accept Performance Messages sess 8 15 Uomo mhe BOC oirir d 8 16 Leng ides IPSE aana NNN 8 16 Soung NASW amena oe ateatende aac eb EI ate Ure 8 16 B hvEg irs Pe EE E 8 16 Seting he Primary Clock OUR sisina dimora Ec qu cns onda 8 17 Using the BCC sirens ee E TED re eis icine an PT m i ird Leng een Ica pS 2 a coa rere aea Fed ap aeta abun E pev e Ped d n pd 8 17 Setting the Secondary Clock Source 12 uiceidbecertasuik epe ciat iras Rare d Ede ies 8 18 Vang TGR s et M 8 18 Using Site Managol snide ORONO 8 18 Setting the External Clock State Seite T eects AT TE abota 0 19 llegu ir Pat d 8 19 Seni LO E Liusicueauui stud Pase a Ko S c LUR Ex EUG ao EE 8 19 Using the BCCO sasise P E E E E erica PETES 8 19 Seting Relay COMO cea Dub paren NN E AA R 8 20 Configuring a Nonm PRI Logical Lig vsisi nep ead adiri Pto 8 20 Defining Logical Lines Using The BOC uice edente eo Et teo tir ret ese eco nce emt 8 20 308648 14 00 Rev 00 xvii Adding a Logical Line te am PT Part ius or ta rr Fn be kac 8 20 Specifying a Circuit Name re T T merenens ee seins cre 8 21 Selecting a WAN PROG ascetics eue esce Recipe a 8 21 Setting the WAN Interface Type cceccccceseeeeeeeeeeeseteeeeseaaeeeeaaeesecaeeteaaeeesaes 8 21 Defining Logical Lines Using Site Manager c ccssceceeeeeseeeeeeeseeeeeeaeeeeaeeenaes 8 22 Customizing Logical Li
121. Accept Performance Messages Options esses 7 26 Primary Clock Source Opto Mee 7 27 Line Encoding tor SDLC Connections rocca rara ier dd 7 32 MCE1 and MCT1 Logical Line Configuration Tasks dete sb f Oe Local HDLC Address CHONG cec onoriano 7 42 Remote HDLC Address Options Lesser tta tu nun an 7 43 sc mlsti ip c i Dc 7 44 MCEI and MCTI Lima TUBIS setatis rra pr rH Ret Pa a end 7 56 MCE1 and MCT1 Port Test Configuration Tasks ssesssse 7 57 ESP Line Types croni endian ear ateaes 7 60 ope Ole DD ue o Hag dece dn tt srr ree nt GE o pi E abba 7 60 Send Commands for MCE1 and MCT1 Port Tests ssssse 7 61 308648 14 00 Rev 00 xxix Table 7 22 Send Commands for MCT1 Port Loopback sss 7 62 Table 7 23 Fractional Loopback Options s ET TT A 7 65 Table 7 24 Send Commands for Logical Line BERT T Tests E EA 7 67 Table 7 25 Send Commands for Logical Line Fractional Loopback Tests 7 67 Table 8 1 Clock Parameter Options TER TT tonnas 8 4 Table 8 2 ZEB UNICI OT 8 5 Table 8 3 TA MT e Decr EPOR 8 7 Table 8 4 FTI Line Coding ODIOM inesse ie tado Er tecti Eli e 8 8 Table 8 5 wp Level gn E o T 8 9 Table 8 6 ESF Line Types TEC E PEA E TE UE PRT 8 11 Table 8 7 Loopback Configuration Opiliones 8 14 Table 8 8 Send Performance
122. B9 interface Select Internal to use the clock chip on the link or net module Select Port 1 Ext Loop to use the signal coming from port 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 18 1 4 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring WAN Line Services FE1 Port Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID You access the FT1 port parameters from the Edit Adapter Module FEI Port Parameters window Enable Disable FE1 Connector gt Adapter Module FE1 Logical Lines gt Port Details gt Edit Adapter Module FE1 Port Parameters Enable Enable Disable Enables or disables the port Set to Disable only if you want to disable the port 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 3 1 2 Line Type FE1 Connector gt Adapter Module FE1 Logical Lines gt Port Details gt Edit Adapter Module FE1 Port Parameters For MCT 1 ESF For MCEI and FE1 E1 For MCTI Unframed T1 ESF SF D4 For MCEI EL El CRC E1 MF E1 CRC MF For FE1 E1 E1 CRC E1 MF E1 CRC MF Unframed E1 Specifies the frame format Select the appropriate frame format for your equipment Unframed T1 Use only during BERT mode to match the line type ESF Transmits super frames consisting of 24 individual SF D4 frames and provides enhanced signaling and synchronization e SF DA Transmits super frames consisting of 12 individual frames 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4
123. BayRS Version 14 00 Part No 308648 14 00 Rev 00 September 1999 4401 Great America Parkway Santa Clara CA 95054 Configuring WAN Line Services NORTEL NETWORKS Copyright 1999 Nortel Networks All rights reserved Printed in the USA September 1999 The information in this document is subject to change without notice The statements configurations technical data and recommendations in this document are believed to be accurate and reliable but are presented without express or implied warranty Users must take full responsibility for their applications of any products specified in this document The information in this document is proprietary to Nortel Networks NA Inc The software described in this document is furnished under a license agreement and may only be used in accordance with the terms of that license A summary of the Software License is included in this document Trademarks NORTEL NETWORKS is a trademark of Nortel Networks AN BCN BLN BN BNX FRE LN and Optivity are registered trademarks and ANH ARN ASN BayRS BayStack BayStream BCC and System 5000 are trademarks of Nortel Networks All other trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their respective owners Restricted Rights Legend Use duplication or disclosure by the United States Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 22
124. CT1 Port Parameters et ET nias RA Sines ee EN 7 16 Enabling or Disabling fne MOTI POr ssnstinin 7 17 Ling TE EOC aeua a eG RR DAT RE 7 17 Using Site Manager td 7 17 Seting he MOTI Line YPE TE 7 18 HSA ea EE s pr 7 18 Using Swe Manager seniste a AE N a an 7 18 Seting be MGT Line I eissai iirinn anaE ANEA AN 7 19 Seung ihe Sona Level aeia E 7 20 eem Alann Threshold TIME Me 7 21 LAST abe i od Saree meer AN E E E E N E EAE EE E 7 21 Using Site Manager TTE ET ere RENE T T A A 7 21 Setting the Alarm Threshold Clear Time sess 7 21 LIS NE asconustetobtid Desi ie datas Ev Rat a Lo GR BR DR baal 7 21 heel 7 21 Setting the FDL Mode for ESF Line Types seisiiriissisiarisiiiirisid aidsin 7 22 Using the BCC ere T oan A T TOT biete T 7 22 Veng SONS WISE siti e E E E N 7 22 Setting the Remote FDL HDLC Address Mode sss 7 23 Using the BCC auus PEE E EEE E ee REETA 7 23 Lemo ee Manaa E baron R ANR NE 7 23 Accepting or Rejecting Port Loopback Requests ccccceeeeseeseereceeceeeeeeeeeeees 7 23 ngu ic be UR 7 23 308648 14 00 Rev 00 xiii Heino Site III AI sanis paepov tbe abu EP bab asa xa cr 7 24 Setting a Loopback Configuration seis hema Eds iaei Stemi 7 24 B hwgg irre m 7 24 BEES CAU CI EE D a D T 7 24 Setting Relay Control Ed 7 25 Leino Te b c 7 25 Setting the Sour
125. City and one in Los Angeles Figure 10 2 A high volume of important data travels between the two sites via three synchronous lines Grouping the three synchronous lines into one multiline circuit e Reduces congestion by distributing the volume of traffic more evenly among the three lines e Decreases the chance of data loss if a connection fails 308648 14 00 Rev 00 10 3 Configuring WAN Line Services Router Router T I NYC LA H ES E Three SYNC lines form L_ one multiline circuit 2j with three data paths LS0020A Figure 10 2 Multiline Circuit Consisting of Three Synchronous Lines Software Considerations This section provides notes for using multiline services with the following software configurations Frame Relay e Multilink PPP e Bandwidth on Demand BOD Frame Relay You can configure multiline services for both group access mode and direct access mode frame relay PVCs For more information about using multiline services with frame relay see Configuring Frame Relay Services 10 4 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring Multiline Services Multilink PPP The Nortel Networks implementation of PPP includes a multilink feature Multilink is similar to multiline multilink however enables you to e Group lines of different speeds e Preserve packet sequencing Di
126. E you must configure the device at the other end with a local address of 3 DTE and remote address of 1 DCE 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 31 Pass Thru Local Address COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit SYNC Parameters None Any unique MAC address of exactly 12 hexadecimal digits Assigns a MAC address to the local interface This address becomes the source address of packets that are bridged to the destination MAC address You assign the destination MAC address using the Pass Thru Remote Address parameter Specify a unique MAC address for the local interface making sure that the second digit is a zero for example 1 0fffabc5432 Be sure to reverse the local and remote MAC addresses at the remote synchronous pass through interface 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 32 A 78 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Pass Thru Remote Address COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit SYNC Parameters None Any unique MAC address of exactly 12 hexadecimal digits Assigns a MAC address to the remote interface This address becomes the destination MAC address of packets that are bridged to the local MAC address You assign the source MAC address using the Pass Thru Local Address parameter
127. E1 or MCT1 modules Link Modules Net Modules BLN and BCN routers ASN and System 5000 routers MCE 1 II Single Port 75 ohm MCE1 Single Port MCE1 II Dual Port 75 ohm MCT1 Dual Port DMCT1 MCE1 II Single Port 120 ohm MCE 1 II Dual Port 120 ohm MCT1 Single Port MCT1 Dual Port DMCT1 MCT1 Quad Port QMCT1 MCT1 Quad Port QMCT1 with DSOA MCE and MCT1 interfaces provide high density access to a digital access and crossconnect system DACS MCEI also provides a variety of international Post Telephone and Telegraph PTT and telecommunications administration services Multichannel interfaces enable data to be segmented into multiple DSO connections called channels or timeslots You can form fractional T1 FT1 channels by grouping MCT1 DSOs This allows you to maximize remote link capacity by using DSO channels individually or in groups An MCT1 interface can transmit or receive up to 24 DSO channels per DS1 frame over leased point to point links with a line rate of 56 or 64 Kb s An MCEI interface can transmit or receive up to 30 DSO timeslots at 64 Kb s In addition to the supported speeds provided by other MCT1 modules the Quad Port Multichannel T1 with DSOA OMCTI w DSOA link module supports the DSOA subrate frame format standard which enables the interface to support SDLC traffic at line speeds of 19 2 Kb s and 9 6 Kb s All MCEI and MCT1 modules include an integrated DSU CSU for direct connection to an E1
128. For instructions see the sections that follow 1 Define the logical line 2 Customize logical line parameters 3 Assign timeslots 9 12 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring FE1 Services Defining the Logical Line Using the BCC For FE1 a single FE port supports a single logical line Adding a Logical Line to an FE1 Port To add a logical line to an FE1 port you must specify a circuit name Navigate to the fel prompt for example box fe1 1 1 and type logical line circuit name For example fel 1 1 logical line boston logical line bostonf Defining the Logical Line Using Site Manager When you define a logical line you can use the default name that appears in the Add Circuit window or you can change the name by clicking on the Circuit Name box and typing a new name Figure 9 1 illustrates how Site Manager generates the default logical line name The default name identifies the following e Circuit type e Physical connector slot and port number e Number of the logical line on the FE1 port Slot where connector Type of circuit resides Slot 1 d Logical line Circuit name FEI 1 1 LS0023A Figure 9 1 Default Circuit Name for ARN Link Modules 308648 14 00 Rev 00 9 13 Configuring WAN Line Services To add the logical line for an FE1 port complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 Start at the Edit Adapter Module FE1 Port Par
129. Function Instructions MIB Object ID You access the HSSI line parameters from the Configuration Manager window Enable HSSI Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit HSSI Parameters Enable Enable Disable Enables or disables this HSSI line Set this parameter to either Enable or Disable for this line 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 7 1 2 BofL HSSI Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit HSSI Parameters Enable Enable Disable Enables the transmission of proprietary Ethernet encapsulated BofL messages over a point to point connection between the local router and a remote peer Set to Enable or Disable depending on whether you want to transmit BofL messages over this HSSI line If you enable BofL locally you must also configure the remote peer to enable BofL Nortel Networks recommends that you enable BofL for point to point connections between Nortel Networks peers If however such a connection occurs through a wide area transport service such as frame relay or SMDS you must disable BofL 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 7 1 7 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring WAN Line Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID BofL Frequency HSSI Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit HSSI Parameters 1 second 0 to 60 seconds Specifies the int
130. Function Specifies the source of performance messages Customer Inst indicates that the customer installation supplies the messages Carrier indicates that the carrier supplies the messages You configure this parameter for QMCT1 link modules only Instructions Select the source for outgoing performance messages MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 3 1 18 Parameter Accept Perf Measurement CR Addr Path QMCTI Connector gt Edit Logical Lines gt Port Details gt MCT1 Port Parameters Default Customer Inst Options Customer Inst Carrier Function Specifies the source from which the router accepts performance messages Customer Inst indicates that the router accepts messages only from the customer installation Carrier indicates that the router accepts messages only from the carrier You configure this parameter for QMCTI link modules only Instructions Select the source for inbound performance messages MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 3 1 19 A 34 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Primary Clock QMCT1 or DMCTI Connector gt Edit Logical Lines gt Port Details gt MCT1 Port Parameters Port 1 Ext Loop Internal Port 1 Ext Loop Port 2 Ext Loop Auxiliary Ext Identifies the primary source of the timing signals Select Interna
131. GHKeWmt Uo o m OA B 59 curii T B 60 xxiv 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Se eria SAMIDE aser A ae Ee B 60 cec IIR ICT T mST B 61 cin ur seeded teeter ee ai eee eee B 63 Appendix C Troubleshooting an MCT1 Connection Glossary Index 308648 14 00 Rev 00 XXV Figures Figure 2 1 Satellite Broadcast Sample Topology sssessess 2 15 Figure 2 2 KG84A Network Configuration cc cccsceeeceeeseeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeaeeseaeeeneeeaaes 2 22 Figure 2 3 En LAPB Parameters WINGOW sacccscntssccssiscaceesncecanteaniatstersacedusceaieacnmene 2 36 Figure 3 1 Edit ASYNC Parameters Window cccccccssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeseeeeeeeaaeeteaes 3 2 Figure 4 1 Digital Loopback TE TT ewes rere mean Figure 4 2 Remote Digital Loopback CCITT V 54 Loopback s 4 12 Figure 4 3 Local Analog Loopback 0 cc cccsccessceseceeeeeeeceseneeeeeeeeneeeeeeecaeeeeeeseaees 4 12 Figure 4 4 Patsrm2D47 BERI TOSI aceite End ont trend e sicaddedeinacituasncs 4 13 Figure 5 1 DTE40 DCE Loopback Test assess menn amt rrr i et ERR Figure bd TUEBnge Em VOS cassia a iaa 6 3 Fiume BS BPa FORMAL ccc texinitonadisteise bet cuni epar da dN ease ar sa aaa d peus 6 5 Figure 6 3 Bipolar with 8 Zero Substitution B8ZS sss 6 6 Poue Get EILNE En y WG ouoiutaedidnodosssitca cniin bedeutend ate d ene 5 9 Figure 7 1 SDLC Connection Using Fra
132. HSSI link and net modules by setting parameters as described under the following topics Section Page Overview of HSSI Services 5 1 Customizing HSSI Services Using the BCC or Site Manager 5 2 Note This guide assumes that you work with a router configuration file that already has the appropriate WAN circuits for the hardware configuration See Configuring and Managing Routers with Site Manager for information about adding circuits to a configuration file Overview of HSSI Services A Nortel Networks HSSI interface supports full duplex synchronous bit rates from 66 3 Mb s to 44 736 Mb s HSSI provides a connection to high speed circuits such as T3 ES and SONET OC 1 and to high speed WAN switching services such as frame relay SMDS and ATM DXI 308648 14 00 Rev 00 5 1 Configuring WAN Line Services Customizing HSSI Services Using the BCC or Site Manager Table 5 1 lists the HSSI line configuration tasks described in this chapter and indicates whether you can use the BCC or Site Manager to perform each task Table 5 1 HSSI Line Configuration Tasks Task BCC Site Manager Page Enabling or Disabling HSSI Lines V V 5 3 Enabling or Disabling BofL V V 5 3 Setting the BofL Interval V V 5 4 Setting the MTU V J 2 5 Viewing the Configured WAN Protocol V 5 5 Setting the Transmission Interface V V 5 6 Setting the External Clock Speed V V 2 8 Setting the CRC Size 4 V 5 7 Setting t
133. I net modules all test actions are port specific For example a BERT reset action resets all port specific series of BERT counters BERT statistics show the results of your test actions You can view BERT statistics using the Statistics Manager utility For information about the Statistics Manager see Configuring and Managing Routers with Site Manager 7 56 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring MCE1 and MCT1 Services Before testing a port or logical line you must set the test parameters e Setting Port Test Parameters e Setting Logical Line Test Parameters Then start the tests Running Port Tests e Running Logical Line Tests Setting Port Test Parameters Table 7 18 lists the MCE1 and MCT1 port test configuration tasks described in this section You can only use Site Manager to perform each task Table 7 18 MCE1 and MCT1 Port Test Configuration Tasks Section Page Enabling or Disabling BERT Mode 7 58 Setting the BERT Alarm Type 7 58 Setting the BERT Test Pattern 7 59 Setting the Line Coding Method 7 59 Setting the Line Type 7 59 Setting FDL Options MCT1 Only 7 60 Setting the Signal Level MCT1 Only 7 60 Enabling or Disabling the International Bit MCE1 Only 7 61 308648 14 00 Rev 00 7 57 Configuring WAN Line Services To set the port test parameters complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In dyn
134. ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Remote Loopback Detection Configured FE1 Connector gt Adapter Module FE1 Logical Lines Disable Enable Disable Enables or disables Remote Loopback Detection If BofL is enabled the device driver detects when it is receiving its own BofL packets and disables the interface assuming that the link has been put into loopback Select Enable or Disable 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 91 Line Resources Configured FE1 Connector gt Adapter Module FE1 Logical Lines Edit Edit Provides access to the Edit Line Resources window to manage reservable bandwidth for ST2 traffic Select the parameter and click on Values The Edit Connector window appears Click on Edit Line Resources to access the Resource Manager None Synchronous Line Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID You access the synchronous line parameters from the Configuration Manager window Enable COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit SYNC Parameters Enable Enable Disable Enables or disables this synchronous line Set this parameter to Enable or Disable 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 2 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring WAN Line Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Obje
135. Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID On a BayStack AN ANH or ARN router only you access the DSU CSU line services parameters from the Configuration Manager window Option Mode COM Connector gt Edit DSU CSU gt Edit DSU CSU Parameters DDS1 56KBPS DDS1 S6KBPS CC 64KBPS Identifies the type of Telco service to which the DSU CSU is connected The data rate of the DSU CSU must match the network service Select DDS1 56KBPS when connected to a DDS1 56 Kb s line Select CC 64KBPS when connected to a Clear Channel 64 Kb s line 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 30 1 1 6 Transmit Clock Source COM Connector Edit DSU CSU Edit DSU CSU Parameters Slave Slave Master Determines the default transmit timing clock source for transmitting data to the network When set to Master an internal oscillator in the DSU creates the clock for a private wire configuration In Slave mode a PLL internal to the DSU will recover and synchronize the DSU clock Set both ends to Slave for a Telco network For a private wire configuration set one end to Master and the other end to Slave Note that there can be only one clock source on a DDS line 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 30 1 1 7 A 8 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID
136. Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Start Protocol COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit Asynchronous Parameters Answer Loop Originate Answer Specifies the start mode for the ASYNC TCP connection Select Answer to advise local TCP to wait for a connection request Select Originate to advise local TCP to initialize a connection to the specified remote IP address Select Loop to perform asynchronous cable testing 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 3 1 9 Remote IP Addr COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit Asynchronous Parameters None Any valid 32 bit IP address in dotted decimal notation Specifies a remote TCP host with which this router will communicate using ASYNC The remote IP address is used only when the Start Protocol parameter is set to Originate Enter a valid IP address in dotted decimal notation 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 3 1 26 Remote Port COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit Asynchronous Parameters 7 1 to 65535 Specifies a remote port on the router for the TCP connection for asynchronous communications Enter a remote port number The remote port number is used only when the Start Protocol parameter is set to Originate 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 3 1 27 308648 14 00 Rev 00 A 3 Configuring WAN Line Services Parameter Path
137. LC address of this interface Enables the transmission of proprietary BofL messages over a point to point connection between the local router and a remote peer BofL Timeout the time between transmissions of BofL messages from this interface Number of octets received without error Number of frames received without error Average number of packets received without error Number of octets transmitted without error Number of frames transmitted without error Average number of packets transmitted without error Total number of errors received Total number of errors transmitted continued 308648 14 00 Rev 00 BCC show Commands Number of Buffers Number of packets received without error Receive Number of Buffers Number of packets transmitted without error Transmit Protocols Configured Protocols configured on this interface Receive Errors The output contains the following information Bad Frames Number of bad receive frames caused by Frame Check Sequence FCS errors or nonoctet aligned errors Runt Frames Number of runt frames received on this line Frame Rejects Number of frame reject errors received on this line Frames Too Long Number of frames received on this line that exceed the MTU Overflow Frames Number of overflow frames received on this line in which the device s FIFO buffer overflowed before obtaining the next DMA cycle No buffer resources are available Transmit Errors The output con
138. Line gt Edit HSSI Parameters DS3 DS1 DS3 Specifies the appropriate MIB for the local management interface LMI to use as long as you enable LMI and configure SMDS or frame relay across the HSSI interface The HSSI driver does not support the DS1 or DS3 MIB Rather the external DCE for example a DL3200 SMDS CSU DSU from Digital Link may provide MIB support Select a DS1 MIB specified by RFC 1232 or a DS3 MIB specified by RFC 1233 depending on the carrier services the attached DCE provides DS1 at 1 54 MB s or DS3 at 44 736 MB s 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 7 1 1 13 External Clock Speed HSSI Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit HSSI Parameters 46359642 44 736 MB s 307200 to 52638515 Specifies the bandwidth that the HSSI channel provides The HSSI specification requires that the DCE provide a transmit clock that times data transfer across the DTE DCE interface The value you specify for this parameter does not actually affect hardware initialization Certain routing protocols use this parameter value for route selection Specify a value equal or close to the data transmission rate across the HSSI channel 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 7 1 14 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring WAN Line Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID CRC Size HSSI Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit HSSI Paramete
139. Logical Lines MCE1 Example To group lines into a multiline group from the MCE1 or MCT1 Logical Lines window complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 Click on Circuit The Add Circuit window opens because the unused logical lines are not yet part of a defined circuit 2 Click on OK to create the circuit The WAN Protocols window opens 3 Select the protocol for this circuit and click on OK The Select Protocols window opens continued 308648 14 00 Rev 00 10 13 Configuring WAN Line Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this 4 Select additional protocols and click on OK System responds The MCE1 or MCT1 Logical Lines window reopens this time displaying the configured circuit with the remaining unused logical lines Figure 10 8 The circuit is currently associated with one logical line 5 Select the logical line that contains the The Circuit Definition window opens new circuit and click on Circuit Figure 10 9 In Figure 10 8 the circuit is defined for logical line 5 and is called MCE1 22 5 For information about the format of logical line names see Figure 7 2 link modules or Figure 7 3 net modules in Chapter 7 6 Click on the connector that has the unused The Select Logical Line window opens logical lines Figure 10 10 displaying the lowest numbered un
140. Logical Lines gt Port Details gt FT1 Port Parameters Customer Inst Customer Inst Carrier Specifies the source from which the router accepts performance messages Customer Inst indicates that the router accepts messages only from the customer installation Carrier indicates that the router accepts messages only from the carrier Select the source for inbound performance messages 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 3 1 19 Primary Clock FT1 Connector gt Edit Logical Lines gt Port Details gt FT1 Port Parameters Port 1 Ext Loop Internal Port 1 Ext Loop Identifies the primary source of the timing signals Select Internal to use the clock chip on the link or net module Select Port 1 Ext Loop to use the signal coming from port 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 18 1 3 308648 14 00 Rev 00 A 49 Configuring WAN Line Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Secondary Clock FT1 Connector gt Edit Logical Lines gt Port Details gt FT1 Port Parameters Internal Internal Port 1 Ext Loop Port 2 Ext Loop Auxiliary Ext Identifies the secondary source of the timing signals The router uses the secondary clock only when the primary clock is unavailable Select Internal to use the clock chip on the link or net module Select Port 1 Ext Loop to use the signal coming from port 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 18 1 4 FT1 Logical Line Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Funct
141. Loop to use the signal coming from port 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 1 1 5 FT1 Port Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID You access the MCT1 port parameters from the Configuration Manager window Enable Disable FT1 Connector gt Edit Logical Lines gt Port Details gt FT1 Port Parameters Enable Enable Disable Enables or disables the FT1 port Set to Disable only if you want to disable the FT1 port 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 3 1 2 A 44 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Line Type FT1 Connector gt Edit Logical Lines gt Port Details gt FT1 Port Parameters ESF Unframed T1 ESF SF D4 Specifies the frame format ESF transmits superframes consisting of 24 individual SF D4 frames and provides enhanced signaling and synchronization SF D4 transmits superframes consisting of 12 individual frames Select the appropriate frame format for your T1 equipment Use Unframed T1 only with BERT mode to match the line type 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 4 1 6 Line Coding FT1 Connector gt Edit Logical Lines gt Port Details gt FT1 Port Parameters B8ZS AMI B8ZS Specifies a line coding method B8ZS line coding replaces a block of eight consecutive binary zeros with an 8 bit B8ZS code containing bi
142. MCT1 Services To run MCEI or MCTI port tests complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 Set the test parameters in the Port Actions window See Setting Port Test Parameters earlier in this chapter 2 Click on Apply Site Manager sets the parameters to the values you specified 3 To start a test click on the appropriate Site Manager performs the test you Send command selected 4 Repeat step 3 for each test you want to run Click on Done The MCE1 or MCT1 Port Parameters window opens See Table 7 21 for the list of BERT test commands you can send on any MCT1 or MCE port See Table 7 22 for the list of loopback commands you can send on an MCTI port only Setting Logical Line Test Parameters On DMCT1 net modules QMCT1 link modules and QMCT1 w DSOA link modules only you can test an individual logical line DSO group associated with a port 308648 14 00 Rev 00 7 63 Configuring WAN Line Services To test a logical line on a DMCTI or QMCTI port complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In dynamic mode click on a configured The MCT1 Logical Lines window opens MCT1 connector in the Configuration Manager window 2 Click on Port Details The MCT1 Port Parameters window opens 3 Click on Line Tests Note that the Line For a DMCT1 net module the Edit MCT1 Tests
143. MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Port Application Mode Unconfigured MCT1 Connector gt Port Application NONPRI NONPRI PRI Specifies the port application to use on the logical lines Select NONPRI to indicate that all of the lines have a permanent circuit number and are for leased lines frame relay or permanent connections to other non ISDN PRI applications Select PRI to indicate that the lines are for switched circuits using ISDN 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 1 16 Primary Clock MCT1 CLOCK Connector gt Edit Slot gt DS1 E1 Clock Parameters Port 1 Ext Loop Internal Port 1 Ext Loop Port 2 Ext Loop Auxiliary Ext Identifies the primary source of the timing signals Select Internal to use the clock chip on the link or net module Select Port 1 Ext Loop to use the signal coming from port 1 Select Port 2 Ext Loop to use the signal coming from port 2 Dual Port MCT1 only Select Auxiliary Ext to use an external source via BNC connectors 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 1 1 4 A 28 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Secondary Clock MCT1 CLOCK Connector gt Edit Slot gt DS1 E1 Clock Parameters Internal Internal Port 1 Ext Loop Port 2 Ext Loop Auxiliary Ext Identifies the secondary source of the timing signals The router uses the secondary clock only when the
144. Messages Options sss 8 15 Table 8 9 Accept Performance Messages Options rare TT aean Dess 24915 Tabla E10 Priman Glock CIO esa oerodecela eee DR nte erre i c Gad 8 17 Table 9 11 Secondary Clock Options 1 ereuusisceiei ener auditi ua cina aa iria 8 18 Table 8 12 Logical Line Configuration TASKS uaucssneesteceieterco teen eret een b prece scene pute s 8 23 Table 8 13 Port Test Configuration Tasks aient nena 8 36 Table 8 14 BERT Alarm Type Options Soret ae isi bends ahaa 8 37 Table SS FTI Line Coding OUOTD oscena a 8 38 Table SAG FTI Line Type Options ERE rideaerssrent canteen aiaieeusads 8 39 Table 8 17 ESF Line Types TET Bonai T TR bise IEEE Ped C 0 39 Table 8 18 Signal Level CDUOIS aussen mgr met aa oda raga cda ad da CREE Table 8 19 Send Commands for FT1 Port Tesis a Dalee mida dicont Gand dan d fcd T 8 41 Table 8 20 Send Commands for FT1 Port Loopback sesssssss 8 42 Table 9 1 COCK Parameter ODIDIOS assurgit de bc a ti Ebr pd ec D RR E 9 3 Table 9 2 FE1 Configuration Tasks P E P TUA TS 9 5 Table 9 3 FET Line Ty ie SOG mr 9 6 Table 9 4 PET Lie Cee OS iai ints dni aims corneas Oeo dac edad 9 7 Table 9 5 Loopback Configuration Options TEM TU tide sete ore ee Table 9 6 Primary HOEK MON NM TS 9 11 Table 9 7 Secondary Clock OPONE iuiuenaaga cero Rr Eo Ear rU ER UG sd ua 9 12 Table 9 8 Logical Line Contiguralol TASRS
145. Module FE1 Logical Line window 2 Click on Timeslots The FE1 Timeslots window opens This window represents the 31 FE1 timeslots 3 Click on an Unused timeslot A list of logical lines to which you can assign the timeslot opens 4 Select the logical line to which you want to assign the timeslot 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each timeslot you want to assign or click on Select All to assign all timeslots to a logical line 6 Click on OK The Adapter Module FE1 Logical Line window opens 7 Click on Apply 8 Click on Done The Configuration Manager window opens Setting FE1 Line Priority Specify the priority of this FE1 line within the same demand or backup pool with the priority parameter To set this parameter navigate to the logical line prompt and type priority variable 9 24 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring FE1 Services For example logical line boston priority 1 Setting the Hold Down Interval Specify the time that the router waits before bringing up this line when using dial services with the hold down time parameter To set this parameter navigate to the logical line prompt and type hold down time integer For example logical line boston hold down time 0 Viewing the External Clock Speed View the clock speed of the externally supplied clock with the external clock speed parameter To view the value of this parameter navigate to the logical line prompt and typ
146. OG Te 5 7 Using Site Manager T EE cu TT TT je pss obesi noanoa 5 7 Setting the Carrier Loss Debounce Timeout cccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeees 5 8 Usna Bund e s eee conoid reer ert ener meres DT TE 5 8 Using Site Manager cues need 5 8 seting Up DTE Loopback Testing iso exci nadar P enc asap eon p Aldd dba 5 8 Linee Se BISRAOHBE acri aaa diabolo dion aab td bxc ta OE 5 10 Sending Traffic Across a ASS Infelfabje assai ucesepskes ene ea pkacc cute ees a cd carens 5 10 Chapter 6 Configuring E1 and T1 Services Cer ar ol USA TI Eie e D o o DE ES 6 1 SU THEE 2rd MIRO Tm ETT 6 2 Enabling el Disabling TT SeErviCES assuussosensactsnbaderckes diebns de a b den rd 6 4 ComM he Ti ICM NI a S 6 4 DA FO tr 6 4 ESF POLSE cenna P E r ete inis PTEE PE E 6 4 Enabling or Disabling Bipolar with 8 Zero Substitution B8ZS 6 5 pecia Lie DOIKIDUE osisssa iea aE Ri a a n xn ER 6 6 Setting the Internal Clock Mode TT T ee T bicis 0 7 Assn Channel FIUDOHOGS i erbe D patency aetna ia Ue udo C cr db MU 6 7 Greni BS SIT cci odond REA US dude Loca a up Qd Fat RU Ed 6 8 Data and Voice Pase TEOU auuuccesccuscrasctcctesiuuMuc erase nene at aqos e eras sa Rat cR Uc cMEE EGG 6 8 Cal rBcIB crIi el cR E 6 8 Enabling or Disabling E1 Services TE TR Seats ADT jaraan 6 10 308648 14 00 Rev 00 xi Enabling ar Deding CHG esanaia sum Verbo a la qw pr Rag
147. RMs received in error n error means that the calculated CRC does not match the incoming CRC word 308648 14 00 Rev 00 B 43 Configuring WAN Line Services show mct1e1 fdl att The show mct1e1 fdl att command displays the Facility Data Link FDL error statistics in ATT 54016 mode The output contains the following information Slot Module Conn Line Number ES Counts SES Counts SEFS Counts UAS Counts CSS Counts PCV Counts LES Counts BES Counts DM Counts LCV Counts Name of the physical interface Line number for this line assigned during configuration This line number uniquely identifies this interface and is not equal to any of the line numbers assigned to logical lines configured through this port Number of Errored Seconds ES An ES is any 1 second time interval with either a frame bit error or a CRC 6 error Number of Severely Errored Seconds SES An SES is any 1 second time interval with an OOF error or more than 320 CRC errors Number of Severely Errored Framing Seconds SEFS that a DS1 interface encountered in the previous 24 hour interval Number of Severely Errored Seconds UAS A UAS is the number of seconds between 10 consecutive SES events inclusive and 10 consecutive non SES events exclusive For more information refer to the 1989 ANSI T1 403 specification Carrier to Customer Installation DS1 Metallic Interface Number of Controlled Slip Seconds CSS that a DS
148. Retry Count The Max N2 Retries parameter determines the value of the N2 retry count which is the number of retransmission attempts the router makes per frame before it considers the line to be down The retry count is the maximum number of attempts following the expiration of the T1 timer By default the number of times the router tries to retransmit is 10 Set the number of retries from 1 to 64 on this interface Using Site Manager See the Max N2 Retries parameter on page A 20 for information 2 38 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring Synchronous Services Setting the Maximum T1 Acknowledge Timer The Max T1 Acknowledge Timer parameter specifies the time in seconds that the router waits for an acknowledgment of a frame that it has sent to the network By default this timer is set to 3 seconds Set the maximum time that the router should wait for a frame acknowledgment from the network to a value from 1 to 9999 seconds Using Site Manager See the Max T1 Acknowledge Timer parameter on page A 20 for information Setting the Maximum T2 Acknowledge Timer The Max T2 Acknowledge Timer parameter specifies the time in seconds that the router waits before sending an acknowledgment for a sequenced frame The default value of 1 means that the router does not delay before generating an acknowledgment Set the amount of time that you want the router to wait before acknowledging a sequenced frame to a value from 1 to 9999 secon
149. S alarm indication signal to transmit blue alarms all ones Select Yellow to transmit yellow alarms all zeros Setting the BERT Test Pattern When a port is in BERT mode it can generate patterns such as all ones all zeros qrss twol5 twol5inv two20 two23 two23inv Specify the bit pattern to be transmitted during BERT diagnostics Setting the Line Coding Method The FE1 port uses HDB3 transmit and receive line coding by default You can select AMI line coding instead For a description of these line coding methods see Setting the FE1 Line Coding on page 9 7 Setting the Line Type When configuring the line type setting for an FEI line select the appropriate frame format for testing El e EI CRC EI MF e EI CRC MF Unframed El 9 28 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring FE1 Services Running Port Tests Port tests affect a logical line associated with a port Table 9 9 describes the BERT test commands you can send on an FE port Table 9 9 Send Commands for FE1 Port Tests Send Command Function Reset BERT Counters Resets all counters to 0 Insert 1 Error Inserts a single nonrepeating error into the bit stream Insert 1 Error 1K bit stream Inserts a deliberate error into every thousandth position in the Insert 1 Error 1M stream Inserts a deliberate error into every millionth position in the bit Disable Insert Error Stops the insertion
150. SYNC Parameters NRZ NRZ NRZI NRZI Mark Specifies the line coding of the physical synchronous line On AN and ASN routers and on a router with an Octal Sync link module you can change the value to match the line coding of a device at the other end of the line Select NRZ for nonreturn to zero coding Select NRZI for nonreturn to zero inverted coding Select NRZI Mark for nonreturn to zero inverted mark coding 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 88 Remote Loopback Detection COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit SYNC Parameters Disable Enable Disable Enables or disables remote loopback detection If BofL is enabled the device driver detects when it is receiving its own BofL packets and disables the interface assuming that the link has been put into loopback mode Select Enable or Disable 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 91 External Clock Speed COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit SYNC Parameters 64102 b s 1200 to 6000000 b s Sets the clock speed of an externally supplied clock when the Clock Source parameter is set to External Set the clock speed for the external clock to the data transmission rate that most closely corresponds to the speed of the external clock You cannot set this parameter when the Clock Source parameter is set to Internal 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 93 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function
151. Select Slave to indicate that the incoming data stream sets the clock Select Manual to indicate that the jumpers on the E1 link module set the clock See Installing and Maintaining BN Routers or Installing and Maintaining ASN Routers and BNX Platforms for information about configuring hardware jumpers 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 11 1 8 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring WAN Line Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Mini Dacs E1 Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit E1 Parameters Idle Idle Data Voice Circuit 1 Circuit 2 Assigns a specific function to each E1 channel Select Idle to make the channel idle Select Data to assign the channel to voice pass through E1 connector to El connector Select Circuit 1 to assign the channel to the first E1 connector Select Circuit 2 to assign the channel to the second E1 connector 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 11 1 9 Line Type E1 Connector Edit Line Edit E1 Parameters El EI EICRC4 Enables or disables a 4 byte CRC on received frames Select EICRCA if the E1 equipment expects a 4 byte CRC trailer at the end of each frame 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 11 1 18 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters HSSI Line Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options
152. Setting the Pasyne Stop BIS consina eon Ud Rada tut a ale 2 33 Setting the Pasync Baud Rate spect esed alas pet deo ped matus E tend anti be ds 2 34 Editing LAPB Patel Services amantium para on aid Copt p ao D a DEG 2 34 LAPB Implementation on Nortel Networks Routers eeeeenne 2 34 LAPB Parameierg Re 2 35 Enabling or Disabling LAPB Sarviees saiisine 2 36 Setting the Station Type eee 2 36 e tnpeRir 21 1 23 2 37 Setting the Maximum N1 Frame Size sse 2 38 Setting the Window Size TA E T E Decals 2 38 Setting the Maximum N2 Retry Count ERO pO BERN PEU VAT NE UE 2 38 Setting the Maximum T1 Acknowledge Timer sss 2 39 Setting the Maximum T2 Acknowledge Timer cccccsssceeeeeeeseteeeeeeeeeenees 2 39 Setting the Maximum T3 Disconnect Timer ccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 40 Setting the Link Setup Action NEEDED lot 2 40 Enabling or Disabling Test Exchange Identification XID Erat 2 40 viii 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Enabling or Disabling Receiver Ready RR Frames sess 2 41 Selecting the Local Command or Response Address uussuss 2 41 viewing the WAN idc m 2 42 Dispisving EIA ana IS vie asd a Pee tenant Debo ead rp ree rece dr ard i le p rad re re 2 42 Resetting EIA Signal Status T TE rrr Tore ee
153. T1 port information The output contains the following information Slot Module Conn State MTU Loopback State Accept Loopback Bert Mode Line Type Line Coding FDL Type FDL Address Name of the physical interface State of the logical line as follows Up Down Init initializing LMI Wait Loopback Dying Dead or Not Pres not present Maximum transfer unit size the buffer size for the MCT1 MCE 1 port also the largest frame that can be transmitted or received across the MCT1 MCE1 port The value ranges from 3 to 4608 bytes State of loopback as follows payload loop line loop no loop Loopback state the MCT1 port accepts requests from a remote device to go into loopback mode by default During loopback the port loops receive data back onto the T1 transmit path The remote or intermediate test equipment then performs diagnostics on the network between the equipment and the port You can disable detection of remote loop up and loop down code to prevent the port from accepting loopback requests State of BERT mode enabled or disabled In BERT mode the router introduces deliberate error patterns into the transmitted bit stream on a single logical line Type of line in use Unframed T1 ESF or SF The type of bipolar format MCT1 uses for signals B8ZS or AMI Setting of facilities data link FDL mode as follows ansi 403 att 54016 or none Setting of the FDL HDLC address mode by or az
154. TTE PE E EE E E E A rs rer B 35 Gommands for MOT 1 MCE Services iius er per o enr tiisin B 37 ares reu desig RT TO o STEM B 38 Sree metel berria isset t deed ai trate E a a B 39 show merlel Bert Stalsc OL ouscaseens perierint bec a p bir d pda rv pi WRIU B 40 show mortel elaoksiate Lease torres Tm B 41 show moiTet else Stn d TREE ET B 41 on MEOT OTTON sinisiin ian EA ENEAN EEANN B 42 show mct1e1 fdl ansi e TU TT T T jean dd TT T B 43 show metis T JO alb 5e a EUM at NA A EE RR B 44 SII HIE PEAME sagoi D OTT B 45 sbow mele PRINS siao aiia rai iaa crab EI bacgud Eebasi UR DNI uu NE ELLE da E B 46 Sow WOES SIBER aes faece plo Po OR E E B 47 show mctiei summary erate beet ties eM MN peels EA PT TUS B 48 show mellet chip e ia B 50 Snow mone dere e T B 51 show mettet timeslot eon tits E ads EE B 52 Sew mecs DOSO S aucem pup o pU E aen da Scc alice en n eC peeks B 52 Commands for Serial ServiGe amp iussu eeee nat iecit redi x Und aa etna ER d E RF dr cR B 53 CP senal aeS seraa 1L SUUS B 54 show oral detalle cp e s Hep Od Pa ee RR tua Ee m ed Seta a HA V B 55 Receive Errors E ET B 57 Te ANE EES chiar t ot Um eR B 57 VEEL IN I NR ETE m T T T B 57 show serial eia status T t t TET EE TOT ere TNR M B 58 show senal ENS cis coscc nien RR CI Reo eed Dd a de tb A EN RD Ld B 59 Receive EIOS uicem asta d oa a e eua tu deed n REED a up B 59 Bhdnd ivh
155. U size navigate to the serial prompt for example box serial 2 1 and type mtu integer For example serial 2 1 mtu 2000 Using Site Manager See the MTU parameter on page A 71 for information Enabling or Disabling Remote Address Filtering Set the Promiscuous parameter to specify whether the interface filters packets for addresses other than its own local address or whether address filtering is based on both the local and remote addresses With this parameter set to enabled the interface receives all frames By default address filtering is disabled the interface receives only frames destined for its local address Enable or disable local and remote promiscuous address filtering on the interface Using the BCC To enable or disable address filtering navigate to the serial prompt for example box serial 2 1 and type promiscuous variable For example serial 2 1 promiscuous disabled serial 2 1 promiscuous enabled Using Site Manager See the Promiscuous parameter on page A 71 for information 308648 14 00 Rev 00 2 7 Configuring WAN Line Services Configuring Clocking Signals By default the synchronous interface operates with an external clock source at 64102 b s You can configure the source and speed of synchronous timing signals by e Setting the Clock Source e Setting the Internal Clock Speed e Setting the External Clock Speed Setting the Clock Source The Clock Source parameter specifies w
156. U to configure the largest frame that the logical line can transmit or receive The PRI MTU is 1600 bytes by default You can change it to any size from 3 to 4608 bytes See the MTU Size bytes parameter on page A 40 Click on Apply 10 Click on Done The Configuration Manager window opens 308648 14 00 Rev 00 7 55 Configuring WAN Line Services Testing MCE1 and MCT1 Lines The following sections describe how to use the Configuration Manager to test single line and multiline MCE1 and MCTI link module and net module interfaces e About the Tests e Setting Port Test Parameters e Running Port Tests e Setting Logical Line Test Parameters Running Logical Line Tests About the Tests While in dynamic mode you can use the Configuration Manager to trigger port actions to test the quality of MCE1 and MCTI connections Table 7 17 describes the tests you can run Table 7 17 MCE1 and MCT1 Line Tests Test Description Link Modules ASN Net Modules Transmitting specific codes to the remote All All end of the MCE1 or MCT1 connection Introducing deliberate error patterns into the All All port BERT bit stream Introducing deliberate error patterns intoa QMCTI1 DMCT1 logical line s BERT bit stream QMCT1 w DSOA Initiating fractional loopback code on QMCT1 DMCT1 individual logical lines QMCT1 w DS0A Note Except for the logical line tests on QMCTI link modules and DMCT
157. Using the BCC To reset the router navigate to the dsucsu prompt for example box dsucsu 1 1 and type unit reset variable For example dsucsu 1 1 unit reset reset 308648 14 00 Rev 00 4 5 Configuring WAN Line Services Enabling or Disabling the 64K Transmit Monitor This parameter is valid only when the Option Mode telco service parameter is set to cc64kbps When enabled the 64K Transmit Monitor parameter suppresses data to prevent unintended duplication of a network control code For example user data that includes the text of a loopback control code could place the remote end of the connection in a loop The 64K Transmit Monitor parameter is disabled by default Keep the parameter disabled to allow all data select Enabled to monitor and suppress user data Using the BCC To enable or disable the 64K transmit monitor navigate to the dsucsu prompt for example box dsucsu 1 1 and type suppress 64k data variable For example dsucsu 1 14 Suppress 64k data enabled Using Site Manager See the 64K Transmit Monitor parameter on page A 9 for information Configuring Line Availability In the BCC the Line Availability Time parameter indicates the number of minutes during which the system can calculate the availability of the line Line availability is the percentage of time the line is in service Set line availability time to a value from 1 to 15 minutes By default the time is set to 15 minutes Usin
158. WARRANTIES INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE In addition the program and information contained herein are licensed only pursuant to a license agreement that contains restrictions on use and disclosure that may incorporate by reference certain limitations and notices imposed by third parties ii 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Nortel Networks NA Inc Software License Agreement NOTICE Please carefully read this license agreement before copying or using the accompanying software or installing the hardware unit with pre enabled software each of which is referred to as Software in this Agreement BY COPYING OR USING THE SOFTWARE YOU ACCEPT ALL OF THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS LICENSE AGREEMENT THE TERMS EXPRESSED IN THIS AGREEMENT ARE THE ONLY TERMS UNDER WHICH NORTEL NETWORKS WILL PERMIT YOU TO USE THE SOFTWARE If you do not accept these terms and conditions return the product unused and in the original shipping container within 30 days of purchase to obtain a credit for the full purchase price 1 License Grant Nortel Networks NA Inc Nortel Networks grants the end user of the Software Licensee a personal nonexclusive nontransferable license a to use the Software either on a single computer or if applicable on a single authorized device identified by host ID for which it was originally acquired b to copy the Software solely for backup purposes
159. When this parameter is enabled this port accepts and complies with requests to go into loopback mode from a remote device Enable or disable local loopback 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 3 1 10 A 60 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Loopback Configuration FE1 Connector gt Adapter Module FE1 Logical Lines gt Port Details gt Edit Adapter Module FE1 Port Parameters No Loopback No Loopback Payload Loopback Line Loopback Forces the DS1 interface to go into loopback The remote or intermediate equipment then performs diagnostics on the network between that equipment and the DS1 interface No Loopback This option deactivates any loopabck Payload Loopback The received signal on this interface is looped through the device Typically the received signal is looped back for retransmission after it has passed through the framing device Line Loopback The received signal does not go through the framing device minimum penetration but is looped back out Select the loopback configuration option for testing After testing set this parameter to No Loopback to return the interface to normal operation 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 4 1 10 International Bit FE1 Connector gt Adapter Module FE1 Logical Lines gt Port Details gt Edit Adapter Modul
160. XCVR4 M XCYR3 T XCVR2 M XCVR1 M MCT1 2 MCE1 2 T CONSOLE Figure 10 4 T CLOCK T MCT1 1 T CLOCK MCE1 1 Circuit Definition Window 10 8 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring Multiline Services SE timuit Definition C O Configuration Mi SNMP Protocols Ag Slot Figure 10 5 Lines J XCVR4 XCVR3 I XCVR2 M XCVR1 T MCT1 2 T CLOCK F MCT1 1 T MCE1 2 T CLOCK F MCE1 1 T CONSOLE Change Lines Menu Option Changing the Traffic Distribution Method By default all multiline circuits distribute traffic using address pairs To change the traffic distribution method complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds window 1 Start at the Configuration Manager 2 Click on one of the connectors of the The Edit Connector window opens appropriate multiline circuit 3 Click on Edit Circuit The Circuit Definition window opens Figure 10 5 continued 308648 14 00 Rev 00 10 9 Configuring WAN Line Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this System responds 4 Choose Lines gt Multiline The Edit Multiline Options window opens Figure 10 6 displaying the circuit number in its title 5 Edit the Data Path Chooser parameter to select the data path See the Data Path Chooser parameter on page A 91 6 Click on OK Edit Multiline Options 542 Data Pat
161. You can disable or reenable each logical line Using the BCC To disable or enable the logical line navigate to the logical line prompt for example box fe1 1 1 logical line boston and type state variable For example logical line boston state disabled Using Site Manager See the Enable Disable parameter on page A 63 for information Disabling and Reenabling BofL Messages Transmission of BofL packets is enabled by default on a logical line A BofL packet is sent as often as the value you specify for the BofL Timeout parameter You can disable or reenable BofL messages on the logical line Using the BCC To enable or disable BofL messages navigate to the logical line prompt for example box fe1 1 1 logical line boston and type bofl variable For example logical line boston bofl disabled Using Site Manager See the Breath of Life BofL Enable Disable parameter on page A 63 for information 9 16 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring FE1 Services Setting the BofL Timeout The time period between transmissions of BofL packets is 5 seconds by default You can change the BofL timeout value on the logical line to any value from 1 to 60 seconds Using the BCC To change the BofL timeout value navigate to the logical line prompt for example box fe1 1 1 logical line boston and type bofl timeout integer For example logical line boston bofl timeout 10 Using Site Manager See the BofL T
162. able For example logical line 1 1 bofl disabled Using Site Manager See the Breath of Life BofL Enable Disable parameter on page A 50 for information 308648 14 00 Rev 00 8 25 Configuring WAN Line Services Setting the BofL Timeout The time period between transmissions of BofL packets is 5 seconds by default You can change the BofL timeout value on the logical line to any value from 1 to 60 seconds Using the BCC To change the BofL timeout value navigate to the logical line prompt for example box ft1 1 1 logical line 1 1 and type bofl timeout integer For example logical line 1 1 bofl timeout 10 Using Site Manager See the BofL Timeout parameter on page A 51 for information Enabling or Disabling Logical Line Loopback In logical line channelized loopback mode the router retransmits received data for specified timeslots only This proprietary SNMP based form of loopback passes data through the HDLC controller and therefore only supports HDLC data Logical line loopback mode is disabled by default You can specify whether or not to initiate logical line loopback mode on the logical line using Site Manager Using Site Manager See the Fractional Loopback parameter on page A 51 for information 8 26 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring FT1 Services Viewing the Configured WAN Protocol The WAN Protocol parameter indicates which WAN protocol is configured on this logical line Do not change t
163. age A 84 for information Setting a Priority On a synchronous interface configured for dial or switched services you can assign a priority number 1 to 50 to each line in the same demand or backup pool The lower the number the higher the priority For example the router uses a line of priority 1 before it uses a line of priority 2 Set the priority for the interface Using the BCC To set a priority number navigate to the serial prompt for example box serial 2 1 and type priority integer For example serial 2 1 priority 4 2 28 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Setting the Setting the Configuring Synchronous Services Using Site Manager See the Sync Priority parameter on page A 86 for information Hold Down Time On a synchronous interface configured for dial services you can specify a time period 0 to 9999 seconds for the router to wait before bringing down a backup line This delay allows time for the primary line to fully recover before deactivating the backup line For a dial on demand interface the Hold Down Time parameter is set to 3 seconds by default For other interfaces the Hold Down Time parameter is set to 0 by default Set this parameter to a value from 0 to 9999 seconds Using the BCC To set the hold down time navigate to the serial prompt for example box serial 2 1 and type hold down time integer For example serial 2 14 hold down time 0 Using Site Manager See the H
164. ager and NRZI type parameters If applicable see Configuring a DS0A Connection earlier in this chapter Table 7 12 on page 7 32 provides a matrix of supported configurations for the QMCTI w DSOA logical line encoding parameters When enabled the NRZI Encoding parameter specifies nonreturn to zero inverted NRZI line encoding to communicate state changes between the subscriber s devices across the frame relay network You can disable communication of such state changes by setting this parameter to disabled The NRZI Type parameter specifies the NRZI encoding format in the frame on the logical line Ignore NRZI Type if you set NRZI Encoding to disabled Valid options are as follows e Mark This format uses a 0 bit to indicate a state change and a 1 bit to indicate no state change e Space This format uses a 1 bit to indicate a state change and a 0 bit to indicate no state change 308648 14 00 Rev 00 7 49 Configuring WAN Line Services Using the BCC To enable or disable NRZI encoding navigate to the logical line prompt for example stack mce1 1 2 1 logical line mce1 121 1 and type nrzi encoding variable For example logical line mcel 121 14 nrzi encoding enabled To set the NRZI type navigate to the logical line prompt for example stack mce1 1 2 1 logical line mce1 121 1 and type nrzi type variable For example logical line mcel 121 14 nrzi type space Using Site Manager See the NRZI
165. ager aerae abo d Or et Rae o a and aaa ida Poveda DR RAS 4 4 Selecting the T ahermit Clock SODUFOB 1 uua ice odd tee taduir eor ka ii Fett rant 4 4 Leng TRGB ope HN 4 5 amg Sollee POLITE BI etc pct abo ra Rae hb Spa ead dta od opta ot a 4 5 Resetting the Router beside ree PE TUM ents A Subtus nid 5 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Lerno PRA BOG oxi pa re A 4 5 Enabling or Disabling the 64K Transmit Monitor oeiia T T vere 46 Using mhe iR E 4 6 Using we Menige E S D 4 6 Configuring Line Availability Pe ere C E TIU A det ner errr reer Poste REMIS 4 6 Augu ico rcc C Pv 4 6 SDN Du Pall SESS cosi E n abban A r cds tpe dea ndax abu o bes iD inse dud D UE ud 4 7 Uong De BUG rioni ie 4 7 Resetting Tg COMS COUNEIS rioris ed dp ebat pa ANO 4 7 t il qnis baee aceaieentenudaneeraanetneunes TOU 4 7 spiego oa Loopback TESI 4 8 Configuring the V 54 Loopback Test State sisinsdiran saana 4 8 Configuring the V 54 Loopback Timer T TE bes ebd TUS Scenes eee AY eC Tet TNS em 4 10 IA ass eror DL p 4 11 Remote Digital Loopback IBI ui ccscscctesauiepssccciteie tacnsciegsovadeuneidatensivacesmenassteaned 4 11 Local Analog Loop Da KIAL Loeidsssopoa st mii pP pP DOR en PD P aD 4 12 Pattern 2047 BERT Test NS eh TET rare bc 4 13 Ee peut 4 13 Chapter 5 Configuring HSSI Services Cuervo OT FSO GEV ES cornia e ek ieb pese eee eomapa
166. al Internal The default uses the clock chip on the link or net module loop1 Port 1 Ext Loop Uses the signal coming from port 1 Using the BCC To set the secondary clock navigate to the ftl prompt for example box ft1 1 1 and type secondary clock variable For example ft1 1 1 secondary clock loop1 Using Site Manager See the Secondary Clock parameter on page A 48 for information 8 18 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring FT1 Services Setting the External Clock State In the BCC the External Clock State parameter indicates whether the external clock is operational You can set this parameter to present up which is the default or absent down Using the BCC To set the external clock state navigate to the ftl prompt for example box ft1 1 1 and type external clock state variable For example mcel 1 2 14 external clock state absent Setting the Loop Clock In the BCC the Loop Clock State parameter specifies this port s loop clock status You can set this parameter to present up which is the default or absent down Using the BCC To set the loop clock state navigate to the ftl prompt for example box ft1 1 1 and type loop clock state variable For example ft1 1 1 loop clock state absent 308648 14 00 Rev 00 8 19 Configuring WAN Line Services Setting Relay Control The relay on the link module automatically goes into loopback mode when a system power
167. al line on the FT1 port To specify a new circuit name navigate to the logical line prompt for example box ft1 1 1 logical line 1 1 and type circuit name string For example logical line 1 1 circuit name ft1 newyork Selecting a WAN Protocol To configure a WAN protocol over this logical line navigate to the logical line prompt for example box ft1 1 1 logical line 1 1 and type wan protocol variable For example logical line 1 1 wan protocol ppp Setting the WAN Interface Type The interface is set for synchronous operation by default Set this parameter to asynchronous to select asynchronous communication or to pasynchronous for polled asynchronous communication To set the WAN interface type navigate to the logical line prompt for example box ft1 1 1 logical line 1 1 and type wan type variable For example logical line 1 1 wan type asynchronous 308648 14 00 Rev 00 8 21 Configuring WAN Line Services Defining Logical Lines Using Site Manager To add the logical line for an FT1 port complete the following steps Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 Start at the FT1 Logical Line window After you customize the port parameters for a non PRI circuit the FT1 Logical Line window opens 2 Click on Add The Add Circuit window opens 3 Specify the logical line in the Circuit Name box 4 Click on OK The WAN Protocols window opens 5 Select
168. ameters window After you customize the port parameters for a non PRI circuit the Adapter Module FE1 Logical Line window opens 2 Click on Add The Add Circuit window opens 3 Specify the logical line in the Circuit Name box 4 Click on OK The WAN Protocols window opens 5 Select the WAN protocol and click on OK For information about selecting WAN protocols see Configuring and Managing Routers with Site Manager and the appropriate protocol configuration guide The Select Protocols window opens Select the protocols to run on this logical line For instructions see the appropriate protocol configuration guide The Adapter Module FE1 Logical Line window opens showing the first FE1 circuit Customizing Logical Line Parameters Table 9 8 lists the configuration tasks described in this section and indicates whether you can use the BCC or Site Manager to perform each task Table 9 8 Logical Line Configuration Tasks Configuration Task BCC Site Manager Page Disabling and Reenabling the Logical Line V V 9 16 Disabling and Reenabling BofL Messages V J 9 16 Setting the BofL Timeout 4 V 9 17 Setting the MTU Size P4 V 9 17 Enabling or Disabling Interface Filtering v V 9 18 Setting the Service Type 4 V 9 18 Setting Minimum Frame Spacing V V 9 19 Setting the Local HDLC Address V V 9 19 continued 9 14 308648 14 00 Rev 00
169. amic mode click on a configured The Logical Lines window opens MCT1 or MCE1 connector in the Configuration Manager window 2 Click on Port Details The Port Parameters window opens 3 Click on Line Tests Note that the Line The Port Actions window opens Tests option appears only in dynamic mode 4 Edit the port action parameters located in the upper portion of the window 5 After setting a parameter click on Apply 6 Click on Done when you are finished setting port action parameters Note All changes you apply to the port in the Port Actions window are in effect only while the window is active When you exit the Port Actions window all port settings revert to the original settings Enabling or Disabling BERT Mode Enable BERT mode for BERT testing using Site Manager By setting this parameter you enable or disable BERT mode on all logical lines except QMCTI and DMCT1 net module interfaces On these interfaces you can enable or disable BERT mode on individual logical lines See the BERT Mode parameter on page A 41 for information Setting the BERT Alarm Type Using Site Manager you can specify the type of alarm signal to be generated while in BERT mode or disable the generation of alarm signals altogether See the BERT Alarm Type parameter on page A 41 for information 7 58 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring MCE1 and MCT1 Services Setting the BERT Test Pattern When a po
170. an TUORUM ee echt menue NA md Oe Luder e ls hcl ol a mere reeset een Sener as ey mere tee neers 7 39 xiv 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Enabling or Disabling the Logical Die use pe epa ea pec eth atv aruis 7 39 Enabling or Disabling BofL Messages sene 7 40 Seting the OTL TIMEOUT uccidere pipi de Fete Rer oc Sopas pk Fco itas ated eap 7 40 Enabling or Disabling Logical Line Loopback 1 omen 7 41 Viewing the Configured WAN Protocol E E a mE 7 41 Seting The HOLC Senice TU as ccgaseccnsenedcanseegscacdasapedacteniemacensaeetiscatathcceltaen 7 42 Setting the Local HOLC Address uscasisdaiesux e cuncuz fedus k ac cac dira tea bd ai 7 42 Setting the Remote HDLC Address oreieuls AT T ere 7 48 SEUA Hale Jap MB 2a erp er bebe i aaa eleg E uiii Rb i tv abd NS 7 44 Setting the Interframe Time Fill Pattern sssssee 7 45 Seting Mie CRO SIZE mee 7 46 Sti the MTU SISB uisa neri pe phon Urea aao s Fro a a A Enabling or Disabling Remote Loopback Detciis T bp ipiis cere 1 47 Configuring BERT Diagnostic Pattern Tests erecti ttp treten utut 7 47 Enabling or Disabling Fractional T1 Loopback Detection 7 48 Configuring NRZI Line Encoding T eae d 7 49 Setting the Transmit Queue Length esee a 7 50 Setting the Receive Queue Length iuis ss ne cena trek naa edi cue ceeds 7 51 PSSM is ce ccctessetrcnev
171. anager Table 7 19 ESF Line Types Site Manager Option Description ANSI 403 The default conforms to the 1989 ANSI T1 403 specification Carrier to Customer Installation DSI Metallic Interface AT amp T 54016 Conforms to the 1989 AT amp T specification Hequirements for Interfacing Digital Terminal Equipment to Services Employing the Extended Superframe Format None Disables the FDL mode See the FDL Configuration parameter on page A 32 for information Setting the Signal Level MCT1 Only By default the T1 transmit power level is 0 0 dB You specify a decibel level from 15 dB to 1 5 dB according to the length of the cable or as determined by the carrier The carrier determines signal levels on a long haul 0 to 6000 ft of cable T1 network interface If 0 0 dB is not sufficient for long haul the carrier determines values of 15 ds1 minus15 and 7 5 dB ds1 minus 7point5 Signal power for DSX 1 short haul 0 to 655 ft is based on cable length For DSX 1 decibel levels correspond to cable length as follows Table 7 20 Signal Level Options Cable Length Site Manager Option 0 to 133 ft 0 0 dB 133 to 255 ft 0 5 dB 255 to 399 ft 0 8 dB 399 to 533 ft 1 1 dB 533 to 655 ft 1 5 dB 7 60 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring MCE1 and MCT1 Services By default the signal level is set to 0 0 dB Set the long haul or short haul signal level for this MCTI interface acc
172. anager and the appropriate protocol configuration guide for information about selecting WAN protocols The Select Protocols window opens continued 7 36 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring MCE1 and MCT1 Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this System responds 6 Select the protocols to run on this logical The Logical Lines window opens line See the appropriate protocol showing the first MCE1 or MCT1 circuit configuration guide for instructions 7 Repeat steps 2 to 6 for each logical line that you want to create You can use the default name that appears in the Add Circuit window or change the name by clicking on the Circuit Name box and typing a new name Figures 7 2 and 7 3 illustrate how Site Manager generates the default logical line name The default name identifies the following e Circuit type MCEI or MCTI e Physical connector slot and port number Number of the logical line on the MCE1 or MCTI port e Module number ASN net modules only ert Slot where connector Connector position on Type of circuit resides Slot 3 Link module Port 1 E Logical line Circuit name EDEN LS0018A Figure 7 2 Default Circuit Name for Link Modules Slot where connector Module where connector Type of circuit resides Slot 2 resides Module 3 Connector position on net module Port 1 Circuit name MCE1 231 12 Logical line LS0019A
173. arameter from 0 to 512 A value of zero causes the router to use its default values Nortel Networks recommends that you do not change the default setting of this parameter without careful consideration of the traffic flow in and out of the T1 E1 logical lines Caution You can affect router performance severely by over allocating buffer credits See Setting Buffer Credits for MCE1 on page 7 14 for more information 308648 14 00 Rev 00 7 51 Configuring WAN Line Services Using the BCC To set this parameter navigate to the logical line prompt for example box mce1 1 1 logical line mce1 11 1 and type receive queue length variable For example logical line mcel 11 1 receive queue length 100 Note This parameter is not supported on the ASN Assigning Timeslots After configuring logical lines you configure channels DSOs of bandwidth by grouping 1 to 24 MCT1 or 1 to 31 MCEI contiguous or noncontiguous DSO timeslots per DS1 frame Using the BCC To assign a timeslot to a logical line navigate to the logical line prompt for example stack mce1 1 2 1 logical line mce1 121 1 and type time slots integer For example logical line mcei 121 14 time slots 24 To assign multiple timeslots to a logical line type logical line mcei 121 14 time slots 1 2 3 4 10 7 52 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Using Site Manager Configuring MCE1 and MCT1 Services To assign timeslots c
174. arameter immediately places the port in loopback mode Table 8 7 lists the loopback configuration options Table 8 7 Loopback Configuration Options BCC Option Site Manager Option Description payload loop Payload Loopback Received signals are looped through the T1 framer then looped back for retransmission This method maintains bit sequence integrity for information bits but does not maintain the integrity of frames or superframes line loop Line Loopback Received signals do not go through the framing device before being looped back out no loop No Loopback The default this option deactivates any current loopback Using the BCC To set a loopback configuration navigate to the ftl prompt for example box ft1 1 1 and type loopback mode variable For example ft1 1 1 loopback mode payload loop Using Site Manager See the Loopback Configuration parameter on page A 48 for information 8 14 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring FT1 Services Setting the Source of Send Performance Messages On FT1 link modules specify the source of send performance messages by setting one of the following options Table 8 8 Send Performance Messages Options BCC Option Site Manager Option Description prm ci Customer Inst The default indicates that the customer installation supplies the messages prm carrier Carrier Indicates that the carrier supplies the messag
175. arameters Multiline Configuration Parameter 308648 14 00 Rev 00 A 1 Configuring WAN Line Services For each line parameter associated with a physical layer protocol this appendix provides the Site Manager menu path to the parameter information about default settings valid parameter options the parameter function instructions for setting the parameter and the MIB object ID Note The Site Manager menu path to each parameter listed in this appendix begins at the Configuration Manager window Asynchronous Line Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID On a Nortel Networks AN or ANH router only the Configuration Manager displays the Edit ASYNC Parameters window when you select the ASYNC protocol from the WAN Protocols window for a COM2 port line Enable COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit Asynchronous Parameters Enable Enable Disable Enables or disables ASYNC on the router Set this parameter to either enable or disable ASYNC 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 3 1 2 MTU COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit Asynchronous Parameters 1000 bytes 3 to 1580 bytes Specifies the largest frame MTU that the router can transmit via TCP Specify a value in the range 3 to 1580 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 3 1 7 A 2 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function
176. are enabled but not up Use this display to identify the interfaces that are not working This command allows for the following command filters flags and filter arguments circuit circuit name Displays information about the specified circuit only slot lt slot gt Displays information about the specified slot only lt circuit_name gt Displays information about the specified circuit only The output contains the following information Slot Conn Name of the physical interface Circuit Name of the circuit associated with this line Admin State Configured state of the HSSI port HW Address Physical address of the line The line driver fills in this address from the 48 bit address stored in the link module number PROM for this connector WAN Protocol WAN protocol enabled on this interface Operational Current operating state of the line driver as follows State BofLwait Driver is waiting for its own Breath of Life BofL frames to be successfully transmitted or for a BofL frame from the Nortel Networks router at the other end of the WAN connection This applies only to the Wellfleet Standard protocol CAwait External equipment such as a modem DSU or CSU is not currently up Init Module is initializing LMlwait Driver is waiting for any of four WAN protocols to indicate that a link layer connection has been established to another entity This applies to the frame relay SMDS ATM and PPP protocols
177. are short haul they correspond to the cable length as follows 0 0 dB 0 to 133 ft 0 5 dB 133 to 255 ft 0 8 dB 255 to 399 ft 1 1 dB 399 to 533 ft 1 5 dB 533 to 655 ft Specify the decibel level based on the length of the cable or as the carrier specifies 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 3 1 6 e o o o o Setup Alarm Threshold seconds MCTI Connector gt Edit Logical Lines gt Port Details gt MCT1 Port Parameters 2 seconds 2 to 10 seconds Specifies the time in seconds that MCT1 tolerates a performance defect or anomaly If the performance defect or anomaly is still present when this time interval expires MCT1 records a performance failure and logs an event message Set the timer value 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 3 1 7 308648 14 00 Rev 00 A 31 Configuring WAN Line Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Clear Alarm Threshold seconds MCTI Connector gt Edit Logical Lines gt Port Details gt MCT1 Port Parameters 2 seconds 2 to 10 seconds Specifies the clear time in seconds for performance failure conditions If the defect or anomaly clears in this time interval MCT1 records a performance cleared condition and logs an event message Set the timer value 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 3 1
178. ate variable For example fel 1 1 state disabled Using Site Manager See the Enable Disable parameter on page A 58 for information FE1 Line Type Select one of the following line types frame formats for your E1 equipment Table 9 3 FE1 Line Type Options BCC Option Site Manager Option el E1 e1 crc E1 CRC e1 mf E1 MF e1 crcmf E1 CRC MF unframed e1 Unframed E1 Using the BCC To set the line type navigate to the fel prompt for example box fe1 1 1 and type framing variable For example fel 1 1 framing e1 Using Site Manager See the Line Type parameter on page A 58 for information 9 6 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring FE1 Services Setting the FE1 Line Coding E1 uses bipolar format for signals In bipolar format alternating positive and negative pulses on the digital line signify the number 1 and the absence of a pulse signifies O see Figure 6 2 A long string of zeros causes the line to lose synchronization due to lack of pulses Nortel Networks provides a line coding mechanism to maintain synchronization By default the FE1 interface uses HDB3 line coding You can select AMI line coding instead AMI line coding is also bipolar a binary 0 is transmitted as O volts and a binary 1 is transmitted as either a positive or negative pulse opposite in polarity to the previous pulse When configured for AMI line coding the FE1 link module remains synchronized upon
179. ation Select ESF or D4 based on the frame format that the associated T1 equipment requires 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 10 1 7 A 88 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters B8ZS Support T1 Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit T1 Parameters Disable Disable Enable Enables or disables B8ZS bipolar with 8 zero substitution a mechanism that maintains T1 synchronization Select Enable or Disable depending on whether the associated T1 equipment supports B8ZS 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 10 1 9 Line Buildout T1 Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit T1 Parameters ft 1 to 655 ft Conditions router signals to mitigate attenuation Line buildout depends on the physical length of the T1 line Specify the approximate length of the cable connecting the router and the associated T1 equipment 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 10 1 8 Clock Mode T1 Connector Edit Line Edit T1 Parameters Internal Internal Slave Manual Specifies the source of the T1 transmit clock Specify the clocking mode making sure that the associated T1 equipment is compatible Select Internal to indicate that the router sets the clock Select Slave to indicate that the incoming data stream sets the cloc
180. ational State equals Up then the value appears in the form hhhmmmsss where hh is hours mm is minutes and ss is seconds For example the value might appear as 5h31m05s If the value is greater than 24 hours it appears in the form daddhhh mmm where dd is days hh is hours and mm is minutes For example the value might appear as 2d10h15m Media access control address the physical address of the line The line driver fills in this address from the 48 bit address stored in the link module number PROM for this connector Maximum transfer unit size the buffer size for the DSU CSU port also the largest frame that can be transmitted or received across the DSU CSU port The value ranges from 3 to 4608 bytes WAN protocol enabled on this interface The 1 byte local HDLC address of this interface The 1 byte remote HDLC address of this interface Enables the transmission of proprietary BofL messages over a point to point connection between the local router and a remote peer BofL Timeout the time between transmissions of BofL messages from this interface Number of octets received without error Number of frames received without error continued 308648 14 00 Rev 00 BCC show Commands Receive Average Packet Average number of packets received without error Transmit Bytes Number of octets transmitted without error Transmit Frames Number of frames transmitted without error Transmit Average Packet Average
181. bers to each data path 2 Generates a random number for each outbound packet 3 Sends the packet across the data path with the matching number Note Random selection provides even distribution across all active data paths in the topology however packets traveling on different paths can arrive at their destination out of sequence Some protocols cannot tolerate packets arriving out of sequence and as a result you can experience poor performance or failures Be sure that random selection is appropriate for your application See the Data Path Chooser parameter on page A 91 for information Grouping Logical Lines into a Multiline Circuit You can group as many as 31 MCEI logical lines and 24 MCT1 logical lines into one multiline circuit All logical lines in a multiline group have the same circuit name This section describes how to group unused MCEI or MCTI logical lines into one multiline circuit An unused logical line is a line without a defined circuit Note If the MCEI or MCTI circuit is already configured you must delete the single line circuit before creating a multiline circuit 308648 14 00 Rev 00 10 11 Configuring WAN Line Services Before you can group lines you must create the unused logical lines To create the unused logical lines complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 Start at the MCE1 or MCT1 Logical Lines window See Chapter 7 for deta
182. bling or Disabling Synchronous Services The router enables synchronous line services when you add the circuit You can disable and reenable the line without moving the cables Using the BCC To enable or disable a serial line navigate to the serial prompt for example box serial 2 1 and type state variable For example serial 2 1 State enabled serial 2 1 State disabled Using Site Manager See the Enable parameter on page A 69 for information 2 4 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring Synchronous Services Enabling or Disabling BofL Messages The Breath of Life BofL parameter enables or disables the transmission of proprietary BofL messages over a point to point connection between the local router and a remote peer The exchange of BofL messages provides a level of confidence in the point to point connection If you enable BofL locally you must also configure the remote peer to enable BofL Nortel Networks recommends that you enable BofL for point to point connections between Nortel Networks peers However if such a connection is accomplished through a wide area transport service such as frame relay X 25 or SMDS you must disable BofL The router enables BofL messages by default Using the BCC To enable or disable BofL messages navigate to the serial prompt for example box serial 2 1 and type bofl variable For example serial 2 1 bofl enabled serial 2 1 bofl disabled Using Site Ma
183. box ft1 1 1 logical line 1 1 and type local address variable For example logical line 1 1 local address dce Using Site Manager See the Local HDLC Address parameter on page A 52 for information Setting the Remote HDLC Address Specify the 1 byte HDLC address of the remote FT1 interface as follows e dce e dte e An explicit address value 2 4 5 6 or 7 Use unique HDLC addresses for the local and remote interfaces at either end of the point to point circuit For example if the local address is dte configure the remote address as DCE If you configure X 25 on this line set this parameter to either dce or dte 8 28 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring FT1 Services Using the BCC To specify the remote HDLC address navigate to the logical line prompt for example box ft1 1 1 logical line 1 1 and type remote address variable For example logical line 1 1 remote address dte Using Site Manager See the Remote HDLC Address parameter on page A 52 for information Setting the CRC Size By default the router uses the 16 bit CRC type The router appends a 16 bit CRC to the transmitted frames and performs a 16 bit CRC on received frames You can change to 32 bit CRC where the router appends a 32 bit CRC to transmitted frames and performs a 32 bit CRC on received frames Using the BCC To specify CRC size navigate to the logical line prompt for example box ft1 1 1 logical line 1 1 and type crc si
184. bsent 9 2 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring FE1 Services Configuring FE1 Services Using Site Manager Setting the You configure an FE1 interface port using the lines for ISDN Primary Rate Interface PRI permanent circuit non PRI applications For FEI ports the default port application mode must be NONPRI This indicates that all of the lines have a permanent circuit number and are for leased lines Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Port Application window opens click on an unconfigured FE1 connector 2 Setthe Port Application Mode parameter to NONPRI For information on this parameter click on Help or see page A 43 3 Click on OK A window containing the clock parameters opens Clock Parameters Clock parameters define the timing sources that apply to ports and DSO timeslots that an FE1 link module supports The primary clock identifies the primary source of the timing signals The router uses the secondary clock only when the primary clock is unavailable The options for the clock parameters are as follows Table 9 1 Clock Parameter Options BCC Option Site Manager Option Description internal Internal Uses the internal clock chip loop1 Port 1 Ext Loop Uses the signal coming in from port 1 308648 14 00 Rev 00 9 3 Configuring WAN Line Services Using the BCC To set the clock parame
185. bytes on this interface using the BCC Using the BCC To set the MTU size navigate to the ft1 prompt for example box ft1 1 1 and type mtu integer For example f t1 1 1 mtu 2000 8 16 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring FT1 Services Setting the Primary Clock Source Timing is independent for the ports on an FT1 link module For these modules you select the timing source for each port The primary clock identifies the primary source of the timing signals Table 8 10 lists the options for this parameter Table 8 10 Primary Clock Options BCC Options Site Manager Options Description internal Internal Uses the clock chip on the link or net module loop1 Port 1 Ext Loop The default uses the signal coming from port 1 Using the BCC To set the primary clock navigate to the ft1 prompt for example box ft1 1 1 and type primary clock variable For example ft1 1 14 primary clock internal Using Site Manager See the Primary Clock parameter on page A 49 for information 308648 14 00 Rev 00 8 17 Configuring WAN Line Services Setting the Secondary Clock Source The Secondary Clock parameter identifies the secondary source of the timing signals The router uses the secondary clock only when the primary clock is unavailable Table 8 11 lists the options for this parameter Table 8 11 Secondary Clock Options BCC Options Site Manager Options Description intern
186. cal lines you can set the Transmit Queue Length parameter to a value approximately 25 higher than the value of your most critical logical lines See Setting the Transmit Queue Length on page 7 50 for more information 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring MCE1 and MCT1 Services In many cases lost frames are due more to pervasive problems than to queue lengths allocated within the device drivers Often configuration or network design changes will have a more positive impact Contact the Nortel Networks Technical Solutions center for more information Refer to How to Get Help on page xxxix Setting the Transmit Buffer Use Credits for MCE1 In the BCC the Transmit Buffer Use Credits parameter specifies the configured transmit buffer credits available for all transmit queues on a slot These buffer credits are distributed among the slot s transmit queues for all active logical lines You can set this parameter from 0 to 512 A value of zero causes the router to use its default values Using the BCC To set this parameter navigate to the mcel prompt for example box mce1 1 1 and type transmit buffer use credits integer For example mcel 1 14 transmit buffer use credits 420 Setting the Receive Buffer Use Credits for MCE1 In the BCC the Receive Buffer Use Credits parameter specifies the configured receive buffer credits available for all receive queues on a slot These buffer credits are distributed among th
187. ce s FIFO buffer empties before the device obtains the next DMA request System Errors The output contains the following information Receive Rejects Number of reject frames received Transmit Rejects Number of reject frames transmitted T1 Timeouts Number of T1 timeouts detected The T1 timer is the link retransmission timer Link control frames are retransmitted when the T1 expires This timer tracks the number of timeouts Memory Errors Number of memory errors detected A memory error occurs when the DMA cycle expires without obtaining the bus within 26 ms Memory errors may indicate faulty hardware If this count exceeds five contact your Nortel Networks Technical Solutions Center B 30 308648 14 00 Rev 00 BCC show Commands show hssi errors The show hssi errors command displays receive transmission or system errors for all circuits or for a specific circuit or slot This command allows for the following command filters flags and filter arguments circuit circuit name Displays information about the specified circuit only slot lt slot gt Displays information about the specified slot only lt circuit_name gt Displays information about the specified circuit only Receive Errors The output contains the following information Slot Conn Name of the physical interface Circuit Name of the circuit associated with this line CRC Errors Number of frames received with CRC errors Overruns Number of frames
188. ce of Send Performance Messages sss 7 25 Bg fros Pete 7 26 Lemno ate RUE oai ob bere aa bea Red beg pera a n dn C rrt 7 26 Setting the Source of Accept Performance Messages renders 7 26 B hnwRu Ac Pee 7 26 Using CT I LT T 7 27 Setting the Primary Clock Source Sisters TT oen EET osise NINE 7 27 Leno De BEC oce ripa todo das d e rd de d cub rad d n POM a ane 7 28 DIES CAP CIS BE TD SM 7 28 Setting he Secondary Clock SOUCO ett 7 28 Hemo We BOG araia aA E A 7 28 Using Site Manager ete Creer Pere eee pleats ere TN 7 29 Seting he Loop COEK asias a eee rere reer 7 29 DID CDI saroian a Ete E MNT DETUR 7 29 Setting The External DIBGK s eaa oor diste SI ERRAT a Bette eos temi sa beide eas 7 29 D jungi dc b cm 7 29 Seting Butter Credis TOF MOTI ricrea ida dee pria nd embodied 7 29 Mrs pite a DS0A Conneeion tossir aaa ira 7 30 Gathering Reguired naimaton sssiousese oa ce eset ieee 7 30 Setting Parameters seiis ee rere reer trees reer MEE 7 31 i hvg is 9 bee 7 31 Uema Sce TAMIA CIE sorene eins sats dotada dna callus b ac dicun 7 33 Configuring Non PRI Logical Lines ebbe qus Perret rere Prerrre aaa To ee rl Bon EO es EN E ER petrabar eee 7 35 ME Ie ie PN TU AM 7 35 du MESI t cT DE 7 36 Gustomizing Logical Line Parameter 2 eiie ir tr ec rere e 7 38 Using the BCC cere TM ni
189. ces A 4 Configuring FE1 services 4 Configuring multiline services 4 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Getting Started Starting the Configuration Tools Before configuring WAN line services refer to the following user guides for instructions on how to start and use the Nortel Networks configuration tool of your choice Configuration Tool User Guide Bay Command Console BCC Using the Bay Command Console AN BN Routers Site Manager Configuring and Managing Routers with Site Manager NETarchitect Getting Started with Optivity Network Management System 8 0 Configuring and Maintaining Networks with the NETarchitect System These guides also describe generically how to create or modify a device configuration 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring WAN Line Services Accessing Line Parameters You can use the BCC or Site Manager to access WAN line services Using the BCC To access line parameters complete the following tasks 1 In configuration mode navigate to the top level box or stack prompt and type box show config The console displays the current router configuration including installed modules and protocols At the box or stack prompt choose a slot number and connector number from the configuration For example type box serial slot 2 connector 1 OR box serial 2 1 The prompt changes to serial 2 1 Refer to the appropriate chapter for instruction
190. ch line type For ESF lines you can also set the FDL mode See Setting the FDL Mode for ESF Line Types later in this chapter For more information on these frame formats see Setting the T1 Frame Type in Chapter 6 Using the BCC To change the line type navigate to the mct1 prompt for example box mct1 1 1 and type port line framing variable For example mct1 1 14 port line framing sf Using Site Manager See the Line Type parameter on page A 30 for information 7 18 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring MCE1 and MCT1 Services Setting the MCT1 Line Coding T1 uses bipolar format for signals In bipolar format alternating positive and negative pulses on the digital line signify the number 1 and the absence of a pulse signifies 0 see Figure 6 2 in Chapter 6 A long string of zeros would cause the line to lose synchronization due to lack of pulses Nortel Networks provides a line coding mechanism to maintain synchronization By default the MCT1 interface uses bipolar with 8 zero substitution B8ZS line coding You can select AMI line coding instead B8ZS line coding replaces a block of eight consecutive binary Os with an 8 bit B8ZS code For more information on B8ZS line coding see Enabling or Disabling Bipolar with 8 Zero Substitution B8ZS in Chapter 6 AMI line coding is also bipolar a binary 0 is transmitted as zero volts and a binary is transmitted as either a positive or negative pulse o
191. chanical interface The data link layer defines the procedures for transferring data accurately and reliably across the physical layer This chapter contains the following sections Section Page What s the Default Configuration 1 2 Summary of WAN Line Configuration Services 12 Starting the Configuration Tools 1 3 Accessing Line Parameters 1 4 308648 14 00 Rev 00 1 1 Configuring WAN Line Services What s the Default Configuration With the exception of multichannel circuits MCE1 and MCT1 router software automatically sets default values for line service parameters when you add a network circuit Line defaults are suitable for most networks however you can use the BCC or Site Manager to customize these settings based on your network composition and requirements Summary of WAN Line Configuration Services After completing a basic configuration you can use this guide to customize line services as defined in the following table A check mark v indicates whether you can perform a task using the tool named at the top of the column WAN Line Services Configuration Tasks Task BCC Site Manager Configuring synchronous and LAPB services v V Configuring BayStack AN and ANH asynchronous y services Configuring BayStack DSU CSU services 4 V Configuring HSSI services 4 V Configuring E1 and T1 services 4 Configuring MCE1 and MCT1 services M J Configuring FT1 servi
192. cription of all Site Manager parameters for asynchronous line see Appendix A Site Manager Parameters 308648 14 00 Rev 00 3 1 Configuring WAN Line Services See Chapter 1 for information about accessing the Edit ASYNC Parameters window Use the window s scroll bar to view all of the asynchronous line parameters Edit ASYNC Parameters Enable MTU Start Protocol Remote IP Addr Remote Port Local Port Baud Rate Idle Timer Receive Window TCP KeepAlive Cancel OK Values Eres ENABLE 1000 ANSWER 0 0 0 0 7 Figure 3 1 Edit ASYNC Parameters Window Enabling or Disabling the Asynchronous Driver The router enables asynchronous line services when you add the asynchronous WAN protocol on AN and ANH COM2 circuits You can disable and reenable the interface without moving any cables See the Enable parameter on page A 2 for information 3 2 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring BayStack AN and ANH Asynchronous Services Setting the MTU The largest packet size that this interface can transmit over TCP is the maximum transmission unit MTU By default the MTU is 1000 bytes Set the MTU from 3 to 1580 bytes See the MTU parameter on page A 2 for information Specifying the TCP Start Protocol There are three options for the TCP start protocol e Answer Advises local TCP to wait for a connection request e Loop Tests the asynchronous cable e Originate Advises l
193. ct ID BofL COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit SYNC Parameters Enable Enable Disable Enables the transmission of proprietary BofL messages over a point to point connection between the local router and a remote peer Set to Enable or Disable depending on whether you want to transmit BofL messages over this synchronous interface If you enable BofL locally the remote peer must also be configured to enable BofL Nortel Networks recommends that you enable BofL for point to point connections between Nortel Networks peers However if such a connection is established through a wide area transport service such as frame relay X 25 or SMDS you must disable BofL 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 7 BofL Timeout COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit SYNC Parameters 5 seconds 1 to 60 seconds Specifies the time between transmissions of BofL messages from this synchronous interface Timeout will occur if five periods elapse without both a successful frame transmission and a successful reception When timeout occurs the router disables and reenables the synchronous line For example if you set this parameter to 5 seconds the interface must successfully transmit and receive a frame within 25 seconds Timeout occurs in 25 seconds This parameter is valid only if you set the BofL parameter to Enable Accept the default 5 seconds or specify a new value 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 8 A 70 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default
194. ction Open Shortest Path First protocol Physical Connection Management FDDI protocol data unit physical layer physical layer media dependent FDDI Point to Point Protocol Post Telephone and Telegraph Nortel Networks Quad Port Multichannel T1 link module Ring Management FDDI receiver ready 308648 14 00 Rev 00 xxxvii Configuring WAN Line Services RTS request to send SCC serial communications controller SDLC synchronous data link control SF superframe format SMDS switched multimegabit data service SMT Station Management FDDI SNMP Simple Network Management Protocol STP shielded twisted pair TCP IP Transmission Control Protocol Internet Protocol Telnet Telecommunication network TFTP Trivial File Transfer Protocol TPE twisted pair Ethernet UTP unshielded twisted pair WAN wide area network Hard Copy Technical Manuals You can print selected technical manuals and release notes free directly from the Internet Go to support baynetworks com library tpubs Find the product for which you need documentation Then locate the specific category and model or version for your hardware or software product Using Adobe Acrobat Reader you can open the manuals and release notes search for the sections you need and print them on most standard printers You can download Acrobat Reader free from the Adobe Systems Web site www adobe com You can purchase selected documentation sets CDs and technical publications t
195. cts to the KG84A device s synchronous signal to initiate KG84A resynchronization When the router needs to initiate KG84A resynchronization it changes the value of the synchronous signal from low to high This parameter specifies the number of milliseconds that the synchronous signal retains its high value Accept the default 10 milliseconds or select one of the valid options Be sure to set the RTS Enable parameter to Enable 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 70 Sync Polling COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit SYNC Parameters Disable Enable Disable Indicates whether the data set ready DSR signal will be monitored If you set this parameter to Enable the synchronous driver will be enabled when the DSR signal is detected When the DSR signal is no longer detected the driver will be disabled Enable this parameter only if you will be using dial up services Accept the default or set this parameter to Enable 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 76 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Hold Down Time COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit SYNC Parameters 0 seconds 0 to 9999 seconds Specifies the time that the router waits before bringing up this line when using dial services This dela
196. cuit 2 Click on Edit DSU CSU The Edit Adapter Module DSU CSU Parameters window opens 3 Edit the V 54 Loopback and V 54 Timer parameters Click on Help or see the parameter descriptions beginning on page A 9 4 Click on OK Selecting a loopback test state disrupts user data transmission through the DSU CSU for a period specified by the V 54 Timer parameter Configuring the V 54 Loopback Timer You must set the duration in seconds for the loopback testing specified in the V 54 Loopback parameter The default value zero 0 indicates that loopback testing runs indefinitely Caution If the only connection with the remote router is through the DSU CSU be sure to specify a nonzero value since loopback testing prevents the local router from communicating with the remote DSU CSU 308648 14 00 Rev 00 4 9 Configuring WAN Line Services Specify the number of seconds from 1 to 255 for loopback testing to run or keep the default 0 Using the BCC To change the V 54 loopback timer navigate to the dsucsu prompt for example box dsucsu 1 1 and type loopback test timer variable For example dsucsu 1 1 loopback test timer 2 Using Site Manager See the V 54 Timer parameter on page A 10 for information Loopback Test Modes You can activate DSU CSU tests using the BCC or Site Manager as described in the previous section Configuring V 54 Loopback Tests The DSU CSU modul
197. d Random Function Specifies how this multiline circuit distributes outbound traffic over its data paths Instructions Select Address Based if the router always uses the same data path to send traffic between the same source and destination address This method ensures that packets arrive in the correct sequence Select Random if the router assigns a set of numbers to each data path The router then generates a random number for each outbound packet and assigns the packet to the data path with the matching number This method ensures even distribution of traffic among the data paths in a multiline circuit but does not ensure that packets arrive in the correct sequence MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 4 1 1 23 308648 14 00 Rev 00 A 91 Appendix B BCC show Commands Use the BCC show command to display configuration and statistical information about WAN line services Online Help You can display a list of available command options by entering show or show lt option gt without additional options or with a question mark as an option For example entering show or show dsu at the BCC prompt displays the list of all show or show dsu keyword subcommand options Commands for DSU CSU Services The show dsucsu lt container gt commands display status and statistical information about DSU CSU drivers Table B 1 lists all of the dsucsu show commands The filter flags and filter arguments are options that you can use with each
198. d Y and C and Z 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring Synchronous Services m C f m mu 7 B ag Y ii N __ circul __ io N C pz t L3 LS0016A Figure 2 1 Satellite Broadcast Sample Topology Conventional addressing designates routers A B and C as DCE address 01 and routers X Y and Z as DTE address 03 If router A transmits a frame across the virtual point to point circuit to X X the intended recipient Y and Z all monitor the satellite broadcast Because X Y and Z all perceive a properly addressed frame all three accept delivery and attempt to process the frame contents with unpredictable results To avoid such confusion assign unique addresses to each end of a point to point circuit using the Local Address and Remote Address parameters Be sure to reverse the local and remote addresses when you configure the other end of the point to point circuit 308648 14 00 Rev 00 2 15 Configuring WAN Line Services Local Address The local interface receives only frames whose HDLC addresses match the Local Address parameter Using the BCC To specify a local address navigate to the serial prompt for example box serial 2 1 and type local address variable For example serial 2 1 local address 3 Using Site Manager See the Local Address parameter on page A 77 for information Remote Address The rout
199. d synchronous lines share the same encapsulation method so you can group any of these lines to form a multiline circuit as long as they share the same bandwidth and MTU To add a physical synchronous line to an existing circuit on which you have configured protocols complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 Start at the Configuration Manager window 2 Click on the connector of the circuit to The Edit Connector window opens which you are adding lines continued 308648 14 00 Rev 00 10 7 Configuring WAN Line Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this 3 Click on Edit Circuit System responds The Circuit Definition window opens Fl 10 4 4 Click on the connectors you are adding to the circuit Site Manager highlights the connectors you choose For example Figure 10 illustrates the addition of COM2 to iha circuit S42 which already uses connectors COM3 and COM4 5 Choose Eines gt Change Lines gure If you want to change the traffic distribution method go to Changing the Traffic Distribution Method later in this chapter The lines now form one circuit The default traffic distribution method is based on the address 6 Choose File Exit to exit the Circuit Definition window SI timuit Definition Configuration Mode local SNMP Agent LOCAL FILE Protocols Slot Lines T
200. des no support for either the DS1 or DS3 MIB Rather the external DCE for example a DL3200 SMDS CSU DSU from Digital Link may provide MIB support Using the BCC To select a MIB navigate to the hssi prompt for example box hssi 2 1 and type media variable For example hssi 2 1 media dsone hssi 2 1 media dsthree Using Site Manager See the Transmission Interface parameter on page A 15 for information Setting the External Clock Speed The HSSI specification requires that the DCE provide a transmit clock that times data transfer across the DTE DCE interface The External Clock Speed parameter specifies the bandwidth that the HSSI channel provides The External Clock Speed value does not affect hardware initialization Certain routing protocols use this parameter value for route selection You can set the external clock speed to a rate from 307200 to 52638515 bytes Select a value equal or close to the data transmission rate across the HSSI By default the HSSI clock rate is 46359642 44 736 MB s 5 6 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring HSSI Services Using the BCC To set external clock speed navigate to the hssi prompt for example box hssi 2 1 and type external clock speed integer For example hssi 2 1 external clock speed 46359642 Using Site Manager See the External Clock Speed parameter on page A 15 for information Setting the CRC Size The CRC Size parameter specifies an error detection
201. devices over the frame relay network Enable specifies NRZI line encoding to communicate such state changes If you are configuring the router connection to the host side and the NRZI settings of the host and CPE match use the Disable setting If they do not match set this parameter to Enable If you are configuring the router connection to the remote access side and the NRZI settings of the controller and CPE match use the Disable setting If they do not match set this parameter to Enable 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 6 1 66 A 42 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters NRZI Type Configured QMCTI Connector gt MCT1 Logical Lines Mark Mark Space The software uses this parameter only if you installed a QMCT1 DSOA link module and you set the NRZI Enable parameter to Enable This parameter specifies the NRZI encoding type in the frame on the logical line The Mark format uses a O bit to indicate a state change and a 1 bit to indicate no state change the Space format uses the opposite Ignore this parameter if you set NRZI Enable to Disable Otherwise if you are configuring the router connection to The host side determine which device on that side is using NRZI and match this parameter to the encoding type used by that device The remote access side determine which device on that side is using NRZI and match this parameter to the e
202. dr 7 26 BERT Alarm Type 7 58 BERT Mode 7 58 7 65 BERT mode 7 56 7 62 BERT Test Pattern 7 59 7 65 Clear Alarm Threshold seconds 7 21 A 32 Enable Disable A 29 External Clock State 7 29 FDL Configuration 7 22 7 60 A 32 Fractional Loopback 7 65 Line Coding 7 19 Line Type 7 18 7 59 A 30 Loop Clock State 7 29 Loopback Configuration 7 24 A 33 A 60 Port Application Mode 7 4 testing the line 7 56 7 61 Primary Clock 7 6 7 27 timeslots 7 52 Relay Control 7 25 MCTI C 1 to C 2 Remote FDL HDLC Address Mode 7 23 A 32 DSX 1 7 20 7 60 Secondary Clock 7 6 7 28 Inter Frame Time Fill parameter C 2 Send Performance Measurement CR Addr 7 25 internal clocking C 2 Setup Alarm Threshold seconds 7 21 A 31 LBO C 2 Signal Level 7 20 7 61 logical line parameters Signal Level dB 7 60 A 31 BERT m A 41 testing the line 7 56 BERT Test Pattern A 41 timeslots 7 52 BofL Enable A 36 A 63 mctlel exe file C 2 BofL Enable Disable 7 40 multiline circuit BofL Timeout A 36 A 64 bandwidth on demand BOD 10 5 Circuit Name 7 35 configuring 10 11 CRC Size 7 46 A 40 A 68 Data Path Chooser parameter 10 10 Enable Disable 7 39 A 36 A 56 A 63 A 69 data paths 10 7 10 10 Fractional Loopback 7 41 A 37 Interframe Time Fill Character 7 45 A 39 Local HDLC Address 7 42 A 38 A 66 MTU Size 7 46 A 40 A 64 NRZI Enable 7 34 NRZI Encoding 7 32 grouping data paths 10 2 overview 10 1 paramet
203. ds Using Site Manager See the Max T2 Acknowledge Timer parameter on page A 21 for information 308648 14 00 Rev 00 2 39 Configuring WAN Line Services Setting the Maximum T3 Disconnect Timer The Max T3 Disconnect Timer specifies the time in seconds that the router waits before determining that the link is disconnected By default this timer is set to 60 seconds A value of 1 indicates that once the router completes the frame exchange to bring down the link it considers the link disconnected Set the amount of time that you want the router to wait before it decides that the link is disconnected to a value from 1 to 9999 seconds Using Site Manager See the Max T3 Disconnect Timer parameter on page A 21 for information Setting the Link Setup Action The Initiate Link Setup Action parameter identifies whether the router initiates link setup or waits for the network to initiate link setup Select Active if you want the router to initiate link setup or select Passive if you want the network to initiate link setup Link setup is active by default Set the Initiate Link Setup Action parameter to Active or Passive Using Site Manager See the Initiate Link Setup Action parameter on page A 22 for information Enabling or Disabling Test Exchange Identification XID Frames The Enable Rx Tx of XID Frames parameter enables or disables the transmission and reception of test XID frames by the router Select Enable to all
204. dth for this type of traffic To do so specify Edit for the Line Resources parameter in Site Manager which provides access to the Resource Manager Using Site Manager See the Line Resources parameter on page A 56 for information Testing FT1 Lines The following sections describe how to test FT1 link module interfaces using Site Manager e About the Tests e Setting Port Test Parameters e Running Port Tests About the Tests You can use Site Manager to trigger port actions to test the quality of FT1 connections The tests you can run perform the following actions e Transmit specific codes to the remote end of the FT1 connection e Introduce deliberate error patterns into the port BERT bit stream e Introduce deliberate error patterns into a logical line s BERT bit stream Note All test actions are port specific For example a BERT reset action resets all port specific series of BERT counters BERT statistics show the results of your test actions You can view BERT statistics using the Site Manger Statistics Manager utility For information about the Statistics Manager see Configuring and Managing Routers with Site Manager 308648 14 00 Rev 00 8 35 Configuring WAN Line Services Setting Port Test Parameters Table 8 13 lists the configuration tasks described in this section Table 8 13 Port Test Configuration Tasks Configuration Task Page Enabling or Disabling BERT
205. e Number assigned to this line Number of erroneous seconds Number of severely erroneous seconds Number of severely erroneous framing seconds encountered by a DS1 interface in the current 15 minute interval Number of unavailable seconds Number of controlled slip seconds CSS encountered by a DS1 interface in the current 15 minute interval Number of path coding violations PVC encountered by a DS1 interface in the current 15 minute interval Number of line erroneous seconds LES encountered by a DS1 interface in the current 15 minute interval Number of bursty erroneous seconds BESs encountered by a DS1 interface in the current 15 minute interval Number of degraded minutes DMs encountered by a DS1 interface in the current 15 minute interval Number of line code violations LCVs encountered by a DS1 interface in the current 15 minute interval 308648 14 00 Rev 00 B 19 Configuring WAN Line Services show ft1e1 framer The show ft1e1 framer command The output contains the following information Slot Connector Num Vid Intv Bipolar Violation Counts CRC 4 Error Counts FarEnd Block Errors Loss of Frame Failures Loss of Signal Failures Alarm Indicat Failures Remote Alarm Failures show ft1e1 port Name of the physical interface Number of valid intervals Number of bipolar violations Number of CRC4 errors Number of far end block errors Number of loss of frame failures
206. e external clock speed For example logical line boston external clock speed current value 64102 Testing FE1 Lines The following sections describe how to use the Configuration Manager to test FE1 link module interfaces Section Page About the Tests 9 26 Setting Port Test Parameters 9 27 Running Port Tests 9 29 308648 14 00 Rev 00 9 25 Configuring WAN Line Services About the Tests You can use the Configuration Manager in dynamic mode to trigger port actions to test the quality of FE1 connections The tests perform the following actions e Transmit specific codes to the remote end of the FEI connection Introduce deliberate error patterns into the port BERT bit stream Note All test actions are port specific For example a BERT reset action resets all port specific series of BERT counters BERT statistics show the results of your test actions You can view BERT statistics using the Statistics Manager utility For information about the Statistics Manager see Configuring and Managing Routers with Site Manager 9 26 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Setting Port Test Parameters Configuring FE1 Services To set the port test parameters complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In dynamic mode click on a configured FE1 connector in the Configuration Manager window 2 Click on Port Details The Adapter Module FE1 Lo
207. e also responds to CCITT V 54 loop up and loop down codes The following sections describe the supported tests Section Page Digital Loopback DL 4 11 Remote Digital Loopback RL 4 11 Local Analog Loopback AL 4 12 Pattern 2047 BERT Test 4 13 Telco Activated Loopback 4 13 4 10 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring BayStack DSU CSU Services Digital Loopback DL Digital Loopback mode tests the local DSU CSU and the Telco circuit The DSU CSU enters Digital Loopback mode when it receives a CCITT V 54 loop up code or when configured In Digital Loopback mode the DSU CSU takes transmit data and converts it to receive data The DSU CSU retimes and reshapes the received data then transmits the data back to the network The remote facility transmits back to the router all data it receives from the router Figure 4 1 illustrates the operation of a Digital Loopback test e Em AN ANH ARN Network 1 gt LS0025A Figure 4 1 Digital Loopback Remote Digital Loopback RL Remote Digital Loopback CCITT V 54 Loopback tests the local DSU CSU the Telco circuit and the remote DSU CSU The local DSU CSU sends a V 54 loop up code to the remote DSU CSU to initiate a digital loop and then sends a test pattern through the loop to check for returned data errors When the remote DSU CSU receives the V 54 loop up code it provides the loopback path shown in Figure 4 2 3086
208. e default value of all ones Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 41 Configuring Fractional Loopback Requests To configure channel based loopback testing on a QMCTI or QMCTI w DSOA logical line only enable one of the following fractional loopback modes Table 7 23 Fractional Loopback Options Site Manager Option Description Accept Fractional Loopback Code Enables the logical line to send ANSI standard FT1 loopback codes Fractional Loopback Enables the logical line to send SNMP based logical line loopback codes See the Accept Fractional Loopback Code parameter on page A 42 and the Fractional Loopback parameter on page A 37 for information 308648 14 00 Rev 00 7 65 Configuring WAN Line Services Running Logical Line Tests After setting test parameters you can run the logical line tests Note Although you can run tests on only one logical line per port you can run simultaneous logical line tests on other ports on the DMCT1 or QMCTI module To test a logical line on a DMCTI QMCTI or QMCTI w DSOA port complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 Start at the QMCT1 or DMCT1 Logical Line Actions window 2 Select the logical line you want to test 3 Click on the appropriate Send command Table 7 24 describes the BERT send commands for logical lines Table 7 25 describes the fractional l
209. e 48 bit address stored in the link module number PROM for this connector WAN protocol enabled on this interface Current operating state of the DSU CSU card Number of errors for a specific circuit Maximum transfer unit size the buffer size for the DSU CSU port also the largest frame that can be transmitted or received across the DSU CSU port The value ranges from 3 to 4608 bytes The show dsucsu detail command displays detailed configuration and statistical information This command allows for the following command filters flags and filter arguments circuit lt circuit_name gt Displays information about the specified circuit only Slot lt s ot gt lt circuit_name gt Displays information about the specified slot only Displays information about the specified circuit only 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring WAN Line Services The output contains the following information Name Number Slot Connector Admin State Operational State Total Time Up Down MAC Address MTU WAN Protocol Local Address Remote Address BofL BofL TMO Receive Bytes Receive Frames Name of the circuit associated with this line Number of the circuit associated with this line Name of the physical interface Configured state of the DSU CSU module Current operating state of the DSU CSU card If the line is not up Operational State does not equal Up then three dashes appear If the line is up Oper
210. e BCC or Gm MEISTE TIE MN MN T A TE DT 2 2 Enabling or Disabling Synchronous Services TNR E T 2 4 Lemno ne BOG ariin PUN 2 4 Using Ste Manager soucis cixiak eue gina ecc i aa a RUE RRi 2 4 Enabling or Disabling Both Messages scissioni 2 5 Lamo Te BOG M 2 5 Using Site Manager eimai T T TA T T rniii 2 5 Sening he BOL TINEO seiri a penny r emer ee a 2 6 Usma DE EOC sima ginan E E 2 6 Weng Site Manager serana N 2 6 308648 14 00 Rev 00 V pe ICL rrr ue 2 6 Using the BCC aian AT PEAT rere ere TAT T a P 9 2 7 Uenig Sie Manage m U 2 7 Enabling or Disabling Remote Address Filtering sseseessssss 2 7 Using he BOG sc ssasanectascceasseoiaaanactasseanes UR 2 7 Leib aite Margi eieepsggca per ipa doaopra Rake adea Obat eot o oor 2 7 Coniguing CI dust MEN OL 2 8 Seting Th NOG DUO aset sicot ise enti Sanaa tarda ckesbbtie EEN 2 8 Setting the Inteinal Clock Sped iue oc des inicia b RR P pied eu b Drug 2 9 Setting the External Glock Spoed Lii ise eret ieiuna uel kein usn rueda dS 2 10 Seting rp E nppa ed RE 2 10 Uema TE BOC nensis AEE TRO 2 11 Using Site Manager m T Pere onai PRAT beg stag scenes n 2 11 Enabling er Disabling RTS Signals 12er oec E i CER eaten 2 11 Jna PE 20 aie eee ee abt edi Lupa iesu etit e ani renters La Lau d upESR SO T 2 11 eee le 2 11 Enabling er Disabling Burst
211. e CRC size navigate to the serial prompt for example box serial 2 1 and type crc size variable For example serial 2 14 crc size crc16bit serial 2 1 crc size crc32bit Using Site Manager See the CRC Size parameter on page A 79 for information Setting the Signaling Method You can specify the signaling method that the router uses for this line using the Sync Media Type parameter Available media types are as follows e Default TI El e RAISEDTR e V25BIS SDN BRI e I SDNLEASEDLINE HAYES 308648 14 00 Rev 00 2 19 Configuring WAN Line Services Using the BCC To set the media type navigate to the serial prompt for example box serial 2 1 and type media type variable For example serial 2 1 media type t1 Using Site Manager See the Sync Media Type parameter on page A 80 for information Enabling or Disabling DSR Polling By default a synchronous interface does not monitor the data set ready DSR signal If you set this parameter to Enable the synchronous driver is enabled when the DSR is detected When the DSR is no longer detected the driver is disabled Enable this parameter only if you plan to use dial up services Enable or disable synchronous polling of DSR for the interface Using Site Manager See the Sync Polling parameter on page A 82 for information 2 20 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring Synchronous Services Setting the Line Coding On AN ASN or Syst
212. e Configured WAN Protocol ssssssssssseeseeeeeeee nnne 9 21 Setting the CRC Size UT T AT E enemies I 9 21 Setting Synchronous Line Coding LG CR REOR HERR APO EE RAPID E E 9 21 Enabling or Disabling Extended Addressing cc cccssccccsscceesseccsseeeessseeeeseees 9 22 Enabling or Disabling Remote Loopback Detection sss 9 23 Edino piri eneate 9 23 Assigning Timeslots E eae issus ee ebbb ocio tin Let Died enna nics 9 23 Setting FE1 Line Priority E E A E E A E T 9 24 XX 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Setting the Hold Down Interval 2 terrain tnn tret acia 9 25 Viewing the External Clock Speed sse 9 25 Tsing FET LIMO m 9 25 Ppt DEE E RET NE tere D tr 9 26 elie Pert Test ParatitslBle ss cccccasiwsssconoparcesessavaasscmmdareracaiaaantoeaccensemmialeoneniead 9 27 Enabling or Disabling BERT MOGE ciccccscpcsceaieiesscominecornenceendeeramencantonmbecainans 9 28 Seting The BERT Alami YPE uissussasinsacbimiederkke pog dau bibi a diri tcrra pea 9 28 Setting the BERT Test Pattern TET opet Giran aoee ects eer 9 28 Seating the Eine Coding Method 1 5 acc ebat o esed dere a bo 9 28 Seina the Line TPE e E 9 28 Punning Pori TESTS snoren 9 29 Defining FE1 Port Line Testing Using the BCC ssssseseeeeeeeee 9 30 Setting the Error Insert Value aM T TT ratiem boki
213. e FE1 Port Parameters Disable Enable Disable Specifies whether the international bit is set in the E1 frame Select Enable to set the international bit select Disable to disable it 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 3 1 15 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring WAN Line Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Primary Clock FE1 Connector gt Adapter Module FE1 Logical Lines gt Port Details gt Edit Adapter Module FE1 Port Parameters For QMCT1 Internal For FE1 Port 1 Ext Loop For QMCT1 Internal Port 1 Ext Loop Port 2 Ext Loop Port 3 Ext Loop Port 4 Ext Loop Auxiliary Ext For FE1 Internal Port 1 Ext Loop Identifies the primary source of the timing signals Internal Uses the clock chip on the link module Port n Ext Loop Uses the signal coming from Port n Auxiliary Ext Uses an external source via the DB9 interface Select Internal to use the clock chip on the link or net module Select Port 1 Ext Loop to use the signal coming from port 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 18 1 3 Secondary Clock FE1 Connector gt Adapter Module FE1 Logical Lines gt Port Details gt Edit Adapter Module FE1 Port Parameters For QMCT1 Internal For FE1 Internal Internal Port 1 Ext Loop Identifies the secondary source of the timing signals The router uses the secondary clock only
214. e is no data to transmit on a synchronous line There are two IFTF patterns e HDLC Flags an Ox7E pattern 0 11 1 1 110 e Idles anOxFF pattern 11 1111 1 1 2 30 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring Synchronous Services HDLC Flags is the default IFTF pattern for all synchronous media types except ISDN BRI For ISDN BRI the default pattern is Idles To use these defaults leave the Sync Force IFTF parameter set to Default Or you can override the defaults by setting this parameter to Force Flags or Force Idles For a dial on demand interface set the Sync Force IFTF parameter to Force Idles Using Site Manager See the Sync Force IFTF parameter on page A 85 for information Configuring Asynchronous Services The implementation of asynchronous services differs among Nortel Networks routers On Octal Sync link modules all synchronous net modules and BayStack router COM ports you can configure asynchronous communication from the Edit SYNC Parameters window by e Setting the WAN Serial Interface Type e Setting the Asynchronous Baud Rate For all other synchronous link modules these parameters are not available See Chapter 3 for information about additional asynchronous services on BayStack AN and ANH routers Setting the WAN Serial Interface Type The serial interface is set for synchronous operation by default Set this parameter to Async to select asynchronous communication set it to Pasync for polled asynchronous com
215. e or disable BERT mode on individual logical lines Using Site Manager See the Bert mode parameter on page A 54 for information Setting the BERT Alarm Type You can specify the type of alarm signal to be generated while in BERT mode or disable the generation of alarm signals altogether Table 8 14 lists the alarm signal options Table 8 14 BERT Alarm Type Options Option Description AIS Transmits Blue alarms all ones Yellow Transmits Yellow alarms all zeros Disable Disables the generation of alarm signals Using Site Manager See the BERT alarm type parameter on page A 54 for information Setting the BERT Test Pattern When a port is in BERT mode it can generate patterns such as all ones the default all zeros or a QRSS pattern Using Site Manager See the BERT test pattern parameter on page A 54 for more information 308648 14 00 Rev 00 8 37 Configuring WAN Line Services Setting the Line Coding Method T1 uses bipolar format for signals In bipolar format alternating positive and negative pulses on the digital line signify the number 1 and the absence of a pulse signifies 0 see Figure 6 2 A long string of zeros causes the line to lose synchronization due to lack of pulses Nortel Networks provides a line coding mechanism to maintain synchronization Table 8 15 lists the line coding options Table 8 15 FT1 Line Coding Options Option Description B8ZS The default bipola
216. e remote loopback detection navigate to the logical line prompt for example box fe1 1 1 logical line boston and type remote loopback detection variable For example logical line boston remote loopback detection enabled logical line boston remote loopback detection disabled Using Site Manager See the Remote Loopback Detection parameter on page A 69 for information Editing Line Resources If you run ST2 traffic on this logical line you can reserve bandwidth for this type of traffic To do so specify Edit for the Line Resources parameter in Site Manager which provides access to the Resource Manager Using Site Manager See the Line Resources parameter on page A 69 for information Assigning Timeslots After configuring logical lines you configure channels DSOs of bandwidth by grouping 1 to 31 contiguous or noncontiguous DSO timeslots per DS1 frame Using the BCC To assign a timeslot to a logical line navigate to the logical line prompt for example box fe1 1 1 logical line boston and type time slots integer 308648 14 00 Rev 00 9 23 Configuring WAN Line Services For example logical line boston time slots 1 To assign multiple timeslots to a logical line type logical line boston time slots 1 2 3 4 10 Using Site Manager To assign a timeslot to a logical line complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 Display the Adapter
217. e slot s receive queues for all active logical lines You can set this parameter from 0 to 512 A value of zero causes the router to use its default values Note This parameter is not supported on the ASN 308648 14 00 Rev 00 7 15 Configuring WAN Line Services Using the BCC To set this parameter navigate to the mcel prompt for example box mce1 1 1 and type receive buffer use credits integer For example mcel 1 1 receive buffer use credits 420 Customizing MCT1 Port Parameters The MCT1 port parameters apply to each of the DSO channels timeslots provided by an MCT1 port connector Table 7 4 lists the MCEI configuration tasks described in this section and indicates whether you can use the BCC or Site Manager to perform each task Table 7 4 MCE1 Port Configuration Tasks Task BCC Site Manager Page Enabling or Disabling the MCT1 Port V V 7 17 Setting the MCT1 Line Type V V 7 18 Setting the MCT1 Line Coding 4 4 7 19 Setting the Signal Level V V 7 20 Setting the Alarm Threshold Time V V 21 Setting the Alarm Threshold Clear Time 4 4 7 21 Setting the EDL Mode for ESF Line Types V V T22 Setting the Remote FDL HDLC Address Mode V V F23 Accepting or Rejecting Port Loopback Requests V V 7 23 Setting a Loopback Configuration V V 7 24 Setting Relay Control V 7 25 Setting the Source of Send Performance M
218. e the local and remote MAC addresses at the remote synchronous pass through interface When assigning addresses use any unique MAC address of exactly 12 hexadecimal digits Make sure that the second digit in the address is a zero for example 10fffabc5432 308648 14 00 Rev 00 2 17 Configuring WAN Line Services Setting the Pass Thru Remote Address Using the BCC To set the pass thru remote address navigate to the serial prompt for example box serial 2 1 and type passthru remote mac address For example serial 2 1 passthru remote 10fffabc5431 Using Site Manager See the Pass Thru Remote Address parameter on page A 79 for information Setting the Pass Thru Local Address Using the BCC To set the pass thru local address navigate to the serial prompt for example box serial 2 1 and type passthru local mac address For example serial 2 1 passthru local 10fffabc5432 Using Site Manager See the Pass Thru Local Address parameter on page A 78 for information 2 18 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring Synchronous Services Setting the CRC Size The cyclic redundancy check CRC size specifies an error detection scheme You can choose either 16 bit standard ITU T or 32 bit extended frame check sequence FCS to detect errors in the packet Set a CRC size for the interface The local and remote ends of the synchronous connection must be configured for the same CRC size Using the BCC To set th
219. eceive clock signals Instructions Click on Values and select one of the following DTE loopback settings e No Loopback Prevents the DTE from sending loopback signals to the DCE Local Digital Loop A Allows the DTE to check the DTE DCE interface In a Loop A test the DTE transmission is returned to the DTE on the received local DCE data circuit The CA LED DCE Ready must be on Local Line Loop B Allows the DTE to check the DTE DCE interface and the transmit and receive sections of the local DCE In a Loop B test the output of the transmit section of the DCE is returned to the receive section of the DCE The CA LED DCE Ready must be on Remote Line Loop C Allows the DTE to check the functions of the transmission path to the remote DCE interface MIB Object ID 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 7 1 67 308648 14 00 Rev 00 A 17 Configuring WAN Line Services LAPB Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID When you edit an Octal Sync link module line or any synchronous line on Nortel Networks AN ANH ARN or ASN routers the router automatically configures the LAPB protocol if you configure a circuit for the X 25 protocol The Edit SYNC Parameters window for these lines includes an additional button for editing LAPB parameters Enable COM Connector for X 25 Interface gt Edit L
220. ed of the modem 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 110 A 86 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Pasync Parity Type COM Connector gt Edit Line gt AOT gt Edit SYNC Parameters Even Odd Even High Low None Sets the error detection method for isolating altered or damaged AOT packets during transmission Asynchronous equipment typically adds a parity bit to the end of a packet before transmission This allows the receiving router to detect a transmission error if it receives a packet with an unexpected parity Click on Values and select a value that is appropriate for your network Odd Even High 1 Low 0 or None 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 116 Pasync Data Bits COM Connector gt Edit Line gt AOT gt Edit SYNC Parameters Eight Five Six Seven Eight Sets the length of a polled AOT packet to a specific number of data bits Click on Values and select a value that is appropriate for your network 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 117 Pasync Stop Bits COM Connector gt Edit Line gt AOT gt Edit SYNC Parameters Two One Two Sets the interval at the end of a transmitted polled AOT packet allowing the receiving router to pause before accepting the next packet More s
221. edia Select On or Off 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 8 1 40 308648 14 00 Rev 00 A 23 Configuring WAN Line Services MCE 1 Port Application and Clock Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Port Application Mode Unconfigured MCE1 Connector gt Port Application NONPRI NONPRI PRI Specifies the port application to use on the logical lines Select NONPRI to indicate that all of the lines have a permanent circuit number and are for leased lines frame relay or permanent connections to other non ISDN PRI applications Select PRI to indicate that the lines are for switched circuits using ISDN The 120 ohm MCEI II link module supports ISDN PRI MCE1 net modules support only non PRI applications 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 1 16 Primary Clock MCE1 CLOCK Connector gt Edit Slot gt DS1 E1 Clock Parameters Port 1 Ext Loop Internal Port 1 Ext Loop Port 2 Ext Loop Auxiliary Ext Identifies the primary source of the timing signals Select Internal to use the clock chip on the link or net module Select Port 1 Ext Loop to use the signal coming from port 1 Select Port 2 Ext Loop to use the signal coming from port 2 Dual Port MCEI only Select Auxiliary Ext to use an external source via BNC connectors 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 1 1 4 A 24 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Paramete
222. een Nortel Networks peers However if such a connection is accomplished through a wide area transport service such as Frame Relay X 25 or SMDS you must disable BofL 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 7 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring WAN Line Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID BofL Timeout Configured FE1 Connector gt Adapter Module FE1 Logical Lines 5 seconds 1 to 60 seconds Specifies the time between transmissions of Breath of Life messages from this synchronous interface Timeout will occur if five periods elapse without both a successful frame transmission and a successful reception When timeout occurs the synchronous line will be disabled and re enabled automatically For example if you set this parameter to 5 seconds then the interface must successfully transmit and receive a frame within 25 seconds Timeout occurs in 25 seconds This parameter is valid only if BofL is set to Enable Either accept the default 5 seconds or specify a new value 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 8 MTU Size bytes Configured FE1 Connector gt Adapter Module FE1 Logical Lines 1600 bytes 3 to 4608 bytes Specifies the largest frame Maximum Transmission Unit that the router can transmit on this line Set this parameter to a value appropriate for your network For X 25 use a value at least 5 bytes more t
223. eived without error Average packet size number of bytes divided by number of frames received without error Number of octets transmitted without error Number of frames transmitted without error Average packet size number of bytes divided by number of frames transmitted without error Total number of errors received Total number of errors transmitted Number of packets received without error Number of packets transmitted without error Protocols configured on this interface 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Receive Errors BCC show Commands The output contains the following information Bad Frames Runt Frames Frame Rejects Frames Too Long Overflow Frames Transmit Errors Number of bad receive frames caused by Frame Check Sequence FCS errors or nonoctet aligned errors Number of runt frames received on this line Number of frame reject errors received on this line Number of frames received on this line that exceed the MTU Number of overflow frames received on this line in which the device s FIFO buffer overflowed before obtaining the next DMA cycle No buffer resources are available The output contains the following information Underflow Frames System Errors Number of retransmission underflow errors These occur when the device s FIFO buffer empties before the device obtains the next DMA request The output contains the following information Receive Rejects Transmit Rejects T1 Time
224. els per DS1 frame over leased point to point links with a line rate from 64 Kb s to 2 048 Mb s in 64 Kb increments For framed E1 an FE1 interface can transmit or receive up to 31 DSO channels per DS1 frame over leased point to point links with a line rate between 64 Kb s and 2 048 Mb s in 64 Kb increments All FEI modules include an integrated DSU CSU for direct connection to an E1 network The interfaces provide integrated support for loopback testing and bit error rate test BERT line testing 308648 14 00 Rev 00 9 1 Configuring WAN Line Services Configuring FE1 Services You can configure an FE1 port using the BCC or Site Manager Note The default serial line configuration is appropriate in most cases See Chapter 2 for information about changing the default serial line parameters Configuring an FE1 Port Using the BCC To configure FE1 services navigate to the box prompt and type box fei slot 1 connector 1 OR box fe1 1 1 This command configures FE1 services on slot 1 connector 1 Setting the External Clock State In the BCC the External Clock State parameter enables or disables external clock use External clock use is enabled present by default You can change this parameter to absent disabled Using the BCC To change the setting on the external clock navigate to the FE1 prompt for example box fe1 1 1 and type external clock state variable For example fel 1 14 external clock state a
225. em 5000 routers and on a router with an Octal Sync link module you can specify the line coding of the physical synchronous line to match the line coding of a device at the other end of the line Specify the line coding as follows Table 2 2 Line Coding Options BCC Option Site Manager Option Description nrz NRZ The default used for nonreturn to zero coding nrzi NRZI Used for nonreturn to zero inverted coding nrzimark NRZI Mark Used for nonreturn to zero inverted mark coding Using the BCC To set the line coding for this interface navigate to the serial prompt for example box serial 2 1 and type sync line coding variable For example serial 2 1 sync line coding nrzimark Using Site Manager See the Sync Line Coding parameter on page A 84 for information Configuring KG84A Security KG84A is a cryptographic device used to secure data transmitted over a point to point synchronous line Nortel Networks KG84A support allows the router to use the encryption services of a KG84A device In a KG84A configuration the KG84A device is usually placed between the router and a modem The KG84A device acts as the DCE for the attached router Another KG84A device must be located at the other end of the point to point connection so that encrypted data can be decrypted Figure 2 2 308648 14 00 Rev 00 2 21 Configuring WAN Line Services EL SIS l Router t Figure 2 2
226. ense network Change this parameter to SYNC TYPE C03 when you are running X 25 on the QSYNC DST or ESAF synchronous link module Set the network link level for the interface Using Site Manager See the Network Link Level parameter on page A 83 for information 2 24 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring Synchronous Services Setting the Retry Count By default the router makes 16 attempts to retransmit a frame before a line is declared down Specify the number of retransmission attempts from 1 to 64 for the interface Using Site Manager See the Retry Count parameter on page A 75 for information Setting the Link Idle Timer By default the router determines that a synchronous interface is idle after 9 seconds The router disables an idle line Set the Link Idle Timer parameter to a value from 1 to 9999 seconds Using Site Manager See the Link Idle Timer parameter on page A 75 for information Enabling or Disabling Extended Control By default the control fields of all S and I frames are 1 octet in length and I frame numbering is Modulo 8 With the Extended Control S and I frames parameter you can extend the control fields of S and I frames to 2 octets in length and numbering of all I frames to Modulo 128 Enable or disable extended control of S and I frames for the interface Using Site Manager See the Extended Control S and I frames parameter on page A 76 for information 308648 14 00 Rev 0
227. epartment of Defense or their successors whichever is applicable 6 Use of Software in the European Community This provision applies to all Software acquired for use within the European Community If Licensee uses the Software within a country in the European Community the Software Directive enacted by the Council of European Communities Directive dated 14 May 1991 will apply to the examination of the Software to facilitate interoperability Licensee agrees to notify Nortel Networks of any such intended examination of the Software and may procure support and assistance from Nortel Networks 7 Term and termination This license is effective until terminated however all of the restrictions with respect to Nortel Networks copyright in the Software and user manuals will cease being effective at the date of expiration of the Nortel Networks copyright those restrictions relating to use and disclosure of Nortel Networks confidential information shall continue in effect Licensee may terminate this license at any time The license will automatically terminate if Licensee fails to comply with any of the terms and conditions of the license Upon termination for any reason Licensee will immediately destroy or return to Nortel Networks the Software user manuals and all copies Nortel Networks is not liable to Licensee for damages in any form solely by reason of the termination of this license 8 Export and Re export Licensee agrees not to export d
228. er uses the remote address as the HDLC address for all frames transmitted by this interface Using the BCC To specify a remote address navigate to the serial prompt for example box serial 2 1 and type remote address variable For example serial 2 1 remote address 1 Using Site Manager See the Remote Address parameter on page A 78 for information 2 16 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring Synchronous Services Viewing the Configured WAN Protocol You can view the WAN protocol that is enabled on a synchronous circuit However do not change the current value Caution Changing the WAN protocol does not reconfigure the interface and could disable the interface Using the BCC To view the configured WAN protocol navigate to the serial prompt for example box serial 2 1 and type serial 2 1 wan protocol The configured WAN protocol is listed as the current value Using Site Manager See the WAN Protocol parameter on page A 79 for information Setting Pass Through Addresses You can assign a local media access control MAC address to the local interface using the Pass Thru Local Address parameter This address becomes the source address of packets that are bridged to the destination MAC address You assign the destination MAC address using the Pass Thru Remote Address parameter This address becomes the destination MAC address of packets that are bridged to the local MAC address Always revers
229. erfaces at either end of the point to point circuit For example if the remote address is DTE configure the local address as DCE If you configure X 25 on this line set this parameter to either DCE or DTE 308648 14 00 Rev 00 9 19 Configuring WAN Line Services Using the BCC To specify the local HDLC address navigate to the logical line prompt for example box fe1 1 1 logical line boston and type local address variable For example logical line boston local address addressdce Using Site Manager See the Local HDLC Address parameter on page A 66 for information Setting the Remote HDLC Address You can specify the 1 byte HDLC address of the remote FE1 interface as follows e dce e dte e An explicit address value 2 4 5 6 or 7 You must use unique HDLC addresses for the local and remote interfaces at either end of the point to point circuit For example if the local address is DTE configure the remote address as DCE If you configure X 25 on this line set this parameter to either DCE or DTE Using the BCC To specify the remote HDLC address navigate to the logical line prompt for example box fe1 1 1 logical line boston and type remote address variable For example logical line boston remote address addressdte Using Site Manager See the Remote HDLC Address parameter on page A 67 for information 9 20 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring FE1 Services Viewing the Configured W
230. erforms a 16 bit CRC on received frames You can change to 32 bit CRC where the router appends a 32 bit CRC to transmitted frames and performs a 32 bit CRC on received frames Using the BCC To set the crc size navigate to the logical line prompt for example stack mce1 1 2 1 logical line mce1 121 1 and type crc size variable For example logical line mcel 121 1 crc size crc 32 logical line mcel 121 1 cre size crc 16 Using Site Manager See the CRC Size parameter on page A 40 for information Setting the MTU Size The router uses the transmit receive buffer size MTU to configure the largest frame that the router can transmit or receive across this MCEI port The router discards frames larger than this value The MTU is 1600 bytes by default You can change it to any size from 3 to 4608 bytes for the logical line Using the BCC To set the MTU size navigate to the logical line prompt for example stack mce1 1 2 1 logical line mce1 121 1 and type mtu size integer For example logical line mcei 121 14 mtu size 3 Using Site Manager See the MTU Size parameter on page A 40 for information 7 46 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring MCE1 and MCT1 Services Enabling or Disabling Remote Loopback Detection Setting the Remote Loopback Detection parameter enables or disables detection of the driver s BofL packets on this logical line as long as the BofL parameter is enabled for this interface If
231. ers A 91 supported media 10 2 synchronous lines 10 6 10 7 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Index 5 traffic distribution methods 10 10 types 10 2 multilink feature 10 5 Multilink PPP feature 10 5 munich exe file C 2 P parameters line services defined Glossary 1 list of A 1 payload loopback 7 24 7 62 8 14 8 42 polled asynchronous parameters Pasync Baud Rate A 88 Pasync Data Bits A 87 Pasync Parity Type A 87 Pasync Stop Bits A 87 WAN Serial Interface Type A 87 port defined Glossary 1 power level T1 transmit 7 20 8 9 8 40 A 31 product support xxxix protocol prioritization HSSI 5 10 publications hard copy xxxviii Q QMCTI description 7 2 logical line parameters Accept Fractional Loopback Code A 42 Accept Perf Measurement CR Addr A 34 Primary Clock A 35 Secondary Clock A 35 Send Performance Measurement CR Addr A 34 Relay Control parameter 7 25 testing 7 48 QMCTI w DSOA See QMCTI R rate adaptation line 7 45 Index 6 S SDLC 7 30 7 34 7 44 service type 7 42 8 27 9 18 show commands BCC B 1 slot defined Glossary 1 support Nortel Networks xxxix Synchronous configuring for multiline 10 2 parameters BofL 2 5 A 70 BofL Timeout 2 6 A 70 Burst Count A 74 Cable Type 2 26 A 83 Clock Source 2 8 A 72 CRC Size 2 19 A 79 Enable A 69 Extended Address 2 27 A 68 A 76 Extended Control S and I frames 2 25 A 76 External Clock Speed 2 10 A
232. erval in seconds between BofL transmissions This parameter is valid only if BofL is set to Enable After sending a BofL message the router starts a timer that has a value equal to five times the setting of this parameter If the router does not receive a BofL message from the remote peer before the timer expires the router disables the HSSI line and then attempts to restart it Accept the default 1 second or specify a new value making sure that both ends of the point to point connection are configured with the same value 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 7 1 8 MTU HSSI Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit HSSI Parameters 4608 bytes 3 to 4608 bytes Specifies the buffer size for the HSSI interface and therefore determines the largest frame that can travel across the HSSI port Set this parameter to a value appropriate for your network 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 7 1 9 WAN Protocol HSSI Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit HSSI Parameters None Standard PassThru PPP SMDS Frame Relay ATM DXI Indicates which WAN protocol you enabled on this HSSI circuit Accept this setting Changing the protocol here will not reconfigure the interface 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 7 1 1 12 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Transmission Interface HSSI Connector gt Edit
233. ervices 308648 14 00 Rev 00 6 1 Configuring WAN Line Services Editing T1 Services The following sections describe how to edit the line parameters for a T1 interface using Site Manager Section Page Enabling or Disabling T1 Services 6 4 Setting the T1 Frame Type 6 4 Enabling or Disabling Bipolar with 8 Zero Substitution B8ZS 6 5 Specifying Line Buildout 6 6 Setting the Internal Clock Mode 6 7 Assigning Channel Functions 6 7 6 2 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring E1 and T1 Services See Chapter 1 for information about accessing the T1 Line Entry window Figure 6 1 Configuration Mode local SNMP Agent LOCAL FILE Circuit Name T1 21 Enable Enable Frame Type Disable B82S Support Enable Line Buildout Disable Clock Mode Internal Slave Manual uu ETE DER voice OE Currently Selected Idle 1 EEZ ru EC Ez 231 Sunc Details Cancel Figure 6 1 T1 Line Entry Window See Chapter 2 for information about editing synchronous line parameters by clicking on Sync Details in the T1 Line Entry window 308648 14 00 Rev 00 6 3 Configuring WAN Line Services Enabling or Disabling T1 Services The router enables T1 line services when you add the circuit You can enable or disable this interface without moving the cables See the Enable parameter on page A 88 for information Setting the T1 Frame Type T1 framing digitizes analog signal
234. ervices Setting the Line Impedance MCE1 Net Modules Only The line impedance for the ASN MCEI net module is 120 ohm by default For the ASN MCEI net module only you can change the line impedance to 75 ohm for this MCEI interface Using the BCC To change line impedance navigate to the mcel prompt for example stack mce1 1 2 1 and type line impedance variable For example mcel 1 2 1 line impedance bnc 75 ohms mce1 1 2 14 line impedance rj45 120 ohms Using Site Manager See the Line Impedance parameter on page A 27 for information Setting the FDL Loop Interframe Fill In the BCC the FDL Loop Interframe Fill parameter is set to mark by default This enables the detection of loop retention code when the remote end is in line or payload loopback When you set this parameter to loop retention the loop retention interframe time fill for the facility data link FDL is enabled after sending loop up code Using the BCC To set this parameter navigate to the mcel prompt for example stack mce1 1 2 1 and type fdl loop interframe fill variable For example mce1 1 2 14 fdl loop interframe fill loop retention 308648 14 00 Rev 00 7 13 Configuring WAN Line Services Setting Buffer Credits for MCE1 The BCC uses the Transmit Buffer Use Credits Receive Buffer Use Credits Transmit Queue Length and Receive Queue Length parameters to regulate performance of the multichannel T1 and E1 device drivers Note T
235. es Using the BCC To specify the source of send performance messages navigate to the ftl prompt for example box ft1 1 1 and type send prm cr address bit variable For example ft1 1 1 send prm cr address bit prm carrier Using Site Manager See the Send Performance Measurement CR Addr parameter on page A 49 for information Setting the Source of Accept Performance Messages On FT1 link modules specify the source from which the router accepts send performance messages by setting one of the following options Table 8 9 Accept Performance Messages Options BCC Option Site Manager Option Description prm ci Customer Inst The default indicates that the customer installation supplies the messages prm carrier Carrier Indicates that the carrier supplies the messages 308648 14 00 Rev 00 8 15 Configuring WAN Line Services Using the BCC To specify the source of accept performance messages navigate to the ftl prompt for example box ft1 1 1 and type accept prm cr address bit variable For example ft1 1 1 accept prm cr address bit prm carrier Using Site Manager See the Accept Perf Measurement CR Addr parameter on page A 49 for information Setting the MTU The default buffer size or maximum transmission unit MTU determines the largest frame that can travel across this interface The default value is 1600 bytes Specify an MTU from 3 to 4608
236. essages v 4 7 25 Setting the Source of Accept Performance Messages V 7 26 Setting the Primary Clock Source V V 7 27 Setting the Secondary Clock Source P4 4 7 28 continued 7 16 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring MCE1 and MCT1 Services Table 7 4 MCE1 Port Configuration Tasks continued Task BCC Site Manager Page Setting the Loop Clock 4 7 29 Setting the External Clock V 7 29 Setting Buffer Credits for MCT1 V 7 1 Enabling or Disabling the MCT1 Port The MCTI interface is enabled by default when you add the circuit Disable or reenable this MCTI interface without moving any cables Using the BCC To enable or disable the MCT1 port navigate to the mct1 prompt for example box mct1 1 1 and type state variable For example mctl1 1 14 state disabled Using Site Manager See the Enable Disable parameter on page A 29 for information 308648 14 00 Rev 00 7 17 Configuring WAN Line Services Setting the MCT1 Line Type Select one of the following line types frame formats for your T1 equipment Table 7 5 MCT1 Line Type Options BCC Option Site Manager Option Description esf ESF The default transmits extended superframes ESFs each consisting of 24 SF D4 frames provides enhanced signaling and synchronization sf SF DF Transmits superframes each consisting of 12 individual frames unframed t1 Unframed T1 Use only with BERT mode to mat
237. et this parameter to Transparent Note that the WAN Protocol parameter is LAPB on AN ASN or Octal Sync lines when X 25 is enabled 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 18 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring WAN Line Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Minimum Frame Spacing Configured FE1 Connector gt Adapter Module FE1 Logical Lines 1 flag 1 to 32 flags Specifies the number of flags that are transmitted between adjacent frames Set this parameter to the appropriate number of flags 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 29 Local HDLC Address Configured FE1 Connector gt Adapter Module FE1 Logical Lines 7 1 to 255 Specifies the local HDLC address of this synchronous interface Select the 1 byte local HDLC address for this interface Specify 1 for DCE 3 for DTE or any other address between 1 and 255 Use unique HDLC addresses for the local and remote interfaces at either end of a point to point circuit If you configure a device at one end of the point to point connection with a local address of DCE and a remote address of DTE you must configure the device at the other end with a local address of DTE and a remote address of DCE If you configure X 25 on this line set this parameter to either 1 DCE or 3 DTE 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 30 A 66 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options
238. eter on page A 37 for information Viewing the Configured WAN Protocol The WAN Protocol parameter indicates which WAN protocol is configured on this logical line Do not change the current value Caution Changing the WAN protocol does not reconfigure the interface and could disable it To change the configured WAN protocol for an interface delete and then reconfigure the circuit See the WAN Protocol parameter on page A 37 for information 308648 14 00 Rev 00 7 41 Configuring WAN Line Services Setting the HDLC Service Type The logical line HDLC service is LLC1 by default LLC1 adds the HDLC address and control fields as a prefix to the frame You can change the service to basic HDLC transparent based on the requirements of the E1 equipment Using the BCC To set HDLC service navigate to the logical line prompt for example stack mce1 1 2 1 logical line mce1 121 1 and type hdlc service variable For example logical line mcei 121 14 hdlc service transparent Using Site Manager See the Service parameter on page A 37 for information Setting the Local HDLC Address Use the options listed in Table 7 14 to specify the 1 byte HDLC address of this logical line Table 7 14 Local HDLC Address Options BCC Option Site Manager Option dce DCE dte DTE Seven An explicit address value 2 4 5 6 or 7 Use unique HDLC addresses for the local and remote interfaces at either end
239. etransmission timer Link control frames are retransmitted when the T1 expires This timer tracks the number of timeouts Memory Errors Number of memory errors detected A memory error occurs when the DMA cycle expires without obtaining the bus within 26 ms Memory errors may indicate faulty hardware If this count exceeds five contact your Nortel Networks Technical Solutions Center show dsucsu errors The show dsucsu errors command displays receive transmission or system errors for all circuits or for a specific circuit or slot This command allows for the following command filters flags and filter arguments circuit lt circuit_name gt Displays information about the specified circuit only slot slot Displays information about the specified slot only lt circuit_name gt Displays information about the specified circuit only Receive Errors The output contains the following information Slot Conn Name of the physical interface Circuit Name of the circuit associated with this line Bad Frames Number of bad receive frames caused by Frame Check Sequence FCS errors or nonoctet aligned errors Runt Frames Number of runt frames received on this line Frame Rejects Number of frame reject errors received on this line continued 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Frames Too Long Overflow Frames Transmit Errors BCC show Commands Number of frames received on this line that exceed the MTU Number of overflow errors
240. expiration of the T1 timer Specify the number of times you want the router to try to retransmit 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 8 1 11 Max T1 Acknowledge Timer seconds COM Connector for X 25 Interface gt Edit Line gt LAPB gt Edit LAPB Parameters 30 seconds 1 to 9999 seconds Specifies the maximum time in seconds that the router waits for an acknowledgment of a frame that it has sent to the network Specify the maximum time in seconds that you want the router to wait for a frame acknowledgment from the network 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 8 1 12 A 20 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Max T2 Acknowledge Timer seconds COM Connector for X 25 Interface gt Edit Line gt LAPB gt Edit LAPB Parameters 1 second 1 to 9999 seconds Specifies the time in seconds that the router waits before sending an acknowledgment for a sequenced frame A value of 1 means that the router does not delay before generating an acknowledgment Specify the amount of time that you want the router to wait before acknowledging a frame 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 8 1 13 Max T3 Disconnect Timer seconds COM Connector for X 25 Interface gt Edit Line gt LAPB gt Edit LAPB Parameters 60 seconds 1 to 9999 seconds Specifies the time in seconds that the router waits befo
241. f the cable connecting the router and the associated T1 equipment from 1 to 655 ft See the Line Buildout parameter on page A 89 for information Setting the Internal Clock Mode The T1 equipment associated with a T1 interface must use a compatible transmit clock The T1 interface supports three sources for the transmit clock Internal Indicates that the router sets the clock e Slave Indicates that the incoming data stream sets the clock e Manual Indicates that jumpers on the T1 link or net module set the clock By default the T1 interface uses manual clock mode which is determined by hardware configuration jumpers See Installing and Maintaining BN Routers or Installing and Maintaining ASN Routers and BNX Platforms for information about configuring the T1 module s hardware jumpers See the Clock Mode parameter on page A 89 for information Assigning Channel Functions Each T1 channel on an interface is idle by default You can assign the following functions e Data Assigns the channel to data pass through T1 connector to T1 connector Voice Assigns the channel to voice pass through T1 connector to T1 connector e Circuit 1 Assigns the channel to the first T1 connector e Circuit 2 Assigns the channel to the second T1 connector e Idle Makes the channel idle 308648 14 00 Rev 00 6 7 Configuring WAN Line Services Circuit Assignment You can allocate a T1 channel to only one T1 circuit For exam
242. filter argument circuit circuit name Displays information about the specified circuit only The output contains the following information Slot Module Conn Name of the physical interface Circuit Name of the logical line Logical Line Index Logical line number for this line Bert Mode State of BERT mode enabled or disabled In BERT mode the router introduces deliberate error patterns into the transmitted bit stream on a single logical line Bits Continuous bit counter Bit Errors Number of bit errors received on this interface B 40 308648 14 00 Rev 00 BCC show Commands show mct1e1 clock state The show mct1e1 clock state command displays the MCTI MCEI module s clock status The output contains the following information Slot Module Conn Name of the physical interface Current Clock Clock source currently in use Primary Clock Primary source for transmit timing Secondary Clock Secondary source for transmit timing show mct1e1 clock summary The show mctte1 clock summary command displays the MCTI MCEI port s clock information The output contains the following information Slot Module Conn Name of the physical interface Current Clock Current source for transmit timing for this port Primary Clock Primary source for transmit timing for this port Secondary Clock Secondary source for transmit timing for this port 308648 14 00 Rev 00 B 41 Configuring WAN Line Services show mctte1 e1port The s
243. fy the number of seconds for loopback testing to run If the only connection with the remote router is through the DSU CSU interface be sure to specify a nonzero value since loopback testing leaves the router unable to communicate with the remote router 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 30 1 1 13 E1 Line Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID You access the E1 line parameters from the Configuration Manager window Enable E1 Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit E1 Parameters Enable Enable Disable Enables or disables the E1 line Set to Disable if you want to disable the E1 line 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 11 1 2 A 10 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters HDB3S Support E1 Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit E1 Parameters Enable Enable Disable Enables or disables high density bipolar coding a mechanism to maintain sufficient ones density in the E1 data stream Enable or disable this parameter depending on the ability of the associated E1 equipment to support HDB3S 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 11 1 7 Clock Mode E1 Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit E1 Parameters Internal Manual Slave Internal Specifies the source of the E1 transmit clock Select Internal to indicate that the router sets the clock
244. g the BCC To change the line availability time navigate to the dsucsu prompt for example box dsucsu 1 1 and type line availability time integer 4 6 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring BayStack DSU CSU Services For example dsucsu 1 1 line availability time 10 Setting the Poll Rate In the BCC the Poll Rate parameter indicates the number of seconds between polls for DSU CSU line status A value of 1 which is the default forces polling of the DSU CSU interface every second Specify a value from 1 to 60 seconds Using the BCC To change the poll rate navigate to the dsucsu prompt for example box dsucsu 1 1 and type poll rate integer For example dsucsu 1 1 poll rate 60 Resetting the CQMS Counters In the BCC the CQMS Reset parameter resets the CQMS counters to their default values By default the CQMS Reset parameter is disabled cleared Using the BCC To reset the CQMS counters navigate to the dsucsu prompt for example box dsucsu 1 1 and type cqms reset variable For example dsucsu 1 1 cqms reset reset 308648 14 00 Rev 00 4 7 Configuring WAN Line Services Configuring V 54 Loopback Tests You can use a set of supported loopback modes for testing both the router s DSU CSU interface and the network Telco circuit to the router This section provides information about the following Section Page Configuring the V 54 Loopback Test State 4 8 Configuring
245. gical Line window opens The Port Parameters window opens 3 Click on Line Tests The Line Tests option appears only in dynamic mode The Port Actions window opens 4 Edit the port action parameters located in the upper portion of the window 5 After setting a parameter click on Apply Site Manager sets the parameter to the value you specified 6 Click on Done when you are finished setting port action parameters Note All changes that you apply to the port in the Port Actions window are in effect only while the window is active When you exit the Port Actions window all port settings revert to their original settings The following sections describe each port action parameter Section Page Enabling or Disabling BERT Mode 9 28 Setting the BERT Alarm Type 9 28 Setting the BERT Test Pattern 9 28 Setting the Line Coding Method 9 28 Setting the Line Type 9 28 308648 14 00 Rev 00 9 27 Configuring WAN Line Services Enabling or Disabling BERT Mode To initiate BERT testing you must enable BERT mode By setting the BERT mode parameter you enable or disable BERT mode on a single logical line for FEI You can enable or disable BERT mode on individual logical lines Setting the BERT Alarm Type You can specify the type of alarm signal to be generated while in BERT mode or you can disable the generation of alarm signals altogether Select AI
246. gical Lines in a Multiline Circuit sseessseeess 10 17 xxviii 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Table 1 1 Table 1 2 Table 2 1 Table 2 2 Table 4 1 Table 4 2 Table 4 3 Table 5 1 Table 7 1 Table 7 2 Table 7 3 Table 7 4 Table 7 5 Table 7 6 Table 7 7 Table 7 8 Table 7 9 Table 7 10 Table 7 11 Table 7 12 Table 7 13 Table 7 14 Table 7 15 Table 7 16 Table 7 17 Table 7 18 Table 7 19 Table 7 20 Table 7 21 Tables Site Manager Abbreviations for Circuit Types sssssssesss 1 5 LUE Ms ETT OT OO gaan 1 6 Synchronous Line Configuration Tasks ciere etre kate teen 2 2 Ling Oan NS serine po bn iban pb I ub rado o Pad XR 2 21 DSU CSU Configuration Tasks E AT potosi m 4 3 TENS SCS OPINE ec 4 4 Loopback Test State Options siisii sienorn inesi aani aiaa 4 8 HSSI Line Configuration TASKS 1 cds cscs spesacocesnaviasceoecedeasteoriaveeteaaneaiels 5 2 MGE1 and MCT Clock Source Options mre 7 5 MCEI Port Congr TASKS auesadssdseesi dedu nrkd aduentu 7 7 MCEI Ene Te OOS ssc cactnee nicer en acre hatin 7 9 MGET Port GOBIOUISEBH TASKS iode bip e rre p E Rer rad bU 7 16 MOTT Line Type Options ertet ime TEE 7 18 Signal Level OPONE eer sadin ince onan naiona ana eaa EE aaa 7 20 E EE em e Terent 7 22 Loopback Configuration OODNOIS iiis teres ia ior ebla qd tutu o edd bae aaea 7 24 Send Performance Messages Options sssssseeee 7 25
247. gure a port the Edit FT1 Clock Parameters window opens automatically When you set these clock parameters you define the timing sources for the selected port only e Fora configured FT1 link module Display the FT1 Port Parameters window FT1 Connector gt Edit Logical Lines Port Details FT1 Port Parameters 8 4 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring FT1 Services To set the clock parameters complete the following tasks You do this Site Manager Procedure System responds 1 In the window containing the clock parameters select a primary clock source option 2 Setthe Primary Clock parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 49 3 Select the secondary backup clock source option Site Manager sets the primary clock to the value you specified 4 Setthe Secondary Clock parameter Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 50 Site Manager sets the secondary clock to the value you specified 5 Click on OK The FT1 Port Parameters window opens To complete the configuration you must also configure a non PRI logical line See Configuring a Non PRI Logical Line on page 8 20 for instructions Customizing FT1 Services Using the BCC or Site Manager Table 8 2 lists the FT1 configuration tasks described in this chapter and indicates whether you can use the BCC or Site Manager to perform each task Tab
248. h Chooser EDDRESS BASED fi Figure 10 6 Edit Multiline Options Window To distribute traffic among multiline data paths you can use one of the following methods e Address Based Selection e Random Selection Address Based Selection If you choose address based selection the router determines the appropriate data path for outbound traffic from the source and destination addresses in individual packets The router always uses the same data path for a given address pair The router determines whether to route or bridge the packet and then uses the appropriate address It uses the routing level addresses for routing traffic and the MAC level addresses for bridging traffic 10 10 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring Multiline Services Address based selection ensures that all outbound traffic to a particular endstation travels on the same data path and that packets arrive in the correct sequence Use this method for protocols that cannot receive packets out of sequence Note however that this option may not result in even traffic distribution across all data paths Note Address based selection cannot be used with frame relay in group or hybrid access mode Traffic distribution is automatically changed to random selection Random Selection If you choose random selection the router determines the data path for outbound traffic by using random number generation With this method the router 1 Assigns a set of num
249. h a V 24 RS 232 interface supports up to 19200 b s An IBM 3174 with a V 35 interface and running Licensed Internal Code C supports up to 256 Kb s 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 14 A 72 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Signal Mode COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit SYNC Parameters Balanced Balanced Unbalanced Specifies balanced or unbalanced transmission Balanced transmission uses two conductors to carry signals unbalanced transmission uses one conductor to carry a signal with a ground providing the return path Set this parameter to Balanced or Unbalanced depending on the signaling mode of the connected device 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 15 RTS Enable COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit SYNC Parameters Disable Enable Disable Enables or disables the detection of RTS signals on this interface Set this parameter to Enable if the connected device for example a modem or a KG844A cryptographic device uses RTS CTS flow control For manual dial modems 2 wire set this parameter to Enable For leased line modems 4 wire set this parameter to Disable 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 16 308648 14 00 Rev 00 A 73 Configuring WAN Line Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Pa
250. hall not sublicense assign or otherwise disclose to any third party the Software or any information about the operation design performance or implementation of the Software and user manuals that is confidential to Nortel Networks and its licensors however Licensee may grant permission to its consultants subcontractors and agents to use the Software at Licensee s facility provided they have agreed to use the Software only in accordance with the terms of this license 3 Limited warranty Nortel Networks warrants each item of Software as delivered by Nortel Networks and properly installed and operated on Nortel Networks hardware or other equipment it is originally licensed for to function substantially as described in its accompanying user manual during its warranty period which begins on the date Software is first shipped to Licensee If any item of Software fails to so function during its warranty period as the sole remedy Nortel Networks will at its discretion provide a suitable fix patch or workaround for the problem that may be included in a future Software release Nortel Networks further warrants to Licensee that the media on which the Software is provided will be free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for a period of 90 days from the date Software is first shipped to Licensee Nortel Networks will replace defective media at no charge if it is returned to Nortel Networks during the warranty period along with proof
251. han the maximum packet size for the packet level 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 9 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Promiscuous Configured FE1 Connector gt Adapter Module FE1 Logical Lines Disable Enable Disable Specifies whether address filtering based on the local and remote address is enabled If you set this parameter to Enable all frames are received If you set this parameter to Disable only frames destined for this local address are received Set this parameter to Enable or Disable 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 11 Service Configured FE1 Connector gt Adapter Module FE1 Logical Lines LLC1 when the WAN protocol is Standard LAPB when the WAN protocol is X 25 Transparent when the WAN protocol is Frame Relay Transparent LLC1 LAPB Specifies the link level protocol for this circuit If you set this parameter to Transparent then raw HDLC high level data link control mode is in effect LLC1 specifies connectionless datagram service it prefixes the HDLC address and control fields to the frame Set this parameter as appropriate for the circuit For Single Dual or Quad Sync circuits you must set this parameter to LAPB when X 25 is enabled and the WAN Protocol parameter is set to X 25 For Octal Sync ASN and AN circuits always s
252. he Carrier Loss Debounce Timeout V V 5 8 Setting Up DTE Loopback Testing V 5 8 Sending Traffic Across a HSSI Interface v 5 10 Using the BCC To configure HSSI services navigate to the box prompt and type box hssi slot 2 connector 1 OR box hssi 2 1 This command configures HSSI services on slot 2 connector 1 At the hssi 2 1 prompt use the BCC commands that allow you to configure the HSSI parameters described in this chapter Using Site Manager See Chapter 1 for information about accessing the Edit HSSI Parameters window using Site Manager 5 2 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring HSSI Services Enabling or Disabling HSSI Lines By default the router enables HSSI line services when you add the circuit You can enable or disable this interface without moving the cables Using the BCC To enable or disable HSSI line services navigate to the hssi prompt for example box hssi 2 1 and type state variable For example hssi 2 1 state enabled hssi 2 1 state disabled Using Site Manager See the Enable parameter on page A 13 for information Enabling or Disabling BofL By default the router transmits proprietary Ethernet encapsulated BofL messages over a point to point connection between the local router and a remote peer The exchange of BofL messages provides a level of confidence in the point to point connection With BofL enabled the router sends periodic keepalive messages to
253. he current value Caution Changing the WAN protocol does not reconfigure the interface and could disable it To change the configured WAN protocol for an interface delete and then reconfigure the circuit For more information refer to Selecting a WAN Protocol on page 8 21 Setting the HDLC Service Type The logical line HDLC service is LLC1 by default LLC1 adds the HDLC address and control fields as a prefix to the frame You can change the service to basic HDLC Transparent based on the requirements of the T1 equipment Using the BCC To set HDLC service navigate to the logical line prompt for example box ft1 1 1 logical line 1 1 and type service variable For example logical line 1 1 service transparent logical line 1 1 service llc1 Using Site Manager See the Service parameter on page A 52 for information 308648 14 00 Rev 00 8 27 Configuring WAN Line Services Setting the Local HDLC Address Specify the 1 byte HDLC address of this logical line as follows e dce e dte e An explicit address value 2 4 5 6 or 7 Use unique HDLC addresses for the local and remote interfaces at either end of the point to point circuit For example if the remote address is dte configure the local address as dce If you configure X 25 on this line set this parameter to either dce or dte Using the BCC To specify the local HDLC address navigate to the logical line prompt for example
254. he sender Select Enable only if you want the port to be in loopback mode 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 6 1 10 WAN Protocol Configured MCE1 or MCT1 Connector gt MCEI or MCT1 Logical Lines Standard For MCE1 Standard PPP SMDS Frame Relay SDLC For MCT1 Standard Passthru PPP SMDS Frame Relay Specifies the WAN protocol for this logical line Accept the current value 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 6 1 14 Service Configured MCE1 or MCT1 Connector gt MCEI or MCT1 Logical Lines LLCI Transparent LLC1 Sets the HDLC service type for this logical line Transparent is basic HDLC mode LLC1 adds the HDLC address and control fields as a prefix to the frame Select the HDLC service type for this logical line 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 6 1 15 308648 14 00 Rev 00 A 37 Configuring WAN Line Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Local HDLC Address Configured MCE1 or MCT1 Connector gt MCEI or MCT1 Logical Lines 7 DCEI21IDTElIA4151617 Specifies the 1 byte local HDLC address of this logical line The DCE address is 1 the DTE address is 3 Select DCE DTE or specify an explicit address value 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 6 1 16 Remote HDLC Address Configured MCE1 or MCT1 Connector gt MCEI or MCT1 Logical Lines 7 DCEI21IDTElIA4151617 Specifies the 1 byte remote HDLC address of this logical
255. he specified slot only lt circuit_name gt Displays information about the specified circuit only The output contains the following information Slot Conn Slot location of the DSU CSU module within the chassis and the connector number Circuit Name of the circuit associated with this line State State of the line driver Down Init initializing Not Present enabled but not yet started or Up The Not Present state occurs for several reasons For example the link module may not be physically present in the chassis the software may be booting and has not yet initialized the driver software the slot may be running diagnostics or there may be a problem with the configuration Errors Receive Number of receive errors Transmit Number of transmit errors Bytes Receive Number of octets received without error Transmit Number of octets transmitted without error Frames Receive Number of frames received without error Transmit Number of frames transmitted without error continued 308648 14 00 Rev 00 B 9 Configuring WAN Line Services Avg Pkt Receive Average packet size number of bytes divided by number of frames received without error Transmit Average packet size number of bytes divided by number of frames transmitted without error Multicast Receive Number of packets received that are not unicast packets show dsucsu summary The show dsucsu summary command displays summary information for all circuits
256. hese parameters are not supported on the ASN The device driver software allocates frame buffers to all logical lines evenly however the software will allocate more buffers to some logical lines temporarily to absorb a short burst of traffic without dropping frames The device driver software accounts for most network scenarios by default and offers the highest level of service possible given the amount of global packet buffer memory available to it However not all networks are the same You can use the buffer use credit and queue length parameters to customize the relative priority between logical lines Nortel Networks recommends that you do not change the default settings of these parameters however without careful consideration of the traffic flow in and out of the T1 E1 logical lines Caution You can affect router performance severely by over allocating buffer credits One reason you might want to change the default settings of these parameters is to change the relative priority of some logical lines over others If for example you notice a high incidence of transmit drop frames due to transmit clipping there are several approaches you can take The first approach is to use priority queuing on each logical line to prioritize traffic Or you can upgrade the routing engine to the maximum memory allotment and increase the global buffer memory to 16 megabytes If transmit clip frames persist and you want to prioritize logi
257. hether the origin of the synchronous timing signals are supplied by the router Internal or by a network device External With this parameter set to Internal the router supplies the required timing signals If you set the Clock Source parameter to Internal set the Internal Clock Speed parameter as described in Setting the Internal Clock Speed on page 2 9 With this parameter set to External the default an external network device supplies the required timing signals In most cases you should set this parameter to External See Setting the External Clock Speed on page 2 10 Using the BCC To set the clock source navigate to the serial prompt for example box serial 2 1 and type clock source variable For example serial 2 1 clock source internal serial 2 1 clock source external Using Site Manager See the Clock Source parameter on page A 72 for information 2 8 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring Synchronous Services Setting the Internal Clock Speed The Internal Clock Speed parameter sets the clock speed of an internally supplied clock when the Clock Source parameter is set to Internal You cannot set this parameter when the Clock Source parameter is set to External By default the internal clock speed is 64 Kb s Set the clock speed for the internal clock to the desired data transmission rate across the synchronous line You can set the internal clock to e 1200 2400 4800 7200 9600 19200 320
258. hip loop1 Port 1 Ext Loop The default uses the signal coming from port 1 Using the BCC To set the primary clock navigate to the fel prompt for example box fe1 1 1 and type primary clock source variable For example fel 1 14 primary clock source internal Using Site Manager See the Primary Clock parameter on page A 62 for information Secondary Clock Source The Secondary Clock parameter identifies the secondary source of the timing signals The router uses the secondary clock only when the primary clock is unavailable Table 9 7 lists the options for this parameter 308648 14 00 Rev 00 9 11 Configuring WAN Line Services Table 9 7 Secondary Clock Options BCC Options Site Manager Options Description internal Internal The default uses the internal clock chip loop1 Port 1 Ext Loop Uses the signal coming from port 1 Using the BCC To set the secondary clock navigate to the fel prompt for example box fe1 1 1 and type secondary clock source variable For example fel 1 1 secondary clock source loop1 Using Site Manager See the Secondary Clock parameter on page A 62 for information Configuring a Non PRI Logical Line A logical line is the logical path for data communication on a physical connection The E1 FE1 WAN adapter module supports only a single logical line per physical port To configure a non PRI logical line you must complete the following steps
259. how mctte1 e1port command displays the MCE1 port information The output contains the following information Slot Module Conn Name of the physical interface State State of the MCE1 port Up Down Init initializing LMI Wait Loopback Dying Dead or Not Pres not present MTU Maximum transfer unit size the buffer size for the MCT1 MCE1 port also the largest frame that can be transmitted or received across the MCT1 MCE1 port The value ranges from 3 to 4608 bytes Bert Mode State of BERT mode enabled or disabled In BERT mode the router introduces deliberate error patterns into the transmitted bit stream on a single logical line Line Type Type of line in use Unframed T1 ESF SF E1 E1CRC E1MF E1CRCMF or Unframed E1 Line Coding Type of bipolar format MCT1 uses for signals B8ZS or AMI I Bit State of international bit enabled or disabled B 42 308648 14 00 Rev 00 show mct1e1 fdl ansi BCC show Commands The show mct1e1 fdl ansi command displays the Facility Data Link FDL error statistics in ANSI 403 mode The output contains the following information Slot Module Conn Line Number CRC Counts BPV Counts OOF Counts FE Counts ES Counts SES Counts UAS Counts PRMES Counts PRMSES Counts PRME Counts Name of the physical interface Line number for this line assigned during configuration This line number uniquely identifies this interface and is not equal to any of the line n
260. hrough the collateral catalog The catalog is located on the World Wide Web at support baynetworks com catalog html and 1s divided into sections arranged alphabetically e The CD ROMs section lists available CDs e The Guides Books section lists books on technical topics e The Technical Manuals section lists available printed documentation sets xxxviii 308648 14 00 Rev 00 How to Get Help Preface If you purchased a service contract for your Nortel Networks product from a distributor or authorized reseller contact the technical support staff for that distributor or reseller for assistance If you purchased a Nortel Networks service program contact one of the following Nortel Networks Technical Solutions Centers Technical Solutions Center Telephone Number Billerica MA 800 2LANWAN 800 252 6926 Santa Clara CA 800 2LANWAN 800 252 6926 Valbonne France 33 4 92 96 69 68 Sydney Australia 61 2 9927 8800 Tokyo Japan 81 3 5402 7041 308648 14 00 Rev 00 XXX X Chapter 1 Getting Started This chapter describes how to access the physical and data link layer line services for the configured WAN circuits on a Nortel Networks router Note In the OSI internetworking model the physical layer manages the transmission of bits across the physical media for example cable or modem interface a physical layer protocol defines the electrical and me
261. iagnostics When a port is in BERT mode it can generate patterns such as all ones all zeros or a quasi random signal sequence QRSS pattern Select a test pattern and click on Apply You can configure this parameter for QMCTI link modules and DMCT1 net modules only 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 6 1 63 BERT Alarm Type Configured QMCT1 or DMCTI Connector gt MCTI Logical Lines Disable AIS Yellow Specifies the type of alarm signal to be generated while in BERT mode Select AIS alarm indication signal to transmit Blue alarms all ones Select Yellow to transmit Yellow alarms all zeros 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 6 1 64 308648 14 00 Rev 00 A 41 Configuring WAN Line Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Accept Fractional Loopback Code Configured QMCT1 Connector in Dynamic Mode gt MCTI Logical Lines Enable Enable Disable Determines whether the logical line can accept loopback requests from a remote T1 device Select Enable or Disable You can configure this parameter for QMCT1 link modules only 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 6 1 65 NRZI Enable Configured QMCTI Connector gt MCT1 Logical Lines Disable Enable Disable The software uses this parameter only if you installed a QMCT1 DSOA link module Disable specifies no communication of state changes between the subscriber s
262. ibes how to configure multiline services It contains the following sections Section Page Overview of Multiline Configurations 10 1 Configuring Multiline Services 10 5 Overview of Multiline Configurations A multiline configuration is a circuit that consists of more than one WAN data path A data path is a connection between two points and can be a permanent physical line a dial up physical line or a virtual circuit connection Read these sections for information about multiline configurations Section Page Types of Multiline Circuits 10 2 Benefits of a Multiline Configuration 10 3 Multiline Example 10 3 Software Considerations 10 4 308648 14 00 Rev 00 10 1 Configuring WAN Line Services Types of Multiline Circuits You can configure multiline services over the following types of WAN media e Synchronous Nortel Networks Standard PPP and frame relay protocols e TIEI e MCEI MCTI e HSSI The data paths that form a multiline circuit must share the same bandwidth MTU and encapsulation method T1 El MCT1 MCEI HSSI and Nortel Networks Standard synchronous lines share the same encapsulation method so you can group any of these lines to form a multiline circuit as long as they share the same bandwidth and MTU Frame relay and PPP each have unique encapsulation methods You cannot mix these line types with any other line type when you create a multiline c
263. ick on OK The WAN Protocols window opens 7 Select SDLC and click on OK The Select Protocols window opens 8 Select DLSw and click on OK The Local Device Configuration window opens 9 Specify values for the parameters you want to modify for this SDLC to frame relay connection Click on Help or see Configuring DLSw Services for descriptions of the DLSw Local Device parameters 10 Click on OK The DLS Local Device Configuration window opens 11 Click on Done The DLSw Slot Configuration window opens 12 Click on Done The Slot MCT1 Logical Lines window opens continued 308648 14 00 Rev 00 7 33 Configuring WAN Line Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this 13 Scroll to the Rate Adaption parameter and set the value to 9 6 or 19 2 Kb s After you set the data rate for an SDLC connection you can assign only one timeslot to the associated logical line Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 39 System responds Site Manager sets rate adaption to the value you specified 14 Scroll to the NRZI Enable parameter and set the value to Enable for NRZI line coding or Disable for NRZ line coding as specified by the subscriber Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 42 Site Manager sets the NRZI Enable parameter to the value you specified 15 16 If you enabled NRZI scroll to the NRZI Type parameter and set the value to Mar
264. ify a value in the range 512 to 65535 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 3 1 31 TCP KeepAlive COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit Asynchronous Parameters 8 seconds 3 to 180 seconds Specifies how often the local TCP host sends keepalive messages to the remote TCP host When the local TCP host sends a TCP keepalive message it expects an acknowledgment ACK from the remote TCP host The ACK then resets the inactive limit timer If the local TCP host does not receive the ACK from the remote TCP host within the time limit specified by the TCP Inactive Limit parameter the TCP connection is disabled To prevent an error or alarm condition set the TCP Inactive Limit parameter to a value that allows enough time for multiple TCP keepalive messages Specify a value in the range 3 to 180 seconds 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 3 1 35 308648 14 00 Rev 00 A 5 Configuring WAN Line Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID TCP Inactive Limit COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit Asynchronous Parameters 300 seconds 65536 to 65535 seconds Specifies the maximum inactivity timer in seconds When the inactive limit timer expires the TCP connection between the router and the remote TCP host is lost This parameter works with the TCP KeepAlive parameter To prevent a TCP connection loss set this parameter to a value that all
265. ils Click on an unconfigured MCE1 or MCT1 connector in the Configuration Manager window The Port Application window opens Set the Port Application Mode parameter to NONPRI then click on OK The Edit Clock Parameters window opens Select a primary and secondary clock source option then click on OK Set the port parameters then click on OK The MCE1 or MCT1 Port Parameters window opens The MCE1 or MCT1 Logical Lines window opens After customizing the port parameters click on Add The Add Circuit window opens Do not click on OK in the Add Circuit window Selecting OK adds a single line circuit for this logical line You cannot create a multiline circuit from a single line circuit Click on Cancel to create an unused logical line The MCE1 or MCT1 Logical Lines window reopens Repeat steps 6 and 7 for each unused logical line you want to create The MCE1 or MCT1 Logical Lines window now lists the unused logical lines Figure 10 7 shows four unused logical lines 10 12 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring Multiline Services a Sot 2 MCEI 2 Logical ines Done Add Delete Apply Port Details Circuit Timeslots Values Help Enable Disable ENABLE Breath Of Life BOFL Enable Disable ENABLE BOFL Timeout seconds 5 Fractional Loopback DISABLE WAN Protocol STANDARD Service LLC1 Figure 10 7 Logical Lines Window Showing Unused
266. ilters flags and filter arguments period lt number_of_seconds gt circuit lt circuit_name gt slot s ot lt circuit_name gt Displays data sampled during the period number of seconds specified Displays information about the specified circuit only Displays information about the specified slot only Displays information about the specified circuit only The output contains the following information Slot Conn Circuit Input Rate bytes sec Input Rate pkts sec Output Rate bytes sec Output Rate pkts sec Input Lack of Resource Output Lack of Resource Name of the physical interface Name of the circuit associated with this line Number of octets received without error Number of packets received without error Number of octets transmitted without error Number of packets transmitted without error Number of packets received and discarded because of lack of resources for example buffers Number of transmit packets discarded because of lack of resources for example buffers 308648 14 00 Rev 00 BCC show Commands show dsucsu stats The show dsucsu stats command displays DSU CSU input output statistical information for all DSU CSU modules or for a specific circuit or slot This command allows for the following command filters flags and filter arguments circuit circuit name Displays information about the specified circuit only slot lt slot gt Displays information about t
267. imeout parameter on page A 64 for information Setting the MTU Size The router uses the transmit receive buffer size maximum transmission unit MTU to configure the largest frame that the router can transmit or receive across this FE1 port The router discards frames larger than this value The MTU is 1600 bytes by default You can change it to any size from 3 to 4608 bytes for the logical line Using the BCC To specify the MTU size navigate to the logical line prompt for example box fe1 1 1 logical line boston and type mtu integer For example logical line boston mtu 10 Using Site Manager See the MTU Size bytes parameter on page A 64 for information 308648 14 00 Rev 00 9 17 Configuring WAN Line Services Enabling or Disabling Interface Filtering You can specify whether the interface filters packets for addresses other than its own local address or whether address filtering is based on both the local and remote addresses With this parameter set to enabled the interface receives all frames By default this parameter is disabled which means that the interface receives only frames destined for its local address Using the BCC To enable or disable interface filtering navigate to the logical line prompt for example box fe1 1 1 logical line boston and type promiscuous variable For example logical line boston promiscuous enabled Using Site Manager See the Promiscuous parameter on
268. in support of authorized use of the Software and c to use and copy the associated user manual solely in support of authorized use of the Software by Licensee This license applies to the Software only and does not extend to Nortel Networks Agent software or other Nortel Networks software products Nortel Networks Agent software or other Nortel Networks software products are licensed for use under the terms of the applicable Nortel Networks NA Inc Software License Agreement that accompanies such software and upon payment by the end user of the applicable license fees for such software 2 Restrictions on use reservation of rights The Software and user manuals are protected under copyright laws Nortel Networks and or its licensors retain all title and ownership in both the Software and user manuals including any revisions made by Nortel Networks or its licensors The copyright notice must be reproduced and included with any copy of any portion of the Software or user manuals Licensee may not modify translate decompile disassemble use for any competitive analysis reverse engineer distribute or create derivative works from the Software or user manuals or any copy in whole or in part Except as expressly provided in this Agreement Licensee may not copy or transfer the Software or user manuals in whole or in part The Software and user manuals embody Nortel Networks and its licensors confidential and proprietary intellectual property Licensee s
269. ine Select the media type appropriate for this line 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 54 Idle RR Frames COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit SYNC Parameters Off On Off Indicates whether the router sends a receiver ready RR signal when the Link Idle Timer expires Accept the default or select On if you want the router to send RR signals 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 61 KG84A Cycle COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit SYNC Parameters 100 milliseconds 51101251501 10012001 500 Specifies the timer cycle in milliseconds This cycle value is used by the timers on the other KG84A devices on the network and becomes the polling cycle for monitoring FCS errors Accept the default 100 milliseconds or select one of the valid options Be sure to set the RTS Enable parameter to Enable 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 67 A 80 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters KG84A Sync Loss Interval COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit SYNC Parameters 50 cycles 2151101251501 10012001 500 Specifies how many cycles the router should wait after detecting an FCS error If the router does not receive a valid frame within the specified number of cycles the router declares a loss of synchronization Accept the default 50 cycles or select one of the valid options Be sure
270. ine gt LAPB gt Edit LAPB Parameters Enable Enable Disable Globally enables or disables LAPB services Select Disable to disable LAPB services 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 8 1 2 Station Type COM Connector for X 25 Interface gt Edit Line gt LAPB gt Edit LAPB Parameters DTE DTE DCE DXE Identifies the station type that is whether the device is a DTE or DCE for this interface If your device is data terminal equipment select DTE If your device is data communications equipment select DCE If you do not want to assign a specific station type and instead want the network to determine the station type select DXE This value indicates that the router is in unassigned mode it is neither a DTE nor a DCE If you select DXE the router will send an exchange identification XID but negotiation will not take place until the network assigns a station type 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 8 1 7 A 18 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Control Field COM Connector for X 25 Interface gt Edit Line gt LAPB gt Edit LAPB Parameters Modulo 8 Modulo 8 Modulo 128 Specifies the desired window size or modulo of the sequence numbering that the router uses to nu
271. ion Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID You access the FT1 logical line parameters from the Configuration Manager window Enable Disable Configured FT1 Connector gt FT1 Logical Lines Enable Enable Disable Enables or disables the logical line Select Enable or Disable 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 6 1 2 Breath of Life BofL Enable Disable Configured FT1 Connector gt FT1 Logical Lines Enable Enable Disable When you set this parameter to Enable a BofL packet is sent as often as the value you specify for the BofL Timeout parameter Set to Disable only if you want to end transmission of BofL packets 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 6 1 8 A 50 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID BofL Timeout Configured FT1 Connector gt FT1 Logical Lines 5 seconds 1 to 60 seconds Indicates the time between transmissions of BofL packets Specify the time in seconds between transmissions of BofL packets 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 6 1 9 Fractional Loopback Configured FT1 Connector gt FT1 Logical Lines Disable Enable Disable Specifies whether to use diagnostic loopback mode on this circuit In this mode
272. ircuit Physical and Logical Circuits There are two types of multiline circuits e Circuits that include several physical lines e Circuits on one physical line with several data paths that have separate addresses logical lines In Figure 10 1 Multiline Circuit A groups three synchronous lines into one circuit Multiline Circuit B consists of one physical synchronous line but has three data paths with separate addresses A multiline circuit reacts to individual data paths coming up and going down by adding to and subtracting from its pool of active data paths and can operate with some of its data paths down 10 2 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring Multiline Services Multiline Circuit Multiline Circuit 0 d Q Data paths Q Q Physical lines DR pote Qo TAI LS0021A Figure 10 1 Multiline Circuit Types Benefits of a Multiline Configuration Using a multiline configuration has the following advantages e Greater bandwidth between two sites Bandwidth is the rate at which traffic travels on the circuit A multiline circuit has greater bandwidth because traffic can travel over more than one data path e Greater degree of fault tolerance In a multiline configuration a single circuit has multiple data paths If one data path becomes disabled traffic can travel over another data path Multiline Example Suppose that your network uses Nortel Networks routers to connect two sites one in New York
273. irectly or indirectly the Software or related technical data or information without first obtaining any required export licenses or other governmental approvals Without limiting the foregoing Licensee on behalf of itself and its subsidiaries and affiliates agrees that it will not without first obtaining all export licenses and approvals required by the U S Government i export re export transfer or divert any such Software or technical data or any direct product thereof to any country to which such exports or re exports are restricted or embargoed under United States export control laws and regulations or to any national or resident of such restricted or embargoed countries or ii provide the Software or related technical data or information to any military end user or for any military end use including the design development or production of any chemical nuclear or biological weapons 9 General If any provision of this Agreement is held to be invalid or unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction the remainder of the provisions of this Agreement shall remain in full force and effect This Agreement will be governed by the laws of the state of California Should you have any questions concerning this Agreement contact Nortel Networks 4401 Great America Parkway PO Box 58185 Santa Clara California 95054 8185 LICENSEE ACKNOWLEDGES THAT LICENSEE HAS READ THIS AGREEMENT UNDERSTANDS IT AND AGREES TO BE BOUND BY ITS TERMS
274. is parameter to Internal the router supplies the required timing signals If you set this parameter to External an external network device supplies the required timing signals In most cases this parameter should be set to External Set this parameter to Internal or External as appropriate for your network For direct connection to a control unit such as an IBM 3174 set this parameter to Internal For connection to a modem set this parameter to External For direct connection to an IBM 3745 either the router or the IBM 3745 can provide the clock source If the IBM 3745 does not provide clocking set this parameter to Internal 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 13 Internal Clock Speed COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit SYNC Parameters 64 KB 19200 KB for SDLC 1200 B 2400 B 4800 B 7200 B 9600 B 19200 B 32000 B 38400 B 56 KB 64 KB 125 KB 230 KB 420 KB 625 KB 833 KB 1 25 MB 2 5 MB 5 MB Sets the clock speed of an internally supplied clock when the Clock Source parameter is set to Internal Attached devices must be able to operate at the specified speed Set the clock speed for the internal clock to the desired data transmission rate across the synchronous line Some of the more common speeds for IBM products are as follows An IBM 3274 with a V 24 RS 232 interface supports up to 9600 b s Some support speeds of up to 19200 b s An IBM 3274 with a V 35 interface supports up to 64 Kb s An IBM 3174 wit
275. ite Manager See the Clear Alarm Threshold parameter on page A 27 for information Enabling or Disabling the International Bit By default the MCEI interface does not use the international bit in E1 frames Using the BCC To enable or disable the international bit navigate to the mcel prompt for example stack mce1 1 2 1 and type international bit variable For example mce1 1 2 1 international bit enabled Using Site Manager See the International Bit parameter on page A 27 for information 308648 14 00 Rev 00 7 41 Configuring WAN Line Services Setting the Loop Clock In the BCC the Loop Clock State parameter specifies the MCEI port s loop clock status You can set this parameter to present up which is the default or absent down Using the BCC To set the loop clock state navigate to the mcel prompt for example stack mce1 1 2 1 and type loop clock state variable For example mcel 1 2 1 loop clock state absent Setting the External Clock In the BCC the External Clock State parameter indicates whether the external clock is operational You can set this parameter to present up which is the default or absent down Using the BCC To set the external clock state navigate to the mcel prompt for example stack mce1 1 2 1 and type external clock state variable For example mcel 1 2 1 external clock state absent 7 12 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring MCE1 and MCT1 S
276. ived that are not unicast packets The show ft1e1 summary command displays summary information for all circuits or for a specific circuit This command allows for the following command filters flags and filter arguments circuit circuit name circuit name Displays information about the specified circuit only Displays information about the specified circuit only The output contains the following information Slot Conn Circuit Admin State HW Address WAN Protocol Operational State Errors MTU Name of the physical interfaces Name of the circuits associated with these lines Configured state of the FT1 or FE1 module Physical addresses of the lines Each line driver fills in this address from the 48 bit address stored in the link module number PROM for this connector WAN protocols enabled on these interfaces Current operating state for each line driver Number of errors for each circuit Maximum transfer unit size the buffer size for each FT1 or FE1 port also the largest frame that can be transmitted or received across the FT1 or FE1 port The value ranges from 3 to 4608 bytes 308648 14 00 Rev 00 B 23 Configuring WAN Line Services show ft1e1 timeslot The show ft1e1 timeslot command identifies configured timeslots The output contains the following information Slot Conn Name of the physical interface Line Number Line number for this line assigned during configuration This line
277. jects Frames Too Long Overflow Frames Transmit Errors Name of the physical interface Name of the circuit associated with this line Number of bad receive frames caused by Frame Check Sequence FCS errors or nonoctet aligned errors Number of runt frames received on this line Number of frame reject errors received on this line Number of frames received on this line that exceed the MTU Number of overflow errors received on this line in which the device s FIFO buffer overflowed before obtaining the next DMA cycle No buffer resources are available The output contains the following information Slot Conn Underflow Frames System Errors Name of the physical interface Number of retransmission underflow errors These occur when the device s FIFO buffer empties before the device obtains the next DMA request The output contains the following information Slot Conn Receive Rejects Transmit Rejects T1 Timeouts Memory Errors Name of the physical interface Number of reject frames received Number of reject frames transmitted Number of T1 timeouts detected The T1 timer is the link retransmission timer Link control frames are retransmitted when the T1 expires This timer tracks the number of timeouts Number of memory errors detected A memory error occurs when the DMA cycle expires without obtaining the bus within 26 ms Memory errors may indicate faulty hardware If this count exceeds five contact
278. k Select Manual to indicate that the jumpers on the E1 link module set the clock See Installing and Maintaining BN Routers or Installing and Maintaining ASN Routers and BNX Platforms for information on hardware configurations 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 10 1 10 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring WAN Line Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Mini Dacs T1 Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit T1 Parameters Idle Idle Data Voice Circuit 1 Circuit 2 Assigns a specific function to each T1 channel Assign the appropriate function to the T1 channels Select Idle to make the channel idle Select Data to assign the channel to voice pass through E1 connector to E1 connector To configure data and voice pass through assign identical channels to data or voice on both T1 connectors Select Circuit 1 to assign the channel to the first E1 connector Note that you cannot allocate T1 channels to both T1 circuits Select Circuit 2 to assign the channel to the second E1 connector 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 10 1 11 A 90 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Multiline Configuration Parameter You access the Data Path Chooser parameter from the Configuration Manager window Parameter Data Path Chooser Path Interface Connector for a Multiline Circuit gt Edit Circuit gt Lines gt Multiline gt Edit Multiline Options Default Address Based Options Address Base
279. k device directly or indirectly to a physical network medium 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Glossary 1 A acronyms XXXV address mode FDL HDLC 7 23 8 12 A 32 A 47 addressing point to point connections conventions 2 14 explicit 2 15 alarm signal BERT mode 7 58 8 37 9 28 AMI line coding FE1 9 7 FT1 8 8 8 38 A 45 MCEI 7 59 A 26 A 59 MCTI 7 19 A 30 ANSI 403 7 22 7 60 8 11 8 39 A 32 A 47 asynchronous parameters Baud Rate 2 32 3 4 A 4 Cfg RxQ Length 3 6 A 7 Cfg TxQ Length 3 6 A 6 editing 3 1 Enable 2 4 3 2 A 2 Idle Timer 3 5 A 4 Local Port 3 4 A 4 MTU 3 3 A 2 Receive Window 3 5 A 5 Remote IP Addr 3 3 A 3 Remote Port 3 4 A 3 Start Protocol 3 3 A 3 TCP Inactive Limit 3 6 A 6 TCP KeepAlive 3 5 A 5 WAN Serial Interface Type A 87 A 88 AT amp T 54016 7 22 7 60 8 11 8 39 A 32 A 47 attribute defined Glossary 1 AZ address mode 7 23 8 12 A 32 A 47 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Index B channels ISDN 7 55 B8ZS line coding 6 6 A 30 A 45 bandwidth on demand BOD 10 5 BayStack routers asynchronous circuits 3 1 internal DSU CSU 4 1 BCC show commands B 1 BERT mode alarm signal 7 58 8 37 9 28 BayStack DSU CSU 4 13 FEI 9 26 FT1 8 35 MCEI 7 56 MCTI 7 56 bipolar signal format 6 5 6 10 7 9 7 19 8 8 8 38 9 7 BofL Breath of Life messages FEI logical lines 9 16 FT1 logical lines 8 25 A 50 HSSI lines 5 3 A 13 MCE or MCT logical
280. k or Space frame format as specified by the subscriber Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 43 Click on Done Site Manager sets the NRZI type to the value you specified See Table 7 12 for a matrix of supported line encoding configurations Configuring Non PRI Logical Lines Logical lines are the logical paths for data communication on a physical connection Add logical lines for an MCE1 or MCT1 port as follows 1 2 3 Define logical lines Customize logical line parameters Assign timeslots 7 34 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring MCE1 and MCT1 Services Defining Logical Lines You can define logical lines for an MCE1 or MCT1 port using the BCC or Site Manager A single MCEI port supports up to 31 logical lines A single MCT1 port supports up to 24 logical lines Note If you want to group the logical lines into a multiline circuit see Chapter 10 Using the BCC 1 To add logical lines navigate to the mcel or mct1 prompt for example stack mce1 1 2 1 or box mct1 1 1 and type logical line circuit name For example mct1 1 1 logical line mct1 11 1 OR mce1 1 2 14 logical line mce1 121 1 The circuit name identifies the following e Type of circuit MCEI or MCT1 e Physical connector slot and port number e Number of the logical line on the MCE1 or MCT1 port e Module number ASN net modules only 2 To select a WAN protocol type wan protocol variable For examp
281. ke sure that you set the LBO appropriately For example 0 0 dB is short haul up to 133 ft Use the MCT1 built in bit error rate test BERT and line loop up loop down and payload loopbacks for troubleshooting This feature is available only with Site Manager in dynamic mode Note that only one port can be in BERT mode at a time Payload loopbacks are available in extended super frame ESF line type mode only Make sure that the clocking is set to Port1 Ext Loop or Port2 Ext Loop These settings are equivalent to Sync External The internal clocking of the MCT1 link module is the same as the internal clocking of the T1 link module The MCT1 Slave and Loop settings are equivalent to the T1 master clock in the T1 link module Make sure that the CRC16 cyclic redundancy check or CRC32 match the carrier s specifications Make sure that the value of the Inter Frame Time Fill parameter matches idles 0xFF or flags 0x7E with the remote end of the link Check the events from the entity DS1E1 multichannel T1 E1 driver service to view the MCT1 log events MCT uses the wfDS1EI MIB entries Therefore the entity name associated with MCTI is DSIEI not MCTI MCT uses the wfLogicalLineEntry object T1 uses the wfSyncEntry object Enter the Technician Interface loadmap s ot no command and make sure that the software loaded the munich exe and mct1el exe files If it did not use the Image Builder to add them to the router sof
282. keyword also called subcommand 308648 14 00 Rev 00 B 1 Configuring WAN Line Services Table B 1 DSU CSU show Commands lt container gt lt keyword gt lt arguments gt lt filter_flags gt lt filter_arguments gt alerts circuit lt circuit_name gt slot slot detail circuit circuit name slot lt slot gt errors circuit lt circuit_name gt slot slot sample period period in seconds circuit circuit name slot lt slot gt stats circuit lt circuit_name gt slot lt slot gt summary circuit lt circuit_name gt slot lt slot gt show dsucsu alerts The show dsucsu alerts command displays all DSU CSU circuits that are enabled but not up Use this display to identify the interfaces that are not working This command allows for the following command filters flags and filter arguments circuit lt circuit_name gt Displays information about the specified circuit only Slot lt slot gt Displays information about the specified slot only 308648 14 00 Rev 00 BCC show Commands The output contains the following information Slot Conn Circuit Admin State HW Address WAN Protocol Operational State Errors MTU show dsucsu detail Name of the physical interface Name of the circuit associated with this line Configured state of the DSU CSU module Physical address of the line The line driver fills in this address from th
283. l WAN protocol enabled on this interface continued 308648 14 00 Rev 00 B 35 Configuring WAN Line Services Operational State Total Time Up Down Errors MTU State of the line drivers as follows BofLwait Driver is waiting for its own Breath of Life BofL frames to be successfully transmitted or for a BofL frame from the Nortel Networks router at the other end of the WAN connection This applies only to the Wellfleet Standard protocol CAwait External equipment such as a modem DSU or CSU is not currently up Init Module is initializing LMlwait Driver is waiting for any of four WAN protocols to indicate that a link layer connection has been established to another entity This applies to the frame relay SMDS ATM and PPP protocols Not Pres Module is enabled but not yet started This state occurs for several reasons For example the link module may not be physically present in the chassis The software may be booting and has not yet initialized the driver software the slot may be running diagnostics or there may be a problem with the configuration If the line is not up Operational State does not equal Up then three dashes appear If the line is up Operational State equals Up then the value appears in the form hhhmmmsss where hh is hours mm is minutes and ss is seconds For example the value might appear as 5n31m05s If the value is greater than 24 hours it appears in
284. l router and a remote peer BofL Timeout the time between transmissions of BofL messages from this interface Number of octets received without error Number of frames received without error Average packet size number of bytes divided by number of frames received without error Number of octets transmitted without error Number of frames transmitted without error Average packet size number of bytes divided by number of frames transmitted without error Total number of errors received Total number of errors transmitted Number of packets received without error Number of packets transmitted without error Protocols configured on this interface The output contains the following information Bad Frames Number of bad receive frames caused by Frame Check Sequence FCS errors or nonoctet aligned errors Runt Frames Frame Rejects Number of runt frames received on this line Number of frame reject errors received on this line Frames Too Long Overflow Frames Number of frames received on this line that exceed the MTU Number of overflow frames received on this line in which the device s FIFO buffer overflowed before obtaining the next DMA cycle No buffer resources are available 308648 14 00 Rev 00 B 29 Configuring WAN Line Services Transmit Errors The output contains the following information Underflow Frames Number of retransmission underflow errors These occur when the devi
285. l to use the clock chip on the link or net module Select Port 1 Ext Loop to use the signal coming from port 1 Select Port 2 Ext Loop to use the signal coming from port 2 Select Port 3 Ext Loop to use the signal coming from port 3 Select Port 4 Ext Loop to use the signal coming from port 4 Select Auxiliary Ext to use an external source via BNC connectors 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 18 1 3 Secondary Clock QMCT1 Connector gt Edit Logical Lines gt Port Details gt MCT1 Port Parameters Internal Internal Port 1 Ext Loop Port 2 Ext Loop Auxiliary Ext Identifies the secondary source of the timing signals The router uses the secondary clock only when the primary clock is unavailable Select Internal to use the clock chip on the link or net module Select Port 1 Ext Loop to use the signal coming from port 1 Select Port 2 Ext Loop to use the signal coming from port 2 Select Port 3 Ext Loop to use the signal coming from port 3 Select Port 4 Ext Loop to use the signal coming from port 4 Select Auxiliary Ext to use an external source via BNC connectors 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 18 1 4 308648 14 00 Rev 00 A 35 Configuring WAN Line Services MCE1 and MCT1 Logical Line Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID You
286. le logical line mcti 11 14 Wan protocol framerelay See Configuring and Managing Routers with Site Manager and the appropriate protocol configuration guide for information about selecting WAN protocols 308648 14 00 Rev 00 7 35 Configuring WAN Line Services 4 To select the protocols to run on this logical line type the name of the protocol pop standard or frame relay For example logical line mcti 11 14 frame relay frame relay mctl 11 14 From the frame relay prompt you can change the settings for the Frame Relay parameters See the appropriate protocol configuration guide for information about configuring WAN protocols over a logical line Repeat steps 1 to 3 for each logical line that you want to create See Customizing Logical Line Parameters on page 7 38 for information on editing logical line parameters Using Site Manager To add the logical lines for an MCE1 or MCT1 port complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 Start at the MCE1 or MCT1 Logical Lines window After you customize the port parameters for a non PRI circuit the MCE1 or MCT1 Logical Lines window opens 2 Click on Add The Add Circuit window opens 3 Specify the logical line in the Circuit Name box 4 Click on OK The WAN Protocols window opens 5 Select the WAN protocol and click on OK See Configuring and Managing Routers with Site M
287. le 8 2 FT1 Configuration Tasks Site Task BCC Manager Page Enabling or Disabling the FT1 Port 4 4 8 6 Setting the FT1 Line Type V V 8 7 Setting the FT1 Line Coding V V 8 8 Setting the Signal Level 4 4 8 9 Setting the Alarm Threshold Time V V 8 10 Setting the Alarm Threshold Clear Time V V 8 10 continued 308648 14 00 Rev 00 8 5 Configuring WAN Line Services Table 8 2 FT1 Configuration Tasks continued Site Task BCC Manager Page Setting the FDL Mode for ESF Line Types 4 V 8 11 Setting the Remote FDL HDLC Address Mode V V 8 12 Accepting or Rejecting Port Loopback Requests V v 8 12 Setting the Loop Retention Interframe Time Fill 4 8 13 Setting a Loopback Configuration V V 8 14 Setting the Source of Send Performance Messages V V 9 15 Setting the Source of Accept Performance Messages V 8 15 Setting the MTU V 8 16 Setting the Primary Clock Source V V 8 17 Setting the Secondary Clock Source 4 V 8 18 Setting the External Clock State V 8 19 Setting the Loop Clock V 8 19 Setting Relay Control 4 8 20 Enabling or Disabling the FT1 Port The FT1 interface is enabled by default when you add the circuit You can disable or reenable this FT1 interface without moving any cables Using the BCC To enable or disable the FT1 port navigate to the ft prompt for example box ft1 1 1 and type state variable For example ft1 1 14 state disabled Using Site Ma
288. line The DCE address is 1 the DTE address is 3 Select DCE DTE or specify an explicit address value 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 6 1 17 A 38 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Rate Adaption Configured QMCTI Connector gt MCT1 Logical Lines 56K LSB 64K 56K MSB 56K LSB 9 6K 19 2K Sets the number of data bits transmitted and their bit positions in the timeslot to achieve the data rate The term rate adaption means that by setting this parameter you are adapting to the rate of your subscriber the software does not change the rate dynamically The 64K 56K MSB and 56K LSB options specify full DSO rates The 64K option specifies that all 8 bits in the timeslot carry data Both 56K options specify that 7 of the bits in the timeslot carry data If you select MSB the most significant bit carries framing overhead If you select LSB the least significant bit carries framing overhead The 9 6K and 19 2K options specify DSOA subrates for an SDLC connection Select one of these options only if you installed a QMCT1 DSOA link module The 9 6K option specifies a DSOA subrate of 9 6 Kb s The 19 2K option specifies a DSOA subrate of 19 2 Kb s If you select one of these options you can assign only one logical line to a timeslot Set the value to match the da
289. lines 7 40 A 36 synchronous lines 2 5 A 70 buffer credits setting 7 14 7 29 BY address mode 7 23 8 12 A 32 A 47 C circuit defined Glossary 1 type designators 1 5 Index 1 clock timing FEI 9 3 FT1 8 3 HSSI 5 6 internal DSU CSU 4 4 MCEI MCTI 7 5 synchronous 2 8 clocking MCT1 C 2 connector defined Glossary 1 conventions text xxxiv customer support xxxix cyclic redundancy check CRC 7 46 8 29 9 21 D D4 frame 6 4 DCE 2 14 default configurations 1 2 digital signal level 0 DSO channels C 1 DMCTI net module logical line parameters Accept Perf Measurement CR Addr A 34 Primary Clock A 35 Secondary Clock A 35 Send Performance Measurement CR Addr A 34 loopback support 7 48 DSO channels See digital signal level 0 DSO timeslots 6 4 DSOA subrates Rate Adaption parameter 7 44 DSOA subrates See also QMCT1 7 2 DS line rates 7 2 8 1 9 1 signal level A 31 timeslots 7 52 8 33 9 23 DSU CSU parameters 64K Transmit Monitor 4 6 A 9 Option Mode 4 4 A 8 Transmit Clock Source 4 5 A 8 V 54 Loopback 4 8 A 9 V 54 Timer 4 10 A 10 Index 2 DSX 1 FT1 8 9 8 40 A 46 MCTI 7 20 7 60 A 31 T1 6 6 A 89 DTE 2 14 E El configuring for multiline 10 2 parameters Clock Mode A 11 Enable 6 10 A 10 HDB3S Support 6 10 A 11 Line Type A 12 Mini Dacs A 12 signals 9 7 extended superframe ESF setting for FT1 A 45 setting for MCT1 7 59 A 30
290. lity of the associated E1 equipment to support HDB3S See the HDB3S Support parameter on page A 11 for information Setting the Clock Source The E1 equipment associated with an E1 interface must use a compatible transmit clock The E1 interface supports three sources for the transmit clock Internal Indicates that the router sets the clock e Slave Indicates that the incoming data stream sets the clock Manual Indicates that jumpers on the E1 link module set the clock 6 10 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring E1 and T1 Services By default the E1 interface uses manual clock mode which is determined by hardware configuration jumpers See Installing and Maintaining BN Routers or Installing and Maintaining ASN Routers and BNX Platforms for information about configuring the E1 module s hardware jumpers See the Clock Mode parameter on page A 11 for information Assigning Channel Functions Unless you change the default channel function each E1 channel on an interface is idle by default You can assign these functions e Data Assigns the channel to data pass through E1 connector to E1 connector e Voice Assigns the channel to voice pass through E1 connector to E1 connector e Circuit 1 Assigns the channel to the first E1 connector e Circuit 2 Assigns the channel to the second E1 connector e Idle Makes the channel idle Circuit Assignment You can allocate an E1 channel to only one E1 circ
291. ll counters to 0 Insert 1 Error Inserts a single nonrepeating error into the bit stream Insert 1 Error 1K Inserts a deliberate error into every thousandth position in the bit stream Insert 1 Error 1M Inserts a deliberate error into every millionth position in the bit stream Disable Insert Error Stops the insertion of deliberate errors into the bit stream 308648 14 00 Rev 00 8 41 Configuring WAN Line Services Note FDL loopback command options apply only when the FT line type is configured as ESF for testing For more information about FDL loopback codes see ANSI T1 408 ISDN Primary Rate Customer Installation Metallic Interfaces Layer I Specification Entering FT1 Port Loopback Commands Table 8 20 describes the loopback commands you can send on an FT port Caution Wait for the window to update before selecting another command Table 8 20 Send Commands for FT1 Port Loopback Send Command Function Loop Up Loop Down FDL Payload Loop Sends a loop up code to the remote end to initiate line loopback After a minimum of 4 5 seconds the port loops receive data back onto the T1 transmit path at the T1 interface The line type setting determines the coding scheme Sends a loop down code to the remote end to stop the line loopback condition Sends a loop up code to the remote end to initiate payload loopback FDL Disable Payload FDL Line Lo
292. llows for the following command filter flag and filter argument circuit lt circuit_name gt Displays information about the specified circuit only The output contains the following information Slot Module Conn Circuit Logical Line Index Line Type Line Number State WAN Protocol Rate Adaption Local Address Remote Address Name of the physical interface Description of circuit Logical line number for this line Type of line in use Unframed T1 ESF SF E1 E1CRC E1MF E1CRCMF or Unframed E1 Line number for this line assigned during configuration This line number uniquely identifies this interface and is not equal to any of the line numbers assigned to logical lines configured through this port State of the logical line as follows Up Down Init initializing LMI Wait Loopback Dying Dead or Not Pres not present WAN protocol enabled on this interface ATM Frame Relay LAPB Passthru PPP SMDS Standard or X 25 The number of bits and their positions within the timeslot as follows 64K Uses all 8 bits in the timeslot 56K MSB Uses 7 of the 8 bits in the timeslot does not use the most significant bit 56K LSB Uses 7 of the 8 bits in the timeslot does not use the least significant bit This parameter is used only when the logical line HDLC service is LLC1 It is a value in the range 1 through 7 in the address field of the HDLC packet 1 indicates DCE 3 indicates DTE
293. lows Table 8 18 Signal Level Options Cable Length Option 0 to 133 ft 0 0 dB 133 to 255 ft 0 5 dB 255 to 399 ft 0 8 dB 399 to 533 ft 1 1 dB 533 to 655 ft 1 5 dB By default the signal level is 0 0 dB Set the long haul or short haul signal level for this FT1 interface according to the length of the cable or as the carrier specifies Using Site Manager See the Signal Level dB parameter on page A 46 for information 8 40 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Running Port Tests Configuring FT1 Services Port tests affect all logical lines associated with a port Using Site Manager To run FT1 port tests complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure 1 You do this Set the test parameters in the Port Actions window See Setting Port Test Parameters earlier in this chapter System responds Click on Apply Site Manager sets the parameters to the values you specified To start a test click on the appropriate Send command Wait for the window to update before selecting another command Site Manager performs the test you selected Repeat step 3 for each test you want to run Click on Done The FT1 Port Parameters window opens Entering BERT Test Commands Table 8 19 describes the BERT test commands you can send on any FT1 port Table 8 19 Send Commands for FT1 Port Tests Send Command Function Reset BERT Counters Resets a
294. mation about the specified circuit only slot lt slot gt Displays information about the specified slot only lt circuit_name gt Displays information about the specified circuit only The output contains the following information Slot Conn Name of the physical interface Circuit Name of the circuit associated with this line Admin State Configured state of the serial port HW Address Physical address of the line The line driver fills in this address from the 48 bit address stored in the serial number PROM for this connector WAN Protocol WAN protocol enabled on this interface Operational State of the line driver as follows State Down Driver is not operational DSR Wait External equipment such as a modem DSU or CSU is not currently up and is not asserting a Data Set Ready signal Init Driver is initializing LMI Wait Driver is waiting for any of four WAN protocols to indicated that a link layer connection has been established to another entity This state applies to the frame relay SMDS ATM and PPP protocols Not Pres Driver is enabled but not yet started This state occurs for several reasons For example the link module may not be physically present in the chassis the software may be booting and has not yet initialized the driver software the slot may be running diagnostics or there may be a problem with the configuration Errors Number of errors for a specific circuit MTU Maximum t
295. may be running diagnostics or there may be a problem with the configuration Errors Receive Number of receive errors Transmit Number of transmit errors Bytes Receive Number of octets received without error Transmit Number of octets transmitted without error Frames Receive Number of frames received without error Transmit Number of frames transmitted without error Avg Pkt Receive Average packet size number of bytes divided by number of frames received without error Transmit Average packet size number of bytes divided by number of frames transmitted without error B 34 308648 14 00 Rev 00 BCC show Commands show hssi summary The show hssi summary command displays summary information for all circuits or a specific circuit or slot This command allows for the following command filters flags and filter arguments circuit circuit name Displays information about the specified circuit only slot lt slot gt Displays information about the specified slot only lt circuit_name gt Displays information about the specified circuit only The output contains the following information Slot Conn Name of the physical interfaces Circuit Name of the circuits associated with this line Admin State Configured state of the HSSI ports HW Address Physical addresses of the line Each line driver fills in this address from the 48 bit address stored in the link module number PROM for this connector WAN Protoco
296. mber frames Select the appropriate window size for your configuration 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 8 1 8 Max N1 Frame Size octets COM Connector for X 25 Interface Edit Line LAPB Edit LAPB Parameters 256 bytes 3 to 4500 bytes Specifies the frame size in bytes for a frame that the router or network transmits This number excludes flags and 0 bits inserted for transparency Select the frame size that suits your network configuration 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 8 1 9 Window Size COM Connector for X 25 Interface Edit Line LAPB Edit LAPB Parameters 7 1 to 127 Specifies the default transmit and receive window size for the interface This value is the maximum number of unacknowledged sequence frames that can be outstanding from the router or the network at any one time Specify the appropriate window size for your configuration 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 8 1 10 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring WAN Line Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Max N2 Retries COM Connector for X 25 Interface gt Edit Line gt LAPB gt Edit LAPB Parameters 10 1 to 64 Determines the value of the N2 retry count which is the number of retransmission attempts that the router makes per frame before it considers the line to be down The retry count is the maximum number of attempts following the
297. me Relay over T1 Lines 7 31 Figure 7 2 Default Circuit Name for Link Modules eee 7 97 Figure 7 3 Default Circuit Name for ASN Net Modules E seenaaly ECT Figure 8 1 Default Circuit Name for ARN Link Modules ee 8 23 Figure 9 1 Default Circuit Name for ARN Link Modules nsss 9 13 Figure 10 1 Multiline Circuit o A 10 3 Figure 10 2 Multiline Circuit Consisting of Three Synchronous Lines 10 4 Figure 10 3 Add Circuit Window TT ane E A T eee OT Figure 104 Circuit Definition WINDOW 1st eee t tenebo ken ek mk cix eer eed 10 8 Figure 10 5 Change Lines Menu Option uuuicesuice ernst nennt atten nena nth nuhi K anh 10 9 Figure 10 6 Edit Multiline Options Window eese 10 10 Figure 10 7 Logical Lines Window Showing Unused Logical Lines DIGE I OY iare seco o ipedO RE EPHO Re RPOUQRAIS etit dul nari vetat tdt dta aea teds 10 13 Figure 10 8 Logical Lines Window Showing the Circuit and Unused Logical Lines MCE1 Example sssesssss 10 15 Figure 10 9 Circuit Definition Vae 12i cieenre tte concave citu t tme cda 10 16 308648 14 00 Rev 00 xxvii Figure 10 10 Select Logical Line Window ccccccecscceeeseeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeaeesteneeetaes 10 16 Figure 10 11 Selecting an Unused Logical Line boeta eels P PE aont 10 17 Figure 10 12 Two Lo
298. meter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters NRZI Enable Configured FT1 Connector gt FT1 Logical Lines Disable Enable Disable The software uses this parameter only if you installed an FT 1 DSOA link module Disable specifies no communication of state changes between the subscriber s devices over the frame relay network Enable specifies NRZI line encoding to communicate such state changes If you are configuring the router connection to the host side and the NRZI settings of the host and CPE match use the Disable setting If they do not match set this parameter to Enable If you are configuring the router connection to the remote access side and the NRZI settings of the controller and CPE match use the Disable setting If they do not match set this parameter to Enable 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 6 1 66 NRZI Type Configured FT1 Connector gt FT1 Logical Lines Mark Mark Space The software uses this parameter only if you installed a FT1 DSOA link module and you set the NRZI Enable parameter to Enable This parameter specifies the NRZI encoding type in the frame on the logical line The Mark format uses a 0 bit to indicate a state change and a 1 bit to indicate no state change the Space format uses the opposite Ignore this parameter if you set NRZI Enable to Disable Otherwi
299. munication Using the BCC To set the WAN serial interface type navigate to the serial prompt for example box serial 2 1 and type wan type variable For example serial 2 1 Wan type asynchronous 308648 14 00 Rev 00 2 31 Configuring WAN Line Services Using Site Manager See the WAN Serial Interface Type parameter on page A 86 for information Setting the Asynchronous Baud Rate With the WAN Serial Interface Type parameter set to Async you can set the transmission speed in bits per second between the router and the modem You control the baud rate for asynchronous PPP using the Async Baud Rate parameter Set this parameter to a value that is greater than or equal to the speed at which the modem connects but that is independent of that speed For example you set a V 34 modem to its maximum modular connection speed of 28800 Kb s or higher However you could set the baud rate for a V 42bis or MNP 5 data compression modem with a high 4 to 1 compression ratio to 115200 baud By default the asynchronous baud rate is 9600 Select a baud rate from 1200 to 115200 baud Using Site Manager See the Async Baud Rate parameter on page A 86 for information Configuring Polled Asynchronous over TCP IP Line Parameters The implementation of polled asynchronous over TCP IP AOT uses the following line parameters e Pasync Parity Type e Pasync Data Bits e Pasync Stop Bits e Pasync Baud Rate For more informatio
300. n Recents 9 30 Ervablingy Bert rm X 9 30 giras DERT Teste eee 9 30 Seting the BERT Ncc EE E anaes 9 30 Sling the BERT Teel PAG sinnir imas ott pe Dua b P Poco upon 9 31 setting the Framing Method siris cod eo eiie d depi ax n ERE d san Edad 9 31 Enabling fne Intermallonal BID rendir en eso pre cesi er rent ERE uec ri E eue rms 9 31 Satiing the Line Coding Method serisinde aaa 9 31 Chapter 10 Configuring Multiline Services Overview of Multiline Configurations uuu oer entr a a a N 10 1 Teor Matine Cree mE 10 2 Physical and Logical CIGUIDS opio dete Freie nati rct o miep ru in be eade a Re 10 2 Benefits of a Multiline Configurator eicere nci ther re EXER en kan ER EH RECO RRRR 10 3 Multiline Example Sete ceeds bebo REESE poi O MT eens 10 3 POE CISION E 10 4 PAMOR ANNI TE 10 4 Multilink PPP T T ian ies ET uoni T ere RS Bandwidth on Demang BODY i deinen rei a eU rd abt ki ce pe 10 5 Configuring MINS SerVviGOB amussim tinea qr DE ag eq aua tia rude ud 10 5 Grouping Physical Lines into a Multiline Circuit 10 6 Adding Physical Lings Tod CEU Leonie etie omae at n rare p xbv pxae pia DORE Changing the Traffic Distribution Method maces fei erates TURN easels reai 10 9 308648 14 00 Rev 00 xxi Address Based Selection cccccccccccceeeeeeccssesseeeesecssseseeesesesssanessessssassseeeses 10 10 Random Selection re osebi arnan E T beast ibbessiais nie
301. n about configuring polled AOT see Configuring Polled AOT Transport Services 2 32 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring Synchronous Services Setting the Pasync Parity Type The Pasync Parity Type parameter sets the error detection method for isolating AOT packets that were altered or damaged during transmission Asynchronous equipment typically adds a parity bit to the end of a packet before transmission This allows the receiving router to detect a transmission error if it receives a packet with an unexpected parity The parity type options are Odd Even High 1 Low 0 or None Using Site Manager See the Pasync Parity Type parameter on page A 87 for information Setting the Pasync Data Bits The Pasync Data Bits parameter sets the length of a polled AOT packet to a specific number of data bits The parameter options are five six seven and eight Select the number of data bits that is appropriate for your network The default setting is eight Using Site Manager See the Pasync Data Bits parameter on page A 87 for information Setting the Pasync Stop Bits The Pasync Stop Bits parameter sets the interval at the end of a transmitted polled AOT packet allowing the receiving router to pause before accepting the next packet More stop bits create a longer pause at the receiving router Specify either one or two stop bits The default setting is two Using Site Manager See the Pasync Stop Bits parameter on page A 87 fo
302. nager See the BofL parameter on page A 70 for information 308648 14 00 Rev 00 2 5 Configuring WAN Line Services Setting the BofL Timeout The BofL Timeout parameter specifies the time between transmissions of BofL messages from this synchronous interface This parameter is valid only when BofL is enabled By default the BofL timeout period is 5 seconds Timeout occurs when five periods elapse without both a successful frame transmission and a successful reception When timeout occurs the router disables and reenables the synchronous line For example with this parameter set to 5 seconds the interface must successfully transmit and receive a frame within 25 seconds Timeout occurs in 25 seconds Set the BofL timeout to a value from 1 to 60 seconds on the interface Using the BCC To set BofL timeout navigate to the serial prompt for example box serial 2 1 and type bofl timeout integer For example serial 2 1 bofl timeout 20 Using Site Manager See the BofL Timeout parameter on page A 70 for information Setting the MTU The maximum transmission unit MTU is the largest frame that the router can transmit on this line For X 25 specify a value of at least 5 bytes more than the maximum packet size for the packet level The MTU is 1600 bytes by default Set the MTU from 3 to 4608 bytes on the interface 2 6 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring Synchronous Services Using the BCC To set the MT
303. nager See the Enable Disable parameter on page A 44 for information 8 6 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Setting the FT1 Line Type Configuring FT1 Services Select one of the line types frame formats in Table 8 3 for an FT1 line Table 8 3 FT1 Line Type Options BCC Option esf Site Manager Option ESF Description The default transmits extended superframes ESFs each consisting of 24 SF D4 frames provides enhanced signaling and synchronization For ESF lines you can also set the facility data link FDL mode See Setting the FDL Mode for ESF Line Types on page 8 11 sf SF D4 Transmits superframes each consisting of 12 individual frames unframed t1 Unframed T1 Use only with BERT mode to match the line type For more information on these frame formats refer to Setting the T1 Frame Type on page 6 4 Using the BCC To set the line type navigate to the ft1 prompt for example box ft1 1 1 and type port line framing variable For example ft1 1 1 port line framing sf Using Site Manager See the Line Type parameter on page A 45 for information 308648 14 00 Rev 00 8 7 Configuring WAN Line Services Setting the FT1 Line Coding T1 uses bipolar format for signals In bipolar format alternating positive and negative pulses on the digital line signify the number 1 and the absence of a pulse signifies 0 see Figure 6 2 A long string of zero
304. name Displays information about the specified circuit only slot lt slot gt Displays information about the specified slot only lt circuit_name gt Displays information about the specified circuit only Receive Errors The output contains the following information Slot Conn Name of the physical interface Circuit Name of the circuit associated with this line Bad Frames Number of bad receive frames caused by Frame Check Sequence FCS errors or nonoctet aligned errors Runt Frames Number of runt frames received on this line Frame Rejects Number of frame reject errors received on this line Frames Too Long Number of frames received on this line that exceed the MTU Overflow Frames Number of overflow errors received on this line in which the device s FIFO buffer overflowed before obtaining the next DMA cycle No buffer resources are available Transmit Errors The output contains the following information Slot Conn Name of the physical interface Underflow Frames Number of retransmission underflow errors These occur when the device s FIFO buffer empties before the device obtains the next DMA request 308648 14 00 Rev 00 B 59 Configuring WAN Line Services System Errors The output contains the following information Slot Conn Name of the physical interface Receive Rejects Number of reject frames received Transmit Rejects Number of reject frames transmitted T1 Timeouts Number of T1 timeouts detected
305. ncoding type used by that device 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 6 1 67 FT1 Port Application and Clock Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Port Application Mode Unconfigured FT1 Connector gt Port Application NONPRI NONPRI Specifies the port application to use on the logical lines Select NONPRI to indicate that all of the lines have a permanent circuit number and are for leased lines frame relay or permanent connections to other non ISDN PRI applications 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 1 16 308648 14 00 Rev 00 A 43 Configuring WAN Line Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Primary Clock FT1 CLOCK Connector gt Edit Slot gt DS1 E1 Clock Parameters Port 1 Ext Loop Internal Port 1 Ext Loop Identifies the primary source of the timing signals Select Internal to use the clock chip on the link or net module Select Port 1 Ext Loop to use the signal coming from port 1 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 1 1 4 Secondary Clock FT1 CLOCK Connector gt Edit Slot gt DS1 E1 Clock Parameters Internal Internal Port 1 Ext Loop Identifies the secondary source of the timing signals The router uses the secondary clock only when the primary clock is unavailable Select Internal to use the clock chip on the link or net module Select Port 1 Ext
306. nd allows for the following command filters flags and filter arguments circuit lt circuit_name gt Displays information about the specified circuit only slot lt slot gt Displays information about the specified slot only lt circuit_name gt Displays information about the specified circuit only 308648 14 00 Rev 00 B 33 Configuring WAN Line Services The output contains the following information Slot Conn Slot location of the HSSI module within the chassis and the connector number Circuit Name of the circuit associated with this line Operational State Current operating state of the line driver as follows BofLwait Driver is waiting for its own Breath of Life BofL frames to be successfully transmitted or for a BofL frame from the Nortel Networks router at the other end of the WAN connection This applies only to the Wellfleet Standard protocol CAwait External equipment such as a modem DSU or CSU is not currently up Init Module is initializing LMlwait Driver is waiting for any of four WAN protocols to indicate that a link layer connection has been established to another entity This applies to the frame relay SMDS ATM and PPP protocols Not Pres Module is enabled but not yet started This state occurs for several reasons For example the link module may not be physically present in the chassis The software may be booting and has not yet initialized the driver software the slot
307. ne PAIBITISEBES i i rre ett eec err n seared 8 23 Enabling or Disabling the Logical Ling rnnt naa 8 24 Seting Me CHK espi asirikuni ata i 8 25 Enabling or Disabling BoiL Messages 12 Lon rn mr RE peti VER Re RUE 8 25 SEG Me BAL DBDUL uci E ANI RDIGM OQ TaNNt prx da tec SORTE emanate 8 26 Enabling or Disabling Logical Line Loopback ceres 8 26 Viewing the Configured WAN Protocol ssssssssssseeeeeeeee nenne 8 27 Setting the HDLC Service Type T eee Kissed beck aati steels T 8 27 Setna the Local HDLC AODKBER aiiai A 8 28 Setting the Remote HDLC Address ccccceeeeceeeceeceeeeeeceaeseeeeeeseeaeeeeaeeesaes 8 28 Seting tie CRO SIZE mom 8 29 SEME MTSE ec 8 30 Enabling or Disabling Remote Loopback Detection aneis occides T 0 90 Configuring BERT Diagnostic Pattern Teste arsina 8 31 Config ng NAZI Line Encoding 5o ce caes heap tn Kcti n BAR ER tad ak bn nhe rain 8 32 D wl qz dde EE PHS 8 32 Using Site MACE uec sieh bona pound pO EF REO VR Even P LOC Fe D 8 32 Basin TRE SOS prasote a FEer xad dri dex uod Ser xU p ind d Eus Deni E DEAA 8 33 Allocating DGOS Wurm io eee hate testes 8 33 Selecting 56K Rate Adaption on FT1 T1 DSU CSU Lines 8 33 Using de BOG prunis PR E E EEE rere E 8 34 Deut e nET ei eii a EE 8 34 Eding Ding FeSell GE ssiwsssredareusataseaeduchessdduaneskkusededsieuduceshuuledsadsus 8 35 Testing FT LINGS 122m Pere T EE TAT iiai To sa 8
308. ne configuration is appropriate in most cases See Chapter 2 for information about changing the default serial line parameters Configuring an FT1 Port Using the BCC To configure FT1 services navigate to the box prompt and type box ft1 slot 1 connector 1 OR box ft1 1 1 This command configures FT1 services on slot 1 connector 1 Setting the External Clock State In the BCC the External Clock State parameter enables or disables external clock use External clock use is enabled present by default You can change this parameter to absent disabled Using the BCC To change the setting on the external clock navigate to the ftl prompt for example box ft1 1 1 and type 8 2 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring FT1 Services external clock state variable For example ft1 1 1 external clock state absent Configuring FT1 Services Using Site Manager Setting the You configure an FT1 interface port using the lines for ISDN Primary Rate Interface PRI permanent circuit non PRI applications For FT1 ports the default port application mode must be NONPRI This indicates that all of the lines have a permanent circuit number and are for leased lines frame relay or permanent connections for other non ISDN PRI applications Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Port Application window opens click on an unconfigured FT1 connector 2
309. nfiguring FT1 Services Valid options are e Mark This format uses a 0 bit to indicate a state change and a 1 bit to indicate no state change Space This format uses a 1 bit to indicate a state change and a 0 bit to indicate no state change See the NRZI Type parameter on page A 55 for information Assigning Timeslots After configuring logical lines you configure channels DSOs of bandwidth by grouping 1 to 24 contiguous or noncontiguous DSO timeslots per DS1 frame Allocating DS0s If you have an FT1 T1 DSU CSU or E1 module and an ISDN S T or U module installed on the same ARN router you can alternate assigned DSO channels with unassigned channels up to a maximum rate of 512 Kb s 8 channels Caution You cannot alternate assigned and unassigned channels across the 24 channels in a T1 line 768 Kb s If you have rates above 512 Kb s Nortel Networks recommends that you configure the DSO contiguously even though some noncontiguous channel configurations may work If you have an unsupported channel configuration the following message appears in the event log Connector COM lt COM gt Current timeslot assignment is not supported This message indicates an invalid assignment of DSOs for the specified connector you should have your service provider change the T1 channel assignments Using contiguous channel assignments addresses this problem Selecting 56K Rate Adaption on FT1 T1 DSU CSU Lines Rate ada
310. nge the line coding navigate to the mcel prompt for example stack mce1 1 2 1 and type port line coding variable For example mcel 1 2 1 port line coding ami mcel 1 2 1 port line coding hdb3 Using Site Manager See the Line Coding parameter on page A 26 for information Setting the MCE1 Alarm Threshold Time By default the MCE1 interface waits 2 seconds before logging a performance defect or anomaly as an event message Change the alarm threshold to any value from 2 to 10 seconds for this MCEI interface Using the BCC To change the alarm threshold navigate to the mcel prompt for example stack mce1 1 2 1 and type setup alarm threshold integer For example mcel 1 2 1 setup alarm threshold 3 7 10 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring MCE1 and MCT1 Services Using Site Manager See the Setup Alarm Threshold parameter on page A 26 for information Setting the Alarm Threshold Clear Time By default the clear time for performance failure conditions is 2 seconds If the defect or anomaly clears in this time interval MCEI records a performance cleared condition and logs an event message Change the alarm threshold clear time to any value from 2 to 10 seconds for this MCEI interface Using the BCC To change the alarm threshold clear time navigate to the mcel prompt for example stack mce1 1 2 1 and type clear alarm threshold integer For example mcel 1 2 14 clear alarm threshold 3 Using S
311. nterface Do not change the current value Caution Changing the WAN protocol does not reconfigure the interface and could disable it To change the configured WAN protocol delete and re create the WAN circuit See Configuring and Managing Routers with Site Manager for instructions Using Site Manager See the WAN Protocol parameter on page A 23 for information Displaying EIA Signals You can display Electronic Industries Association EIA signals on the serial ports of Nortel Networks AN ARN ASN and BN routers You can display request to send RTS clear to send CTS data send ready DSR data terminal ready DTR and data carrier detect DCD signals on any serial port including RS 232 C RS 422 and V 35 interfaces Note Only the true status of the EIA signals at the serial port are displayed and they are not interpreted based on the cable type For cable types other than straight through cables such as crossover cables you must interpret the signals You can display the EIA signals on a specific serial port by using the show command of either the Technician Interface TI or the BCC For information on using show commands with the TI see Using Technician Interface Scripts For the BCC use the command show serial eia status An active signal is displayed as H an inactive signal is displayed as L An asterisk denotes a signal whose state has changed since the last time the signal s
312. o a maximum of 2 048 Mb s full duplex You can configure synchronous interfaces to integrate IBM SDLC traffic in an internetwork Traffic is integrated by connecting local or remote IBM equipment directly to the synchronous interface and configuring either DLSw for SDLC or Transparent Sync Pass Thru features Customizing Synchronous Services Using the BCC or Site Manager Table 2 1 lists the synchronous line configuration tasks described in this chapter and indicates whether you can use the BCC or Site Manager to perform each task Table 2 1 Synchronous Line Configuration Tasks Task BCC Site Manager Page Enabling and Disabling Synchronous Services 4 V 2 4 Enabling or Disabling BofL Messages 4 y 25 Setting the BofL Timeout 4 v 2 6 Setting the MTU 4 V 2 6 Enabling or Disabling Remote Address Filtering V V 2 7 Setting the Clock Source V V 2 8 Setting the Internal Clock Speed V V 2 9 continued 2 2 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring Synchronous Services Table 2 1 Synchronous Line Configuration Tasks continued Task BCC Site Manager Page Setting the External Clock Speed V V 2 10 Setting the Signal Mode V V 2 10 Enabling and Disabling RTS Signals V V ppt Enabling and Disabling Burst Count 4 V 2 12 Specifying the Link Level Protocol V V 2 12 Setting the Transmit Window Size V 2 13 Se
313. ocal TCP to initialize a connection to the specified remote IP address specified in the Remote IP Address parameter Select the start protocol for this interface With the Start Protocol parameter set to Originate you must also configure the following Remote IP address e Remote port e Local port See the Start Protocol parameter on page A 3 for information Setting the Remote IP Address The router uses the remote IP address only when the asynchronous Start Protocol parameter is set to Originate The Remote IP Addr parameter specifies a remote TCP host with which the router communicates using the asynchronous interface You can specify any valid 32 bit IP address in dotted decimal notation as the remote IP address for this interface See the Remote IP Addr parameter on page A 3 for information 308648 14 00 Rev 00 3 3 Configuring WAN Line Services Specifying the Remote Port The router uses the remote port number only when the Start Protocol parameter is set to Originate The remote port number specifies a remote port for the TCP connection By default the remote port number is 7 You can specify any valid remote port number from 1 to 65535 for this interface See the Remote Port parameter on page A 3 for information Specifying the Local Port The router uses the local port number only when the Start Protocol parameter is set to Originate The local port number specifies a local port for the TCP connection for
314. of the point to point circuit For example if the remote address is DTE configure the local address as DCE If you configure X 25 on this line set this parameter to either DCE or DTE 7 42 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring MCE1 and MCT1 Services Using the BCC To specify the local HDLC address navigate to the logical line prompt for example stack mce1 1 2 1 logical line mce1 121 1 and type local hdic address variable For example logical line mcel 121 1 local hdlc address dce Using Site Manager See the Local HDLC Address parameter on page A 38 for information Setting the Remote HDLC Address Use the options listed in Table 7 15 to specify the 1 byte HDLC address of the remote MCE interface Table 7 15 Remote HDLC Address Options BCC Option Site Manager Option dce DCE dte DTE Seven An explicit address value 2 4 5 6 or 7 Use unique HDLC addresses for the local and remote interfaces at either end of the point to point circuit For example if the local address is DTE configure the remote address as DCE If you configure X 25 on this line set this parameter to either DCE or DTE Using the BCC To specify the local HDLC address navigate to the logical line prompt for example stack mce1 1 2 1 logical line mce1 121 1 and type remote hdlc address variable For example logical line mcei 121 14 remote hdlc address dte 308648 14 00 Rev 00 7 43 Config
315. of deliberate errors into the bit stream Caution Wait for the window to update before selecting another command In line loopback the signal does not go through the framing device To run FE port tests complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 Set the test parameters in the Port Actions window See Setting Port Test Parameters on page 9 27 2 Click on Apply 3 To start a test click on the appropriate Send command Repeat step 3 for each test you want to run Click on Done The FE1 Port Parameters window opens 308648 14 00 Rev 00 9 29 Configuring WAN Line Services Defining FE1 Port Line Testing Using the BCC To set the port line test parameters using the BCC complete the following tasks Setting the Error Insert Value To set the error insert value navigate to the port line test prompt for example box fe1 1 1 port line test 1 1 and type bert error insert variable For example port line test 1 1 bert error insert oneerror Enabling Bert Mode To enable BERT mode navigate to the port line test prompt for example box fe1 1 1 port line test 1 1 and type bert mode variable For example port line test 1 1 bert mode enabled Resetting BERT Testing To reset BERT testing set BERT messages back to zero navigate to the port line test prompt for example box fe1 1 1 p
316. of the date of shipment This warranty does not apply if the media has been damaged as a result of accident misuse or abuse The Licensee assumes all responsibility for selection of the Software to achieve Licensee s intended results and for the installation use and results obtained from the Software Nortel Networks does not warrant a that the functions contained in the software will meet the Licensee s requirements b that the Software will operate in the hardware or software combinations that the Licensee may select c that the operation of the Software will be uninterrupted or error free or d that all defects in the operation of the Software will be corrected Nortel Networks is not obligated to remedy any Software defect that cannot be reproduced with the latest Software release These warranties do not apply to the Software if it has been i altered except by Nortel Networks or in accordance with its instructions ii used in conjunction with another vendor s product resulting in the defect or iii damaged by improper environment abuse misuse accident or negligence THE FOREGOING WARRANTIES AND LIMITATIONS ARE EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES AND ARE IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION ANY WARRANTY OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE Licensee is responsible for the security of its own data and information and for maintaining adequate procedures apart from the Software to reconstruct lost
317. old Down Time parameter on page A 83 for information B Channel Override On AN and ANH routers with ISDN support only you can connect the ISDN B channel to a specific serial communications controller SCC By default the B channel is determined by the connector You can use the Sync B Channel Override parameter to specify which B channel this interface is using for ISDN Select BCHANNELI or BCHANNEL2 to explicitly assign the B channel 308648 14 00 Rev 00 2 29 Configuring WAN Line Services You can set the B channel to one of the following DEFAULT e BCHANNELI e BCHANNEL2 e FLOATINGB If your ISDN service provider offers only 2B D service the FLOATINGB option enables you to use only one B channel for dial service applications Floating B is an alternative if you cannot purchase 1B D service Select FLOATINGB to use only one B channel of ISDN which becomes BCHANNEL or BCHANNEL2 depending on the call setup procedures COMI and COM2 become available in this mode Configure the B channel on an AN or ANH ISDN interface Using the BCC To specify the B channel override navigate to the serial prompt for example box serial 2 1 and type bchannel override variable For example serial 2 14 bchannel override bchannel2 Using Site Manager See the Sync B Channel Override parameter on page A 85 for information Setting the IFTF Pattern The router transmits an interframe time fill IFTF pattern when ther
318. omplete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 Start at the MCE1 or MCT1 Logical Lines window 2 Click on Timeslots The MCE1 Timeslots window or the MCT1 Timeslots window opens This window represents the timeslots 31 for MCE1 24 for MCT1 3 Click on an Unused timeslot 4 Select the logical line to which you want to assign the timeslot A list of logical lines to which you can assign the timeslot opens 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each timeslot you want to assign or click on Select All to assign all timeslots to a logical line 6 Click on OK The MCE1 or MCT1 Logical Lines window opens 7 Click on Apply 8 Click on Done The Configuration Manager window opens Note For MCEI circuits timeslot 16 is unavailable when the Line Type parameter in the MCE Port Parameters window is set to EI MF or E1 CRC MF 308648 14 00 Rev 00 7 53 Configuring WAN Line Services Configuring ISDN PRI B Channels ISDN Primary Rate Interface PRI software eliminates the need for an external ISDN terminal adapter TA when attaching a Nortel Networks BLN or BCN router to an ISDN network The ISDN PRI software interface connects directly to an ISDN switched service network through an MCT1 or MCEI link module The Nortel Networks ISDN PRI software interface complies with the North American and European ISDN PRI standards The North Ame
319. on If you configure protocol prioritization the router uses this parameter to calculate line delay See Configuring Traffic Filters and Protocol Prioritization for information about protocol prioritization latency and queue depth Using the BCC To set external clock speed navigate to the serial prompt for example box serial 2 1 and type external clock speed integer For example serial 2 1 external clock speed 1200 Using Site Manager See the External Clock Speed parameter on page A 84 for information Setting the Signal Mode You use the Signal Mode parameter to set either balanced or unbalanced transmission on an interface depending on the signaling mode of the connected device Balanced transmission uses two conductors to carry signals unbalanced transmission uses one conductor to carry a signal with a ground providing the return path 2 10 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring Synchronous Services Using the BCC To set the signal mode navigate to the serial prompt for example box serial 2 1 and type signal mode variable For example serial 2 1 signal mode balanced serial 2 1 signal mode unbalanced Using Site Manager See the Signal Mode parameter on page A 73 for information Enabling or Disabling RTS Signals The RTS Enable parameter enables or disables the detection of request to send RTS signals on this interface Set this parameter to Enable if the connected device for exam
320. on variable For example logical line 1 1 remote loopback detection enabled logical line 1 1 remote loopback detection disabled Using Site Manager See the Remote Loopback Detection parameter on page A 53 for information 8 30 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring FT1 Services Configuring BERT Diagnostic Pattern Tests FT1 link modules support the bit error rate test BERT on individual logical lines You can enable or disable BERT mode using Site Manager only In BERT mode the router introduces deliberate error patterns into the transmitted bit stream on a single logical line It can generate patterns such as all ones all zeros or a quasi random signal sequence QRSS pattern Using Site Manager To enable BERT mode and specify the BERT diagnostic test pattern complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 Enable BERT Mode on the FT1 logical line Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 54 for information Site Manager enables BERT mode Specify the bit pattern transmitted during BERT diagnostics Click on Help or see the BERT Test Pattern parameter on page A 54 for information Site Manager specifies the bit pattern For more information about running BERT diagnostics see Testing FT1 Lines on page 8 35 308648 14 00 Rev 00 8 31 Configuring WAN Line Services Configuring NRZI Line Encoding You can
321. one of these options you can assign only one logical line to a timeslot See Configuring a DSOA Connection earlier in this chapter 7 44 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring MCE1 and MCT1 Services Using the BCC To set the rate adaption navigate to the logical line prompt for example stack mce1 1 2 1 logical line mce1 121 1 and type rate adaption variable For example logical line mcel 121 14 rate adaption adaption 64k Using Site Manager See the Rate Adaption parameter on page A 39 for information Setting the Interframe Time Fill Pattern The router transmits an interframe time fill IFTF pattern when there is no data to transmit on a channel You can select the IFTF pattern for data transmission across this logical line e Flags selects a Ox7E pattern 01111110 e Idles selects a OXFF pattern 111111 1 1 The router uses flags by default Using the BCC To specify the interframe time fill pattern navigate to the logical line prompt for example stack mce1 1 2 1 logical line mce1 121 1 and type interframe character integer For example logical line mcei 121 14 interframe character idles Using Site Manager See the Interframe Time Fill Character parameter on page A 39 for information 308648 14 00 Rev 00 7 45 Configuring WAN Line Services Setting the CRC Size By default the router uses the 16 bit CRC type The router appends a 16 bit CRC to the transmitted frames and p
322. ons navigate to the mce1 1 2 1 or mct1 1 1 prompt and type met1 1 1 pri Continue with the next section Setting the Clock Parameters on page 7 5 308648 14 00 Rev 00 7 3 Configuring WAN Line Services Using Site Manager To select the port application complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Port Application window opens click on an unconfigured MCE1 or MCT1 connector 2 Set the Port Application Mode parameter to NONPRI or PRI Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 24 for MCE1 networks or page A 28 for MCT1 networks 3 Click on OK The Edit Clock Parameters window opens Select NONPRI to indicate that all of the lines have a permanent circuit number and are for leased lines frame relay or permanent connections for other non ISDN PRI applications Select PRI to indicate that the lines are for switched circuits using ISDN Note The 120 ohm MCEI II link module supports ISDN PRI MCEI net modules support only non PRI applications If you try to configure an ASN MCE port for PRI Site Manager displays a warning to indicate that this version of MCEI does not support ISDN Continue with the next section Setting the Clock Parameters 7 4 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring MCE1 and MCT1 Services Setting the Clock Parameters Clock parameters define the timing sources
323. onyms Preface Indicates file and directory names new terms book titles and variables in command syntax descriptions Where a variable is two or more words the words are connected by an underscore Example If the command syntax is show at lt valid_route gt valid_route is one variable and you substitute one value for it Indicates system output for example prompts and system messages Example Set Trap Monitor Filters Shows menu paths Example Protocols IP identifies the IP option on the Protocols menu Separates choices for command keywords and arguments Enter only one of the choices Do not type the vertical line when entering the command Example If the command syntax is show ip alerts routes you enter either show ip alerts or show ip routes but not both This guide uses the following acronyms AMI ANSI ATM AUI B8ZS BCC BERT alternate mark inversion American National Standards Institute asynchronous transfer mode attachment unit interface bipolar with 8 zero substitution Bay Command Console bit error rate test 308648 14 00 Rev 00 XXXV Configuring WAN Line Services BofL BRI CC CCITT CPE CRC CSMA CD CTS DCE DDS DLSw DMCTI DSO DSOA DSO1 DSR DSU CSU DSX 1 DTE ESF FCS FDDI FDL FT 1 GOSIP HDB3 HDLC HSSI Breath of Life message Basic Rate Interface clear channel International Telegraph and Telephone Consultative Committee now ITU T
324. oopback send commands for QMCT1 or QMCT1 w DSOA lines only Wait for the Logical Line Actions window to update before selecting another Send command Repeat step 3 for each test you want to run Click on Done 7 66 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring MCE1 and MCT1 Services Table 7 24 Send Commands for Logical Line BERT Tests Site Manager Send Command Function Insert 1 Error Inserts a single nonrepeating error into the bit stream Insert 1 Error 1K Inserts a deliberate error into every thousandth position in the bit stream Insert 1 Error 1M Inserts a deliberate error into every millionth position Disable Insert Error Stops the insertion of deliberate errors into the bit stream Table 7 25 Send Commands for Logical Line Fractional Loopback Tests Site Manager Send Command Function Frac Loop Up Sends a loop up code to the remote end Clear Frac Loop Frac Loop Down Transmits a loopback deactivate code to the remote end Sends a loop down code to the remote end 308648 14 00 Rev 00 7 67 Chapter 8 Configuring FT1 Services This chapter describes the line services for fractional T1 FT1 circuits on a Nortel Networks router It contains the following sections Section Page Overview of FT1 Services 8 1 Configuring FT1 Services 8 2 Customizing FT1 Services Using the BCC or Site Manager 8
325. op CI Sends a loop down code to the remote end to stop the payload loopback Sends a Customer Installation Cl loopback message FDL Line Loop IA Sends a Cl loopback message indicating that it originates from the CSU FDL Line Loop IB Sends a Cl loopback message indicating that it originates from the DSU FDL Disable Line Loop Disables generation of FDL line loopback codes FDL Disable All Sends a universal loopback deactivate code to stop all loopback activity In payload loopback the signal loops through the T1 framing device before the received signal is looped back for retransmission In line loopback the signal does not go through the framing device 8 42 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Chapter 9 Configuring FE1 Services This chapter describes the line services for fractional E1 FE1 circuits on a Nortel Networks router It contains the following sections Section Page Overview of FE1 Services 9 1 Configuring FE1 Services 9 2 Customizing FE1 Services Using the BCC or Site Manager 9 5 Configuring a Non PRI Logical Line 9 12 Testing FE1 Lines 25 Overview of FE1 Services Nortel Networks supports FE1 circuits on BayStack ARN AN and ANH routers using the BCC and Site Manager FEI interfaces provide high density access to a digital access and crossconnect system DACS For unframed E1 an FE1 interface can transmit or receive up to 32 DSO chann
326. or nonreturn to zero inverted mark coding Set the line coding for the interface Using the BCC To set the synchronous line coding navigate to the logical line prompt for example box fe1 1 1 logical line boston and type sync line coding variable For example logical line boston Sync line coding nrz Using Site Manager See the Sync Line Coding parameter on page A 68 for information Enabling or Disabling Extended Addressing By default the router does not test the address length of frames on a synchronous interface With the Extended Address parameter enabled the router tests the first bit of the address to determine the length of the address in octets Enable or disable extended addressing for the interface Using the BCC To enable or disable extended addressing navigate to the logical line prompt for example box fe1 1 1 logical line boston and type extended address variable For example logical line boston extended address disabled Using Site Manager See the Extended Address parameter on page A 68 for information 9 22 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring FE1 Services Enabling or Disabling Remote Loopback Detection If the transmission of BofL messages is enabled on this logical line you can place the line in loopback detection mode If you place the line in loopback detection mode the driver brings down the line when it detects its BofL packets Using the BCC To enable or disabl
327. ording to the length of the cable or as the carrier specifies using Site Manager See the Signal Level dB parameter on page A 31 for information Enabling or Disabling the International Bit MCE1 Only By default MCEI does not use the international bit in E1 frames Enable or disable use of the international bit for testing an MCE interface using Site Manager See the International Bit parameter on page A 27 for information Running Port Tests Port tests affect all logical lines associated with a port Table 7 21 describes the BERT test commands you can send on any MCT1 or MCEI port Table 7 22 describes the loopback commands you can send on an MCTI port only Table 7 21 Send Commands for MCE1 and MCT1 Port Tests Site Manager Send Command Function Reset BERT Counters Resets all counters to 0 Insert 1 Error Inserts a single nonrepeating error into the bit stream Insert 1 Error 1K Inserts a deliberate error into every thousandth position in the bit stream Insert 1 Error 1M Inserts a deliberate error into every millionth position in the bit stream Disable Insert Error Stops the insertion of deliberate errors into the bit stream Note FDL loopback command options apply only when the MCTI line type is configured as ESF for testing For more information about FDL loopback codes see ANSI T1 408 ISDN Primary Rate Customer Installation Metallic Interfaces Layer 1 Specification 3086
328. ors essere rns T B 16 FiecsIVie ENOS Loose pere epa aen a doen eld peat uso URP ade CO D C dn d B 17 Wr dT REIR DU TT B 17 G RS OT IS em TU B 17 Show TIel TOISSEISI crearii nan Ato ad ede Re GU e and pde E RO REN Edd B 18 show ftle1 fdl att ctr RO B 19 BOE TL TRRUTIBI lt aucesacccanoadaictmnsrpascdcntenabdecanunetdcgannee bandanas dav i Oscu LE e RS E eR LG Paid cater B 20 costar ues or aur B 20 show ft1e1 sample ET TAT EIT aan dean AA T T PT TUN B 21 Show EIE cic mem B 22 ane TEIG T SORDRBEN 2s oasceooeu Ee Las EE DLLOU LES DnL eacren E B 23 Sbon dte INEST scciscsodesusednetesta a tease qateP ci cd Ru Ca Disp date UP AEE B 24 Gommands Tor HSSI Servico suisse abri ph attain Load iR er e Pet Sd bed EROR B 25 show hssi alerts rate TT T ere T ET eas TE B 26 SNe WAS lle GAN ee rd B 27 PR ETO iii a E en at ER ei aac Kata a t Ru us RE Foot dE B 29 Transmit Errors us EE ET M M B 30 viru Rire PER B 30 SD WR as aN ek sasha be ssn oe Ses a desea i eost an daek s ati a OR dedu cd ae eS B 31 PUSSIES EIOS crosci i rcc aar B 31 308648 14 00 Rev 00 xxiii WATS UE EWS yunus ieeraveentaesveubedcatesiuel axevubutdy ae EE ERE e EXE B 31 System Errors e E re T m ee baieti T B 32 show SSI SEU OS qm B 32 Sha iS ol S OI Gutasgssoncscne uncut D oA aded raa pacc dct dU uc e XU ad ain DET ae B 33 show hssi summary
329. ort line test 1 1 and type bert reset variable For example port line test 1 1 bert reset reset Setting the BERT Alarm Type To set the BERT alarm type navigate to the port line test prompt for example box fe1 1 1 port line test 1 1 and type bert send alarm variable For example port line test 1 14 bert send alarm ais alarm 9 30 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring FE1 Services Setting the BERT Test Pattern To set the BERT test pattern navigate to the port line test prompt for example box fe1 1 1 port line test 1 1 and type bert test pattern variable For example port line test 1 1 bert test pattern qrss Setting the Framing Method To set the framing method navigate to the port line test prompt for example box fe1 1 1 port line test 1 1 and type framing variable For example port line test 1 1 framing e1 Enabling the International Bit To enable the International Bit navigate to the port line test prompt for example box fe1 1 1 port line test 1 1 and type international bit variable For example port line test 1 1 international bit enabled Setting the Line Coding Method To set the line coding method navigate to the port line test prompt for example box fe1 1 1 port line test 1 1 and type line coding variable For example port line test 1 1 line coding hdb3 308648 14 00 Rev 00 9 31 Chapter 10 Configuring Multiline Services This chapter descr
330. ou can disable or reenable each logical line Using the BCC To enable or disable the logical line navigate to the logical line prompt for example box ft1 1 1 logical line 1 1 and type state variable For example logical line 1 14 State disabled Using Site Manager See the Enable Disable parameter on page A 50 for information 8 24 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring FT1 Services Setting the Clock Source In the BCC the Clock Source parameter indicates the default timing or clock source for transmitting data to the network Timing is set to internal by default which indicates that the logical line is on the network When the logical line is on either end of a private wire configuration set timing to network master on one end of the configuration and internal slave on the other end Using the BCC To change the clock source navigate to the logical line prompt for example box ft1 1 1 logical line 1 1 and type clock source variable For example logical line 1 1 clock source internal Enabling or Disabling BofL Messages Transmission of BofL packets is enabled by default on a logical line A BofL packet is sent as often as the value you specify for the BofL Timeout parameter You can disable or reenable BofL messages on the logical line Using the BCC To enable or disable BofL messages navigate to the logical line prompt for example box ft1 1 1 logical line 1 1 and type bofl vari
331. outs Memory Errors Number of reject frames received Number of reject frames transmitted Number of T1 timeouts detected The T1 timer is the link retransmission timer Link control frames are retransmitted when the T1 expires This timer tracks the number of timeouts Number of memory errors detected A memory error occurs when the DMA cycle expires without obtaining the bus within 26 ms Memory errors may indicate faulty hardware If this count exceeds five contact your Nortel Networks Technical Solutions Center 308648 14 00 Rev 00 B 57 Configuring WAN Line Services show serial eia status The show serial eia status command monitors EIA signals on a specific serial port An active signal is displayed as H an inactive signal is displayed as L An asterisk denotes a signal whose state has changed since the last time the signal status was reset The output contains the following information Slot Connector Name of the physical interface Circuit Name of the circuit associated with this line RTS Return to send CTS Clear to send DSR Data set ready DCD Data carrier detect DTR Data terminal ready B 58 308648 14 00 Rev 00 BCC show Commands show serial errors The show serial errors command displays receive transmission or system errors for all circuits or for a specific circuit or slot This command allows for the following command filters flags and filter arguments circuit circuit
332. ow the router to send XID frames Select Disable to prevent the router from sending XID frames Enable or disable the transmission of XID frames on this interface Using Site Manager See the Enable Rx Tx of XID Frames parameter on page A 22 for information 2 40 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring Synchronous Services Enabling or Disabling Receiver Ready RR Frames The Idle RR Frames parameter enables or disables the transmission and reception of receiver ready RR frames during periods when there are no information frame exchanges By default the router does not transmit RR frames on the LAPB interface When this parameter is set to On an RR frame is transmitted when no traffic is present on the physical media Enable or disable transmission of RR frames on this interface Using Site Manager See the Idle RR Frames parameter on page A 23 for information Selecting the Local Command or Response Address The Command Response Address parameter specifies the local command or response address which is the DTE or DCE value Select DTE for the DTE address select DCE for the DCE address The address is set to DTE by default Set the local address on this interface Using Site Manager See the Command Response Address parameter on page A 22 for information 308648 14 00 Rev 00 2 41 Configuring WAN Line Services Viewing the WAN Protocol You can see which protocol Standard PPP or X 25 is enabled on this i
333. ows enough time for multiple TCP keepalive messages and ACKs from the remote TCP host See the TCP KeepAlive parameter description for information If the port is listening TCP KeepAlive for an incoming connection you can specify a negative value for this parameter to mark the connection as inactive and defer resetting the connection until a connection request is received Specify a value in the range 65536 to 65535 or accept the default value 300 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 3 1 36 Cfg TxQ Length COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit Asynchronous Parameters None 1 to 255 bytes Specifies the maximum transmit queue length in bytes This parameter reduces the size of the driver transmit queue if the transmit queue is larger than the value of this parameter Specify a value in the range 1 to 255 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 3 1 37 A 6 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Cfg RxQ Length COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit Asynchronous Parameters None 1 to 255 bytes Specifies the maximum receive queue length in bytes This parameter reduces the size of the driver receive queue if the receive queue is larger than the value of this parameter Specify a value in the range 1 to 255 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 3 1 38 308648 14 00 Rev 00 A 7 Configuring WAN Line Services DSU CSU Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function
334. ple dsucsu 1 1 telco service cc64kbps Using Site Manager See the Option Mode parameter on page A 8 for information Selecting the Transmit Clock Source The Transmit Clock Source parameter determines the default transmit timing clock source for transmitting data to the network You can set the DSU CSU clock source as follows e Master external network Indicates that the router sets the clock an internal oscillator in the DSU creates the clock for a private wire configuration e Slave internal Indicates that the incoming data stream sets the clock a PLL internal to the DSU will recover and synchronize the DSU clock 4 4 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring BayStack DSU CSU Services For a Telco network set both ends to slave For a private wire configuration set one end to Master and the other end to slave The Transmit Clock Source parameter is set to slave by default Note that there can be only one clock source on a DDS line Using the BCC To change the clock source navigate to the dsucsu prompt for example box dsucsu 1 1 and type clock master variable For example dsucsu 1 1 clock master master Using Site Manager See the Transmit Clock Source parameter on page A 8 for information Resetting the Router In the BCC the Unit Reset parameter enables you to reset the router remotely causing it to terminate all connections The Unit Reset parameter is disabled cleared by default
335. ple a modem or a KG84A cryptographic device uses RTS CTS flow control Enable or disable RTS signals for the interface Using the BCC To enable or disable RTS signals navigate to the serial prompt for example box serial 2 1 and type rts enable variable For example serial 2 1 rts enable enabled serial 2 1 rts enable disabled Using Site Manager See the RTS Enable parameter on page A 73 for information 308648 14 00 Rev 00 2 11 Configuring WAN Line Services Enabling or Disabling Burst Count The Burst Count parameter provides performance tuning Enable sets single word DMA burst cycles Disable sets eight word burst cycles You should keep the Burst Count parameter set to Enable Disable the Burst Count parameter when excessive TxUflo or RxOflo errors occur on the Ethernet ports of the following e DSDE 5430 Dual Synchronous Dual Ethernet link module e DSE 5420 Dual Synchronous Single Ethernet link module Disable this parameter on the synchronous interface that is either running at a lower clock speed or carrying lower priority traffic If disabling Burst Count on only one DSDE interface does not eliminate errors on both Ethernet interfaces then disable the Burst Count parameter on both interfaces Using the BCC To enable or disable burst count navigate to the serial prompt for example box serial 2 1 and type burst count variable For example serial 2 14 burst count enabled serial
336. ple if you allocate channels 17 to 24 to circuit 1 on the first T1 connector you must make these channels idle or allocate them to circuit 2 on the second T1 connector Data and Voice Pass Through To enable data and voice pass through assign identical channels to data or voice on both T1 connectors For example if the first T1 connector allocates channels 1 to 8 to voice pass through and channels 9 to 16 to data pass through the second T1 connector must also allocate channels 1 to 8 to voice pass through and channels 9 to 16 to data pass through You can assign specific functions to T1 channels See the Mini Dacs parameter on page A 90 for information Editing E1 Services The following sections describe how to edit the line parameters for E1 link modules Section Page Enabling or Disabling E1 Services 6 10 Enabling or Disabling CRC 6 10 Enabling or Disabling High Density Bipolar Coding HDB3S 6 10 Setting the Clock Source 6 10 Assigning Channel Functions 6 11 See Chapter 1 for information about accessing the E1 Line Entry window Figure 6 4 6 8 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring E1 and T1 Services Configuration Mode local SNMP Agent LOCAL FILE Circuit Name E1 21 Enable Enable Line Type F1 Disable E1CRC4 HDB3S Support Enable Disable Clock Mode Internal Slave Manual Mini Dacs Idle Data Voice Migsitheee Circuit 2 Currently Selected Idle
337. polar violations in the fourth and seventh bit positions of the substituted code In the receive direction the B8ZS code is detected and replaced with eight consecutive binary zeros AMI line coding is also bipolar a binary zero is transmitted as zero volts and a binary 1 is transmitted as either a positive or negative pulse opposite in polarity to the previous pulse When configured for AMI line coding the FT1 link module remains synchronized upon receiving up to 45 consecutive zeros Select the line coding method 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 4 1 7 308648 14 00 Rev 00 A 45 Configuring WAN Line Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Signal Level dB FT1 Connector gt Edit Logical Lines gt Port Details gt FT1 Port Parameters 0 0 dB 15 dB 7 5 dB 0 0 dB 0 5 dB 0 8 dB 1 1 dB 1 5 dB Specifies the T1 transmit power level in decibels dB The DS1 values of 15 and 7 5 dB are long haul the carrier determines these values if 0 0 dB is not sufficient The DSX1 values of 0 0 0 5 0 8 1 1 and 1 5 dB are short haul they correspond to the cable length as follows 0 0 dB 0 to 133 ft 0 5 dB 133 to 255 ft 0 8 dB 255 to 399 ft 1 1 dB 399 to 533 ft 1 5 dB 533 to 655 ft Specify the decibel level based on the length of the cable or as the carrier specifie
338. pposite in polarity to the previous pulse When configured for AMI line coding the MCT1 link module remains synchronized upon receiving up to 45 consecutive zeros Note If the T1 receive path detects a B8ZS code word when the line is configured for AMI coding the router generates a log message and an SNMP trap Using the BCC To change the line coding navigate to the mct1 prompt for example box mct1 1 1 and type port line coding variable For example mct1 1 1 port line coding ami mct1 1 14 port line coding b8zs Using Site Manager See the Line Coding parameter on page A 30 for information 308648 14 00 Rev 00 7 19 Configuring WAN Line Services Setting the Signal Level The Signal Level parameter specifies the T1 transmit power level in decibels dB Line buildout conditions the signals to mitigate attenuation Line buildout also depends on the physical length of the T1 line The carrier determines signal levels on a long haul 0 to 6000 ft of cable T1 network interface If 0 0 dB is not sufficient for long haul the carrier determines values of 15 ds1 minus15 and 7 5 dB ds1 minus 7point5 Signal power for DSX 1 short haul 0 to 655 ft is based on cable length For DSX 1 decibel levels correspond to cable length as follows Table 7 6 Signal Level Options Cable Length BCC Option Site Manager Option 0 to 133 ft zero pointO 0 0 dB 133 to 255 ft dsx1 plus point5 0 5 dB
339. ppropriate number of flags 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 29 Local Address COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit SYNC Parameters 7 1 to 255 Specifies the 1 byte HDLC address of this synchronous interface This interface will receive only frames whose HDLC address matches this address Specify 1 for DCE 3 for DTE or any other address from 1 to 255 If you configure X 25 on this line set this parameter to 1 DCE or 3 DTE Specify a unique HDLC address for the local and remote interfaces at either end of a point to point connection If you configure a device at one end with a local address of 1 DCE and remote address of 3 DTE you must configure the device at the other end with a local address of 3 DTE and remote address of 1 DCE 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 30 308648 14 00 Rev 00 A 77 Configuring WAN Line Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Remote Address COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit SYNC Parameters 7 1 to 255 Specifies the 1 byte HDLC address of the remote synchronous interface This HDLC address is used to address all frames transmitted by this interface Specify a unique HDLC address for the local and remote interfaces at either end of a point to point connection If you configure a device at one end with a local address of 1 DCE and remote address of 3 DT
340. primary clock is unavailable Select Internal to use the clock chip on the link or net module Select Port 1 Ext Loop to use the signal coming from port 1 Select Port 2 Ext Loop to use the signal coming from port 2 Dual Port MCT1 only Select Auxiliary Ext to use an external source via BNC connectors 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 1 1 5 MCT1 Port Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID You access the MCT1 port parameters from the Configuration Manager window Enable Disable MCTI Connector gt Edit Logical Lines gt Port Details gt MCT1 Port Parameters Enable Enable Disable Enables or disables the MCT1 port Set to Disable only if you want to disable the MCT1 port 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 3 1 2 308648 14 00 Rev 00 A 29 Configuring WAN Line Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Line Type MCTI Connector gt Edit Logical Lines gt Port Details gt MCT1 Port Parameters ESF Unframed T1 ESF SF D4 Specifies the frame format ESF transmits superframes consisting of 24 individual SF D4 frames and provides enhanced signaling and synchronization SF D4 transmits superframes consisting of 12 individual frames Select the appropriate frame format for your T1 equipment Use Unframed T1 only with BERT mode to match the line type
341. ption determines the number of bits and their bit positions within a time slot The FT1 T1 logical line rate adaption is 64 Kb s per DSO You cannot change this rate 308648 14 00 Rev 00 8 33 Configuring WAN Line Services Using the BCC To assign a timeslot to a logical line navigate to the logical line prompt for example box ft1 1 1 logical line 1 1 and type time slots integer For example logical line 1 1 time slots 1 To assign multiple timeslots to a logical line type logical line 1 1 time slots 1 2 3 4 10 Using Site Manager To assign a timeslot to a logical line complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 Start at the FT1 Logical Line window 2 Click on Timeslots The FT1 Timeslots window opens This window represents the 24 FT1 timeslots 3 Click on an Unused timeslot A list of logical lines to which you can assign the timeslot opens 4 Select the logical line to which you want to assign the timeslot 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each timeslot you want to assign or click on Select All to assign all timeslots to a logical line 6 Click on OK The FT1 Logical Line window opens 7 Click on Apply 8 Click on Done The Configuration Manager window opens 8 34 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring FT1 Services Editing Line Resources If you run ST2 traffic on this logical line you can reserve bandwi
342. r See the Accept Loopback Request parameter on page A 33 for information Setting a Loopback Configuration When set this parameter immediately places the port in loopback mode without a request from the remote test equipment Set the loopback configuration by specifying one of the following options Table 7 8 Loopback Configuration Options BCC Option Site Manager Option Description payload loop Payload Loopback Received signals are looped through the T1 framer then looped back for retransmission This method maintains bit sequence integrity for information bits but does not maintain the integrity of frames or superframes line loop Line Loopback Received signals do not go through the framing device before being looped back out This method ensures minimum penetration no loop No Loopback The default this option deactivates any current loopback Using the BCC To change the loopback mode navigate to the mct1 prompt for example box mct1 1 1 and type loopback mode variable For example mct1 1 14 loopback mode payload loop Using Site Manager See the Loopback Configuration parameter on page A 33 for information 7 24 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring MCE1 and MCT1 Services Setting Relay Control The relay on the QMCT1 module automatically goes into loopback mode when a system power up reboot or crash or a hardware reset occurs You can control the state of the relay b
343. r arguments circuit circuit name circuit name Displays information about the specified circuit only Displays information about the specified circuit only The output contains the following information Slot Conn Circuit State Errors Receive Transmit Bytes Receive Transmit Frames Receive Transmit Slot location of the FT1 or FE1 module within the chassis and the connector number Name of the circuit associated with this line State of the line driver Down Init initializing Not Present enabled but not yet started or Up The Not Present state occurs for several reasons For example the link module may not be physically present in the chassis the software may be booting and has not yet initialized the driver software the slot may be running diagnostics or there may be a problem with the configuration Number of receive errors Number of transmit errors Number of octets received without error Number of octets transmitted without error Number of frames received without error Number of frames transmitted without error continued B 22 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Avg Pkt Receive Transmit Multicast Receive show ftle1 summary BCC show Commands Average packet size number of bytes divided by number of frames received without error Average packet size number of bytes divided by number of frames transmitted without error Number of packets rece
344. r Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Secondary Clock MCE1 CLOCK Connector gt Edit Slot gt DS1 E1 Clock Parameters Internal Internal Port 1 Ext Loop Port 2 Ext Loop Auxiliary Ext Identifies the secondary source of the timing signals The router uses the secondary clock only when the primary clock is unavailable Select Internal to use the clock chip on the link or net module Select Port 1 Ext Loop to use the signal coming from port 1 Select Port 2 Ext Loop to use the signal coming from port 2 Dual Port MCEI only Select Auxiliary Ext to use an external source via BNC connectors 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 1 1 5 MCE1 Port Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID You access the MCEI port parameters from the Configuration Manager window Enable Disable MCE1 Connector gt Edit Logical Lines gt Port Details gt MCEI Port Parameters Enable Enable Disable Enables or disables the MCEI port Set to Disable only if you want to disable the MCEI port 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 4 1 2 Line Type MCE1 Connector gt Edit Logical Lines gt Port Details gt MCEI Port Parameters El E1 E1 CRC E1 MF E1 CRC MF Specifies the frame format Select the appropriate frame format for your E1 equipment 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 4 1 6 308648 14 00 Rev 00 A
345. r information 308648 14 00 Rev 00 2 33 Configuring WAN Line Services Setting the Pasync Baud Rate The Pasync Baud Rate parameter sets the transmission speed for polled AOT packets between primary and secondary routers over a TCP connection The parameter options are 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 and 57600 The default setting is 600 Using Site Manager See the Pasync Baud Rate parameter on page A 88 for information Editing LAPB Protocol Services The Link Access Procedure Balanced LAPB protocol is a version of the high level data link control HDLC protocol which is an OSI data link layer standard This section describes the following e LAPB Implementation on Nortel Networks Routers e LAPB Parameters LAPB Implementation on Nortel Networks Routers The implementation of the LAPB protocol differs among Nortel Networks routers On the AN ANH ARN ASN and System 5000 routers and on the BN and LN routers with the Octal Sync link module LAPB is implemented in the software For all other link modules LAPB is implemented in the hardware and you cannot configure LAPB line parameters Nortel Networks routers use LAPB services to initialize the link between the router and the local DCE and to frame X 25 data packets before transmitting them to the DCE X 25 uses the LAPB protocol at the data link layer to Initialize the link between the DTE and the local DCE e Frame X 25 data packets before t
346. r more information on these frame formats refer to Setting the T1 Frame Type on page 6 4 Using Site Manager See the Line Type parameter on page A 45 for information Setting FDL Options Facility data link FDL options apply only when the FT1 line type is configured as ESF for testing Select one of the following ESF line types Table 8 17 ESF Line Types Option Description ANSI 403 The default conforms to the 1989 ANSI T1 403 specification Carrier to Customer Installation DSI Metallic Interface AT amp T 54016 Conforms to the 1989 AT amp T specification Requirements for Interfacing Digital Terminal Equipment to Services Employing the Extended Superframe Format None Disables the FDL mode Using Site Manager See the FDL Configuration parameter on page A 47 for information 308648 14 00 Rev 00 8 39 Configuring WAN Line Services Setting the Signal Level The Signal Level parameter specifies the T1 transmit power level in decibels dB Line buildout conditions the signals to mitigate attenuation Line buildout also depends on the physical length of the T1 line The carrier determines signal levels on a long haul 0 to 6000 ft of cable T1 network interface If 0 0 dB is not sufficient for long haul the carrier determines values of 15 and 7 5 dB Signal power for DSX 1 short haul 0 to 655 ft is based on cable length For DSX 1 decibel levels correspond to cable length as fol
347. r with 8 zero substitution B8ZS line coding replaces a block of eight consecutive binary zeros with an 8 bit B8ZS code For more information on B8ZS line coding see Enabling or Disabling Bipolar with 8 Zero Substitution B8ZS on page 6 5 AMI AMI line coding is also bipolar a binary 0 is transmitted as zero volts and a binary 1 is transmitted as either a positive or negative pulse opposite in polarity to the previous pulse When configured for AMI line coding the FT1 link module remains synchronized upon receiving up to 45 consecutive zeros Note If the T1 receive path detects a B8ZS code word when the line is configured for AMI coding the router generates a log message and an SNMP trap Using Site Manager See the Line Coding parameter on page A 45 for information 8 38 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring FT1 Services Setting the Line Type Select one of the following line types frame formats for your FT1 line Table 8 16 FT1 Line Type Options Option Description ESF The default transmits extended superframes ESFs each consisting of 24 SF D4 frames provides enhanced signaling and synchronization For ESF lines you can also set the facility data link FDL mode See Setting the FDL Mode for ESF Line Types on page 8 11 SF D4 Transmits superframes each consisting of 12 individual frames Unframed T1 Use only with BERT mode to match the line type Fo
348. rameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Burst Count COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit SYNC Parameters Enable Enable Disable This is a performance tuning parameter Enable sets single word DMA burst cycles Disable sets eight word burst cycles Leave this parameter enabled except when excessive TxUflo or RxOflo errors occur on the Ethernet ports of the following DSDE 5430 Dual Synchronous Dual Ethernet link module DSE 5420 Dual Synchronous Single Ethernet link module Disable this parameter on the synchronous interface that is either running at a lower clock speed or carrying lower priority traffic If disabling Burst Count on only one DSDE interface does not eliminate errors on both Ethernet interfaces disable it on both synchronous interfaces 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 17 Service COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit SYNC Parameters LLCI Transparent LLC1 LAPB Specifies the link level protocol for this line If you set this parameter to Transparent then raw HDLC mode is in effect LLC1 specifies connectionless datagram service it adds the HDLC address and control fields to the beginning of the frame Set this parameter as appropriate for this line If X 25 is enabled on this line you must set this parameter to LAPB 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 18 A 74 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID
349. ransfer unit size the buffer size for the serial port also the largest frame that can be transmitted or received across the serial port The value ranges from 3 to 4608 bytes B 54 308648 14 00 Rev 00 BCC show Commands show serial detail The show serial detail command displays detailed configuration and statistical information This command allows for the following command filters flags and filter arguments circuit circuit name Displays information about the specified circuit only slot lt slot gt Displays information about the specified slot only lt circuit_name gt Displays information about the specified circuit only The output contains the following information Name Name of the circuit associated with this line Number Number of the circuit associated with this line Slot Connector Name of the physical interface Admin State Configured state of the serial port Operational State State of the line driver as follows Down Driver is not operational DSR Wait External equipment such as a modem DSU or CSU is not currently up and is not asserting a Data Set Ready signal Init Driver is initializing LMI Wait Driver is waiting for any of four WAN protocols to indicate that a link layer connection has been established to another entity This state applies to the frame relay SMDS ATM and PPP protocols Not Pres Driver is enabled but not yet started This state occurs for
350. ransmit or receive over this port The router discards frames larger than this value Specify a value in the range 3 to 4608 bytes 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 6 1 55 Remote Loopback Detection Configured MCE1 or MCT1 Connector gt MCEI or MCT1 Logical Lines Disable Enable Disable Enables or disables detection of the driver s BofL packets provided that you set the Breath of Life BofL Enable Disable parameter to Enable If you select Enable and put the line into loopback mode the downstream driver will bring down the interface when it detects its BofL packets Select Enable or Disable 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 6 1 56 A 40 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters BERT Mode Configured QMCT1 or DMCTI Connector gt MCTI Logical Lines Disable Enable Disable Selecting Enable activates BERT mode To activate BERT mode select Enable and click on Apply You can configure this parameter for QMCTI link modules and DMCT1 net modules only 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 6 1 62 BERT Test Pattern Configured QMCT1 or DMCTI Connector gt MCT1 Logical Lines Ones Zeros Ones QRSS 2e15 2e15 Inverted 2e20 2e23 2e23 Inverted Specifies the bit pattern transmitted during BERT d
351. ransmitting them to the DCE The LAPB information field contains the X 25 packets When an X 25 packet reaches the destination router the LAPB protocol strips away the LAPB frame and delivers the packet to the network layer for further processing For detailed information on X 25 see Configuring X 25 Services 2 34 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring Synchronous Services LAPB Parameters This section describes how to edit LAPB parameters using Site Manager It covers the following topics Enabling or Disabling LAPB Services Setting the Station Type Setting the Control Field Setting the Maximum N1 Frame Size Setting the Window Size Setting the Maximum N2 Retry Count Setting the Maximum T1 Acknowledge Timer Setting the Maximum T2 Acknowledge Timer Setting the Maximum T3 Disconnect Timer Setting the Link Setup Action Enabling or Disabling Test Exchange Identification XID Frames Enabling or Disabling Receiver Ready RR Frames Selecting the Local Command or Response Address Viewing the WAN Protocol When you edit an Octal Sync link module line or any synchronous line on Nortel Networks AN ANH ARN ASN or System 5000 routers the router automatically configures the LAPB protocol if you configure a circuit for the X 25 protocol The Edit SYNC Parameters window for these lines includes an additional button for editing LAPB parameters Click on the LAPB button to display the Edit LAPB Parameters window Figure 2 3
352. re determining that the link is disconnected A value of 1 indicates that once the router completes the frame exchange to bring down the link it considers the link disconnected Specify the amount of time that you want the router to wait before it considers the link disconnected 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 8 1 14 308648 14 00 Rev 00 A 21 Configuring WAN Line Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Initiate Link Setup Action COM Connector for X 25 Interface gt Edit Line gt LAPB gt Edit LAPB Parameters Active Active Passive Identifies whether the router initiates link setup or waits for the network to initiate link setup Select Active if you want the router to initiate link setup select Passive if you want the network to initiate link setup 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 8 1 16 Enable Rx Tx of XID Frames COM Connector for X 25 Interface gt Edit Line gt LAPB gt Edit LAPB Parameters Disable Enable Disable Enables or disables the transmission and reception of test XID frames by the router Select Enable to allow the router to send XID frames select Disable to prevent the router from sending XID frames 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 8 1 17 Command Response Address COM Connector for X 25 Inte
353. rface Edit Line LAPB Edit LAPB Parameters DTE DTE DCE Specifies the local command or response address which is the DTE or DCE value expressed as a single octet Select DTE for the DTE address select DCE for the DCE address 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 8 1 18 A 22 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters WAN Protocol COM Connector for X 25 Interface gt Edit Line gt LAPB gt Edit LAPB Parameters Standard Standard X 25 Specifies the WAN protocol you want to use on this interface Do not change this value Use the Circuit List window to change the protocol 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 8 1 20 Network Link Type COM Connector for X 25 Interface gt Edit Line gt LAPB gt Edit LAPB Parameters NET2 GOSIP NET2 Sets the link type used with the X 25 network hardware Select NET2 or GOSIP 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 5 1 8 1 39 Idle RR Frames COM Connector for X 25 Interface gt Edit Line gt LAPB gt Edit LAPB Parameters Off On Off Enables or disables the transmission and reception of RR frames during periods when there are no information frame exchanges When this parameter is set to On an RR frame is transmitted when no traffic is present on the physical m
354. rican standard provides 23 B channels of 64 Kb s each and one 64 Kb s D channel The European standard provides 30 B channels and one D channel Using the BCC To configure ISDN PRI B channels complete the following tasks 1 To configure PRI navigate to the mcel or mct1 prompt for example stack mce1 1 2 1 and type mcel 1 2 1 pri 2 Toassign a timeslot to the B channel type pri 1 2 1 channels 1 You can assign a timeslot to all channels or from 1 to 23 channels To assign multiple timeslots to a B channel type pri 1 2 14 channels 1 2 3 4 3 To set the MTU size type pri 1 2 1 mtu 100 You can set the MTU size from 3 to 4608 bytes The default is 1600 bytes 7 54 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Using Site Manager Configuring MCE1 and MCT1 Services To configure ISDN PRI B channels complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds Startat the PRI Logical Lines window 2 Click on B Channels The MCE1 Timeslots window or the MCT1 Timeslots window opens This window represents the timeslots 31 for MCE1 24 for MCT1 3 Select a timeslot to assign to the B channel 4 Select B Channel Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each timeslot you want to assign or click on Select All to assign all timeslots to the B channel 6 Click on OK 9 7 Select the B channel in the scroll box Edit the MTU Size bytes parameter for the B channel The router uses the MT
355. ring MCE1 and MCT1 Services Setting the Remote FDL HDLC Address Mode You can select the FDL HDLC address mode to determine how the local FDL responds to HDLC addresses in messages from the remote FDL Set the FDL address mode to by or az for this MCT1 interface Using the BCC To set the FDL HDLC address mode navigate to the mct1 prompt for example box mct1 1 1 and type fdl target hdic address variable For example mct1 1 14 fdl target hdlc address az Using Site Manager See the Remote FDL HDLC Address Mode parameter on page A 32 for information Accepting or Rejecting Port Loopback Requests By default the MCT1 port accepts requests from a remote device to go into loopback mode During loopback the port loops receive data back onto the T1 transmit path The remote or intermediate test equipment then performs diagnostics on the network between the equipment and the port You can disable detection of remote loop up and loop down code to prevent the port from accepting loopback requests With Accept Loopback Request enabled see Setting a Loopback Configuration to set the type of loopback Using the BCC To enable or disable the detection of remote loop up and loop down code navigate to the mct1 prompt for example box mct1 1 1 and type accept loopback request variable For example mct1 1 14 accept loopback request disabled 308648 14 00 Rev 00 7 23 Configuring WAN Line Services Using Site Manage
356. ring WAN Line Services Text Conventions This guide uses the following text conventions angle brackets lt gt bold text braces brackets ellipsis points Indicate that you choose the text to enter based on the description inside the brackets Do not type the brackets when entering the command Example If the command syntax is ping ip address you enter ping 192 32 10 12 Indicates command names and options and text that you need to enter Example Enter show ip alerts routes Example Use the dinfo command Indicate required elements in syntax descriptions where there is more than one option You must choose only one of the options Do not type the braces when entering the command Example If the command syntax is show ip alerts routes you must enter either show ip alerts or show ip routes but not both Indicate optional elements in syntax descriptions Do not type the brackets when entering the command Example If the command syntax is show ip interfaces alerts you can enter either show ip interfaces or show ip interfaces alerts Indicate that you repeat the last element of the command as needed Example If the command syntax is ethernet 2 1 parameter value you enter ethernet 2 1 and as many parameter value pairs as needed XXXIV 308648 14 00 Rev 00 italic text screen text separator gt vertical line Acr
357. rm threshold clear time to any value from 2 to 10 seconds Using the BCC To set the alarm threshold clear time navigate to the mct1 prompt for example box mct1 1 1 and type clear alarm threshold integer For example mct1 1 1 clear alarm threshold 3 Using Site Manager See the Clear Alarm Threshold seconds parameter on page A 32 for information 308648 14 00 Rev 00 7 21 Configuring WAN Line Services Setting the FDL Mode for ESF Line Types The MCTI interface selects a facility data link FDL mode only when the Line Type parameter is configured as ESF see Setting the MCT1 Line Type earlier in this chapter Select one of the following ESF line types Table 7 7 ESF Line Types BCC Option Site Manager Option Description ansi 403 ANSI 403 The default conforms to the 1989 ANSI T1 403 specification Carrier to Customer Installation DSI Metallic Interface att 54016 AT amp T 54016 Conforms to the 1989 AT amp T specification Requirements for Interfacing Digital Terminal Equipment to Services Employing the Extended Superframe Format none None Disables the FDL mode Using the BCC To set the FDL mode navigate to the mct1 prompt for example box mct1 1 1 and type facilities data link integer For example mct1 1 1 facilities data link att 54016 Using Site Manager See the FDL Configuration parameter on page A 32 for information 7 22 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configu
358. rmation 308648 14 00 Rev 00 2 13 Configuring WAN Line Services Setting Minimum Frame Spacing The Minimum Frame Spacing parameter specifies the minimum number of flags transmitted between adjacent frames on this interface The interface transmits 1 frame by default Set frame spacing to a value from 1 to 32 flags for the interface Using the BCC To set frame spacing navigate to the serial prompt for example box serial 2 1 and type minimum frame space integer For example serial 2 1 minimum frame space 3 Using Site Manager See the Minimum Frame Spacing parameter on page A 77 for information Specifying Point to Point Addresses One end of a point to point circuit is designated as data communications equipment DCE and is assigned an address of 01 the other end of the circuit is designated as data terminal equipment DTE and is assigned an address of 03 Note The remote and local addresses must be 1 DCE or 3 DTE if you configure X 25 on a line If you configure a device with a local address of 1 and remote address of 3 you must configure the device at the other end of the point to point circuit with a local address of 3 and remote address of 1 Conventional DCE DTE addressing is inadequate however for multiple communication channels enabled by a common satellite link As illustrated in Figure 2 1 a common satellite relay link provides a virtual point to point link between routers A and X B an
359. rnal Auxiliary Ext Uses an external source via port 1 ona QMCT1 Using the BCC To set the secondary clock source navigate to the mctl prompt for example box mct1 1 1 and type secondary clock variable For example mct1 1 1 secondary clock loop2 7 28 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring MCE1 and MCT1 Services Using Site Manager See the Secondary Clock parameter on page A 35 for information Setting the Loop Clock In the BCC the Loop Clock State parameter specifies the MCEI port s loop clock status You can set this parameter to present up which is the default or absent down Using the BCC To set the loop clock state navigate to the mcel prompt for example stack mce1 1 2 1 and type loop clock state variable For example mcel 1 2 1 loop clock state absent Setting the External Clock In the BCC the External Clock State parameter indicates whether the external clock is operational You can set this parameter to present up which is the default or absent down Using the BCC To set the external clock state navigate to the mcel prompt for example stack mce1 1 2 1 and type external clock state variable For example mcel 1 2 14 external clock state absent Setting Buffer Credits for MCT1 See Setting Buffer Credits for MCE1 on page 7 14 for details about how to set the Transmit Buffer Use Credits and Receive Buffer Use Credits parameters using the BCC 308
360. router configuration file that already contains the appropriate WAN circuits for the hardware configuration See Configuring and Managing Routers with Site Manager for information about adding circuits to a configuration file 308648 14 00 Rev 00 4 1 Configuring WAN Line Services Configuring DSU CSU Services You can configure DSU CSU services using the BCC or Site Manager Note The default serial line configuration is usually appropriate See Chapter 2 for information about changing the default synchronous line parameters Using the BCC To configure DSU CSU services navigate to the box prompt and type box dsucsu slot 1 connector 1 OR box dsucsu 1 1 This command configures DSU CSU services on slot 1 connector 1 Note You can configure DSU CSU services only on slot 1 connector 1 or slot 1 connector 2 Using Site Manager To configure DSU CSU services complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Edit Connector window opens click on the COM connector for the DSU CSU circuit 2 Click on Edit DSU CSU The Edit Adapter Module DSU CSU Parameters window opens 3 Click on OK to accept the default configuration or edit the parameters before clicking on OK to initialize the changes 4 2 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring BayStack DSU CSU Services Customizing DSU CSU Services Using the
361. rs 32 bit 16 bit 32 bit Specifies an error detection scheme You can choose either 16 bit standard ITU T or 32 bit extended to detect errors in the packet Set this parameter to either 16 bit or 32 bit making sure that the remote end of the HSSI connection is configured with the same value 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 7 1 15 Carrier Loss Debounce Time out HSSI Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit HSSI Parameters 0 0 to 2147483647 seconds Determines how many seconds the line driver waits after losing the carrier signal before transitioning to the Carrier Lost state If the carrier signal returns before reaching this threshold the driver never enters the Carrier Lost state For most lines you want the driver to immediately transition to the Carrier Lost state upon detecting carrier loss For a problem line however you can specify a number of seconds for the router to sense carrier loss before entering the Carrier Lost state 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 7 1 64 A 16 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters Parameter Loopback Configuration Path HSSI Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit HSSI Parameters Default No_Loopback Options No_Loopback Local Digital Local Line Remote Line Function Sets the DTE loopback mode over normal full duplex operation DTE loopback is a diagnostic test that causes the DTE to transmit a signal to the DCE The DTE then waits for the DCE to return the signal The DCE provides the transmit and r
362. rt is in BERT mode it can generate patterns such as all ones all zeros or a QRSS pattern Use Site Manager to set the BERT test pattern See the BERT Test Pattern parameter on page A 54 for information Setting the Line Coding Method How you set line coding depends on whether you are testing an MCE1 or MCT1 line e The MCEI port uses HDB3 transmit and receive line coding by default You can select AMI line coding instead e The MCT port uses B8ZS transmit and receive line coding by default You can select AMI line coding instead For a description of these line coding methods see Setting the MCEI Line Coding or Setting the MCT1 Line Coding on pages 7 9 and 7 19 respectively Setting the Line Type The line type setting depends on whether you are testing an MCEI or MCTI line e MCE line Select the appropriate frame format for the associated E1 equipment you are testing e El The default EI CRC Adds a 4 byte CRC trailer at the end of each frame e MCTI line Select the appropriate frame format for testing e ESF The default FDL port actions apply SE DA For a detailed description of SF and ESF formats see Setting the T1 Frame Type in Chapter 6 308648 14 00 Rev 00 7 59 Configuring WAN Line Services Setting FDL Options MCT1 Only Facility data link FDL options apply only when the MCTI line type is configured as ESF for testing Select one of the following ESF line types using Site M
363. s 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 3 1 6 e o o o o Setup Alarm Threshold seconds FT1 Connector gt Edit Logical Lines gt Port Details gt FT1 Port Parameters 2 seconds 2 to 10 seconds Specifies the time in seconds that FT1 tolerates a performance defect or anomaly If the performance defect or anomaly is still present when this time interval expires FT1 records a performance failure and logs an event message Set the timer value 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 3 1 7 A 46 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters Clear Alarm Threshold seconds FT1 Connector gt Edit Logical Lines gt Port Details gt FT1 Port Parameters 2 seconds 2 to 10 seconds Specifies the clear time in seconds for performance failure conditions If the defect or anomaly clears in this time interval FT1 records a performance cleared condition and logs an event message Set the timer value 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 3 1 8 FDL Configuration FT1 Connector gt Edit Logical Lines gt Port Details gt FT1 Port Parameters ANSI 403 ANSI 403 AT amp T 54016 None Selects a facility data link FDL mode only when the line is configured with an ESF line type The default ANSI 403 conforms to the 1989 ANSI T
364. s continued Letter Designator Circuit Type F FDDI O Token ring See Configuring Ethernet FDDI and Token Ring Services To edit a circuit complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Circuit List window select the circuit and click on Edit The Circuit Definition window opens 2 Choose Lines Edit Lines The Edit Lines window opens listing the selected circuit s lines by slot number and connector name 3 Select the line you want to edit and click on Edit The Configuration Manager displays the appropriate Edit Lines window for the circuit type Only multichannel and multiline circuits have more than one line listed in the Edit Lines window 4 Edit the line parameters The circuit type determines how you edit line services Table 1 2 shows where to go for information for each circuit type Table 1 2 WAN Line Types Line Type Go To Synchronous LAPB Chapter 2 Asynchronous Chapter 3 DSU CSU BayStack routers only Chapter 4 HSSI Chapter 5 E1 T1 Chapter 6 MCE1 MCT1 Chapter 7 continued 1 6 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Getting Started Table 1 2 WAN Line Types continued Line Type Go To FT1 Chapter 8 FE1 Chapter 9 Multiline synchronous HSSI T1 E1 or MCT1 MCE1 Chapter 10 ATM DXI Chapter 2 COM line or Chapter 5 HSSI line ATM FRE
365. s is 1 the DTE address is 3 Select DCE DTE or specify an explicit address value 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 6 1 17 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Site Manager Parameters CRC Size Configured FT1 Connector gt FT1 Logical Lines 16 bit CRC 32 bit CRC 16 bit CRC Specifies the CRC type With 16 bit CRC the router appends a 16 bit CRC to the transmitted frames and performs a 16 bit CRC on received frames With 32 bit CRC the router appends a 32 bit CRC to transmitted frames and performs a 32 bit CRC on received frames Set the CRC size 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 6 1 20 MTU Size bytes Configured FT1 Connector gt FT1 Logical Lines 1600 bytes 3 to 4608 bytes Specifies the transmit receive buffer size MTU to configure the largest frame that the router can transmit or receive over this port The router discards frames larger than this value Specify a value in the range 3 to 4608 bytes 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 6 1 55 Remote Loopback Detection Configured FT1 Connector gt FT1 Logical Lines Disable Enable Disable Enables or disables detection of the driver s BofL packets provided that you set the Breath of Life BofL Enable Disable parameter to Enable If you select Enable and pu
366. s for a specific circuit MTU Maximum transfer unit size the buffer size for the FT1 or FE1 port also the largest frame that can be transmitted or received across the Fti or FE1 port The value ranges from 3 to 4608 bytes show ft1e1 bert stats The show ft1e1 bert stats command displays statistics about BERT testing for the circuit This command allows for the following command filters flags and filter arguments circuit circuit name Displays information about the specified circuit only circuit name Displays information about the specified circuit only 308648 14 00 Rev 00 BCC show Commands The output contains the following information Slot Connector Name of the physical interface Circuit Name of the circuit associated with this line Bert Mode Indicates whether BERT Mode is enabled or disabled on this line Bits Number of bits tested Bit Errors Number of bit errors detected show ft1e1 detail The show ft1e1 detail command displays detailed configuration and statistical information This command allows for the following command filters flags and filter arguments circuit lt circuit_name gt Displays information about the specified circuit only circuit name Displays information about the specified circuit only The output contains the following information Name Name of the circuit associated with this line Number Number of the circuit associated with this line Slot Connector Name
367. s on customizing a line service 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Getting Started Using Site Manager Note This guide assumes that you are working with a router configuration file that already contains the appropriate WAN circuits for the hardware configuration See Configuring and Managing Routers with Site Manager for information about adding circuits to a configuration file To access line parameters complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Site Manager main window choose The Configuration Manager window Tools Configuration Manager then opens select the local or remote configuration file for the router 2 Choose Circuits gt Edit Circuits The Circuit List window opens Note For many circuit types you can simply click on the configured connector in the Configuration Manager window and then click on Edit Line in the window The Circuit List identifies all circuits in the configuration file using an abbreviated name and number Table 1 1 lists the Configuration Manager abbreviation for each circuit type Table 1 1 Site Manager Abbreviations for Circuit Types Letter Designator Circuit Type E1 E1 H HSSI MCE1 MCE1 MCT1 MCT1 S Synchronous T1 T1 E Ethernet continued 308648 14 00 Rev 00 1 5 Configuring WAN Line Services Table 1 1 Site Manager Abbreviations for Circuit Type
368. s received with CRC errors Long Frames Number of frames received that exceeded the MTU size Abort Frames Number of frames received with abort errors B 46 308648 14 00 Rev 00 BCC show Commands show mct1e1 stats The show mctte1 stats command displays MCTI MCEI input output statistical information for all MCTI MCEI circuits or for a specific circuit This command allows for the following command filter flag and filter argument circuit lt circuit_name gt Displays information about the specified circuit only The output contains the following information Slot Module Conn Name of the physical interface Circuit Name of the circuit associated with this line Logical Line Index Logical line number for this line Receive Bytes Number of octets received without error Receive Frames Number of frames received without error Transmit Bytes Number of octets transmitted without error Transmit Frames Number of frames transmitted without error Total Errors Total number of errors received A single frame may receive more than one error 308648 14 00 Rev 00 B 47 Configuring WAN Line Services show mctie1 summary The show mct e1 summary command displays MCTI MCEI summary information for all MCT1 MCE1 circuits or for a specific circuit This command allows for the following command filter flag and filter argument circuit circuit name Displays information about the specified circuit only The output con
369. s to a digital signal level zero DSO with 8 bit words T1 uses two types of frame formats e D4 Format e ESF Format The frame format of the interface should match the frame format required by the associated T1 equipment D4 Format The D4 format or superframe format SF is the original T1 frame format A D4 frame consists of e One framing bit e A DSO timeslot for each channel on the line A DSO timeslot is an 8 bit sample from a channel A T1 line generates 8000 D4 frames per second ESF Format The D4 format SF does not allow testing of a digital line while the line is in use To allow such testing you can use the extended superframe format ESF An ESF frame comprises 24 D4 frames A D4 frame contains one framing bit An ESF frame contains 24 framing bits that it uses for the following purposes e Synchronization 6 bits e Error checking 6 bit CRC e Diagnostic data channel 12 bits 6 4 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring E1 and T1 Services By default the T1 interface uses ESF format Set the frame type for this interface See the Frame Type parameter on page A 88 for information Enabling or Disabling Bipolar with 8 Zero Substitution B8ZS T1 uses bipolar format for signals In bipolar format alternating positive and negative pulses on the digital line signify the number 1 and the absence of a pulse signifies 0 Figure 6 2 Data 0 0 1 1 0 1 0 0 43V Line voltage 0 3V LS0009A Fig
370. s would cause the line to lose synchronization due to lack of pulses Nortel Networks provides a line coding mechanism to maintain synchronization Table 8 4 lists the line coding options Table 8 4 FT1 Line Coding Options BCC Option Site Manager Option Description b8zs B8ZS The default bipolar with 8 zero substitution B8ZS line coding replaces a block of eight consecutive binary zeros with an 8 bit BBZS code For more information on B8ZS line coding see Enabling or Disabling Bipolar with 8 Zero Substitution B8ZS on page 6 5 ami AMI AMI line coding is also bipolar a binary 0 is transmitted as zero volts and a binary 1 is transmitted as either a positive or negative pulse opposite in polarity to the previous pulse When configured for AMI line coding the FT1 link module remains synchronized upon receiving up to 45 consecutive zeros Note If the T1 receive path detects a B8ZS code word when the line is configured for AMI coding the router generates a log message and an SNMP trap Using the BCC To set the line coding navigate to the ft1 prompt for example box ft1 1 1 and type port line coding variable For example ft1 1 1 port line coding ami 8 8 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring FT1 Services Using Site Manager See the Line Coding parameter on page A 45 for information Setting the Signal Level The Signal Level parameter specifies the T1 transmit power
371. se if you are configuring the router connection to The host side determine which device on that side is using NRZI and match this parameter to the encoding type used by that device The remote access side determine which device on that side is using NRZI and match this parameter to the encoding type used by that device 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 6 1 67 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring WAN Line Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Line Resources Configured FT1 Connector gt Adapter Module FT1 Logical Lines Edit Edit Provides access to the Edit Line Resources window to manage reservable bandwidth for ST2 traffic Select the parameter and click on Values The Edit Connector window appears Click on Edit Line Resources to access the Resource Manager None FE1 Line Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID You access the Port Application Mode parameter from the Port Application window Port Application Mode FE1 Connector gt Port Application NONPRI NONPRI Specifies the port application to use on the logical lines Select NONPRI to indicate that all of the lines have a permanent circuit number and are for leased lines frame relay or permanent connections to other non ISDN PRI applications 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 1 16 A 56 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Site Manager Parameters FE1 Clock Parameters
372. sec Number of octets transmitted without error Output Rate pkts sec Number of packets transmitted without error Input Lack of Resource Number of packets received and discarded because of lack of resources for example buffers Output Lack of Resource Number of transmit packets discarded because of lack of resources for example buffers show serial stats The show serial stats command displays serial input output statistical information for all serial modules or for a specific circuit or slot This command allows for the following command filters flags and filter arguments circuit lt circuit_name gt Displays information about the specified circuit only slot lt slot gt Displays information about the specified slot only lt circuit_name gt Displays information about the specified circuit only 308648 14 00 Rev 00 B 61 Configuring WAN Line Services The output contains the following information Slot Conn Circuit State Errors Receive Transmit Bytes Receive Transmit Frames Receive Transmit Avg Pkt Receive Transmit Multicast Receive Slot location of the MCT1 MCE1 module within the chassis and the connector number Name of the circuit associated with this line State of the line driver Down Init initializing Not Present enabled but not yet started or Up The Not Present state occurs for several reasons For example the link module may not be physically present in
373. sets the secondary clock to Click on Help or see the parameter the value you specified description on page A 50 5 Click on OK The FE1 Port Parameters window opens To complete the configuration you must also configure a non PRI logical line See Configuring a Non PRI Logical Line on page 9 12 for instructions Customizing FE1 Services Using the BCC or Site Manager Table 9 2 lists the FE1 configuration tasks described in this chapter and indicates whether you can use the BCC or Site Manager to perform each task Table 9 2 FE1 Configuration Tasks Site Task BCC Manager Page Disabling and Reenabling the FE1 Port V V 9 h Setting the FE1 Line Type V V 9 6 Setting the FE1 Line Coding V V 9 7 Setting the Alarm Threshold Time 4 V 9 8 Setting the Alarm Threshold Clear Time V V 8 8 Accepting or Rejecting Loopback Requests V v 9 9 Setting a Loopback Configuration 4 V 9 9 Enabling and Disabling the International Bit V V 9 10 Setting the Primary Clock V V 9 11 Setting the Secondary Clock 4 4 9 11 Disabling and Reenabling the FE1 Port The FE interface is enabled by default when you add the circuit You can disable or reenable this FE1 interface without moving any cables 308648 14 00 Rev 00 9 5 Configuring WAN Line Services Setting the Using the BCC To enable or disable the FE1 port navigate to the fel prompt for example box fe1 1 1 and type st
374. setting for T1 6 4 F FDL mode 7 22 7 60 8 11 8 39 A 32 FE1 BERT mode 9 26 9 29 defining logical lines 9 14 parameters BERT mode 9 28 BERT Test Pattern 9 28 BofL 9 16 BofL Timeout seconds 9 17 Clear Alarm Threshold seconds 9 8 CRC Size 9 21 Enable Disable 9 16 Line Coding 9 7 Line Type 9 6 Local HDLC Address 9 19 MTU Size 9 17 Remote HDLC Address 9 20 Service 9 18 Setup Alarm Threshold seconds 9 8 308648 14 00 Rev 00 testing the line 9 26 9 29 timeslots 9 23 Frame Relay multiline traffic distribution 10 11 Fu BERT mode 8 35 8 41 defining logical lines 8 22 DS1 signal level A 46 DSX 1 8 9 8 40 FDL mode A 47 logical line parameters Accept Perf Measurement CR Addr A 49 BERT alarm type A 41 A 54 BERT mode A 54 BERT Test Pattern A 54 BofL Enable A 50 BofL Timeout A 51 CRC Size A 53 Enable Disable A 50 Fractional Loopback A 51 Local HDLC Address A 52 MTU Size A 53 Primary Clock A 49 Remote HDLC Address A 52 Remote Loopback Detection A 53 Secondary Clock A 50 Send Performance Measurement CR Addr A 49 Service A 52 WAN Protocol A 51 logical lines 8 20 parameters Accept Loopback Request A 48 BERT mode 8 37 BERT Test Pattern 8 37 BofL 8 25 BofL Timeout seconds 8 26 Clear Alarm Threshold seconds 8 10 A 47 CRC Size 8 29 Enable Disable 8 24 A 44 FDL Configuration A 47 Fractional Loopback 8 26 Line Coding 8 8 8 38 Line Type 8 7 A 4
375. signal Init Driver is initializing LMI Wait Driver is waiting for any of four WAN protocols to indicated that a link layer connection has been established to another entity This state applies to the frame relay SMDS ATM and PPP protocols Not Pres Driver is enabled but not yet started This state occurs for several reasons For example the link module may not be physically present in the chassis the software may be booting and has not yet initialized the driver software the slot may be running diagnostics or there may be a problem with the configuration continued 308648 14 00 Rev 00 B 63 Configuring WAN Line Services Total Time Up Down Errors MTU If the line is not up Operational State does not equal Up then three dashes appear If the line is up Operational State equals Up then the value appears in the form hhhmmmsss where hh is hours mm is minutes and ss is seconds For example the value might appear as 5h31m05s If the value is greater than 24 hours it appears in the form ddd hhh mmm where dd is days hh is hours and mm is minutes For example the value might appear as 2d10h15m Number of errors for each circuit Maximum transfer unit size the buffer size for each serial port also the largest frame that can be transmitted or received across the serial port The value ranges from 3 to 4608 bytes B 64 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Appendix C Troubleshooting an MCT1
376. snscy evesser A 7 52 Lemno me BOG cs T 7 52 Using Site Manager bends OE E iii TA 7 53 Mes risit ge GDN PRLE Channel e eA aS 7 54 Umo NERA MT es 7 54 Using Site Manager Soy gence PEET Pere RT T T 7 55 Teema MOET ard MOTI LIBE cos Deinde adr eb aee C ben N 7 56 AODOU A MI EET D T D 7 56 Seting Port Test PaIBIIpI IS canusteusietiece teretes nin airea aariate anra aaO inaani 7 57 Enabling or Disabling BERT Mode capped audet oe dc es 7 58 Setting the BERT Alarm Type T EA T rann reris sections 7 58 Seting The BERT Test Pay oi ee Ics ccu rtr bren c pda i aeter six uei dus epES 7 59 Setting the Line Coding Method ceccecsceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeteneeteeeeeeens 7 59 Setting the Line Type seer HEU Coda T Ed 7 59 Setting FDL Options MCT1 Only Teer TT 7 60 Setting the Signal Level MCT1 Only sss 7 60 Enabling or Disabling the International Bit MCE1 Only 7 61 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Xv PCN Pori TESIS E M MT Setting Logical Line Test Parameters T enemas T minbeets eine TT 7 63 Contouring BERT uui E een a a 7 64 Configuring Fractional Loopback Requests sss 7 65 Running Logical Line Tests 7 66 Chapter 8 Configuring FT1 Services Overview of FT1 Services gees TOT bends iu libens naai
377. stribute traffic more evenly among the data paths Monitor traffic volume Multilink is particularly beneficial when you configure circuits to access BOD For more information about the Multilink PPP feature see Configuring PPP Services Bandwidth on Demand BOD You can configure Nortel Networks routers to access BOD to reduce line congestion This feature enables the router to access secondary dial up lines when the primary leased or dial up line becomes congested The router can then transmit excess traffic over the secondary switched lines For more information about BOD see Configuring Dial Services Configuring Multiline Services The method you use to configure a multiline circuit depends on the types of lines you need to group e For information on how to group logical lines into a multiline circuit go to Grouping Logical Lines into a Multiline Circuit on page 10 11 e For information on how to group physical lines into a multiline circuit see Grouping Physical Lines into a Multiline Circuit on page 10 6 or Adding Physical Lines to a Circuit on page 10 7 e For information on how to use multiline with frame relay see Configuring Frame Relay Services 308648 14 00 Rev 00 10 5 Configuring WAN Line Services Grouping Physical Lines into a Multiline Circuit To group up to 16 physical synchronous lines into a multiline circuit complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure
378. t only lt circuit_name gt Displays information about the specified circuit only The output contains the following information Name Name of the circuit associated with this line Number Number of the circuit associated with this line Slot Connector Name of the physical interface Admin State Configured state of the HSSI port continued 308648 14 00 Rev 00 B 27 Configuring WAN Line Services Operational State Total Time Up Down MAC Address MTU WAN Protocol Local Address Remote Address Current operating state of the line driver as follows BofLwait Driver is waiting for its own Breath of Life BofL frames to be successfully transmitted or for a BofL frame from the Nortel Networks router at the other end of the WAN connection This applies only to the Wellfleet Standard protocol CAwait External equipment such as a modem DSU or CSU is not currently up Init Module is initializing LMlwait Driver is waiting for any of four WAN protocols to indicate that a link layer connection has been established to another entity This applies to the frame relay SMDS ATM and PPP Protocols Not Pres Module is enabled but not yet started This state occurs for several reasons For example the link module may not be physically present in the chassis The software may be booting and has not yet initialized the driver software the slot may be running diagnostics or there may be a problem wi
379. t the line into loopback mode the downstream driver will bring down the interface when it detects its BofL packets Select Enable or Disable 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 6 1 56 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring WAN Line Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID BERT Mode Configured FT1 Connector gt FT1 Logical Lines Disable Enable Disable Selecting Enable activates BERT mode To activate BERT mode select Enable and click on Apply 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 6 1 62 BERT Test Pattern Configured FT1 Connector gt FT1 Logical Lines Ones Zeros Ones QRSS 2e15 2e15 Inverted 2e20 2e23 2e23 Inverted Specifies the bit pattern transmitted during BERT diagnostics When a port is in BERT mode it can generate patterns such as all ones all zeros or a quasi random signal sequence QRSS pattern Select a test pattern and click on Apply 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 6 1 63 BERT Alarm Type Configured FT1 Connector gt FT1 Logical Lines Disable AIS Yellow Specifies the type of alarm signal to be generated while in BERT mode Select AIS alarm indication signal to transmit Blue alarms all ones Select Yellow to transmit Yellow alarms all zeros 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 6 1 64 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Para
380. ta rate between the subscriber s host and the customer premise equipment CPE 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 6 1 18 Interframe Time Fill Character Configured MCE1 or MCT1 Connector gt MCEI or MCT1 Logical Lines Flags Flags Idles Specifies the interframe time fill FTF pattern for transmission across this circuit Flags selects an Ox7E pattern 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 0 Idles selects an OxFF pattern 11 11 1 1 1 1 Set the interframe time fill character for this logical line 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 6 1 19 308648 14 00 Rev 00 A 39 Configuring WAN Line Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID CRC Size Configured MCE1 or MCT1 Connector gt MCEI or MCT1 Logical Lines 16 bit CRC 32 bit CRC 16 bit CRC Specifies the CRC type With 16 bit CRC the router appends a 16 bit CRC to the transmitted frames and performs a 16 bit CRC on received frames With 32 bit CRC the router appends a 32 bit CRC to transmitted frames and performs a 32 bit CRC on received frames Set the CRC size 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 9 6 1 20 MTU Size bytes Configured MCE1 or MCT1 Connector gt MCEI or MCT1 Logical Lines 1600 bytes 3 to 4608 bytes Specifies the transmit receive buffer size MTU to configure the largest frame that the router can t
381. tains the following information Slot Module Conn Circuit Logical Line Index Line Type Line Number State WAN Protocol Name of the physical interface Description of circuit Logical line number for this line Type of line in use Unframed T1 ESF SF E1 E1CRC E1MF E1CRCMF or Unframed E1 Line number for this line assigned during configuration This line number uniquely identifies this interface and is not equal to any of the line numbers assigned to logical lines configured through this port State of the logical line as follows Up Down Init initializing LMI Wait Loopback Dying Dead or Not Pres not present WAN protocol enabled on this interface ATM Frame Relay LAPB Passthru PPP SMDS Standard or X 25 continued B 48 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Rate Adaption Local Address Remote Address BCC show Commands Number of bits and their positions within the timeslot as follows 64K Uses all 8 bits in the timeslot 56K MSB Uses 7 of the 8 bits in the timeslot does not use the most significant bit 56K LSB Uses 7 of the 8 bits in the timeslot does not use the least significant bit This parameter is used only when the logical line HDLC service is LLC1 It is a value in the range 1 through 7 in the address field of the HDLC packet 1 indicates DCE 3 indicates DTE All other numbers indicate Explicit which means that the user has selected the address This parame
382. tains the following information Underflow Frames Number of retransmission underflow errors These occur when the device s FIFO buffer empties before the device obtains the next DMA request 308648 14 00 Rev 00 B 15 Configuring WAN Line Services System Errors The output contains the following information Receive Rejects Number of reject frames received Transmit Rejects Number of reject frames transmitted T1 or E1 Timeouts Number of T1 or E1 timeouts detected The T1or E1 timer is the link retransmission timer Link control frames are retransmitted when the T1 or e1 expires This timer tracks the number of timeouts Memory Errors Number of memory errors detected A memory error occurs when the DMA cycle expires without obtaining the bus within 26 ms Memory errors may indicate faulty hardware If this count exceeds five contact your Nortel Networks Technical Solutions Center show ft1e1 errors The show ft1e1 errors command displays receive transmission or system errors for all circuits or for a specific circuit This command allows for the following command filters flags and filter arguments circuit circuit name Displays information about the specified circuit only circuit name Displays information about the specified circuit only 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Receive Errors BCC show Commands The output contains the following information Slot Conn Circuit Bad Frames Runt Frames Frame Re
383. tatus was reset 2 42 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring Synchronous Services Example serial 1 1 show serial eia status Slot Conn Circuit RTS CTS DSR DCD DTR 1 2 S11 H Le L H L 1 entry s found Resetting EIA Signal Status You can reset the state change status of the EIA signals being monitored using the BCC Use the BCC command eia reset to reset EIA signal change status on a specific serial port Example serial 1 1 eia reset Slot Conn Circuit RTS CTS DSR DCD DTR 1 2 Sil H L L 1 entry s found 308648 14 00 Rev 00 2 43 Chapter 3 Configuring BayStack AN and ANH Asynchronous Services This chapter describes how to edit asynchronous services for BayStack AN or ANH serial circuits using Site Manager On AN and ANH COM2 circuits only the Configuration Manager displays the Edit ASYNC Parameters window Figure 3 1 when you select the asynchronous protocol from the WAN Protocols window This chapter contains the following sections Section Page Enabling or Disabling the Asynchronous Driver 3 2 Setting the MTU 3 3 Specifying the TCP Start Protocol 3 3 Setting the Baud Rate 3 4 Setting the Idle Timer 3 5 Setting the TCP Receive Window Size 3 5 Setting the TCP Keepalive Message Interval 3 5 Setting the TCP Inactive Limit 3 6 Setting the Maximum Transmit Queue Length 3 6 Setting the Maximum Receive Queue Length 3 6 For a des
384. ter is used only when the logical line HDLC service is LLC1 It is a value in the range 1 through 7 in the address field of the HDLC packet 1 indicates DCE 3 indicates DTE All other numbers indicate Explicit which means that the user has selected the address 308648 14 00 Rev 00 B 49 Configuring WAN Line Services show mctie1 system errors The show mctie1 system errors command displays information about system errors for all circuits or for a specific circuit This command allows for the following command filter flag and filter argument circuit circuit name Displays information about the specified circuit only The output contains the following information Slot Module Conn Circuit Logical Line Index Unaligned Frames Internal Overflows Overflow Frames Losses of Sync Name of the physical interface Description of circuit Logical line number for this line Number of frames containing a bit count not divisible by eight Number of frames received with internal overflow errors Number of overflow errors received on this line in which the device s FIFO buffer overflowed before obtaining the next DMA cycle No buffer resources are available Number of instances of sync losses detected on this line This error statistic is equivalent to the red alarm received statistic on T1 B 50 308648 14 00 Rev 00 show mct1e1 tiport BCC show Commands The show mct1e1 tiport command displays MC
385. ters navigate to the fe1 1 1 prompt for example box fe1 1 1 and type primary clock source variable secondary clock source variable For example fel 1 1 primary clock source internal fel 1 1 secondary clock source loop1 Using Site Manager You access the clock parameters via the window that opens after you set the port application mode How you access this window is based on if you have already configured the port e For an unconfigured FE1 link module The first time you configure a port the Edit FE1 Clock Parameters window opens automatically When you set these clock parameters you define the timing sources for the selected port only e Fora configured FE1 link module Display the FE1 Port Parameters window FE1 Connector gt Edit Logical Lines gt Port Details gt FE1 Port Parameters To set the clock parameters complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the window containing the clock parameters select a primary clock source option 2 Setthe Primary Clock parameter Site Manager sets the primary clock to Click on Help or see the parameter the value you specified description on page A 49 3 Select the secondary backup clock source option continued 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring FE1 Services Site Manager Procedure continued You do this System responds 4 Set the Secondary Clock parameter Site Manager
386. test equipment then performs diagnostics on the network between the equipment and the port To prevent the port from accepting loopback requests you can disable detection of remote loop up and loop down code Using the BCC To enable or disable port loopback requests navigate to the ftl prompt for example box ft1 1 1 and type accept loopback request variable For example ft1 1 1 accept loopback request enabled 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring FT1 Services Using Site Manager See the Accept Loopback Request parameter on page A 48 for information When you enable Accept Loopback Request you can set the type of loopback you want See Setting a Loopback Configuration on page 8 14 Setting the Loop Retention Interframe Time Fill In the BCC the FDL Loop Interframe Fill parameter is set to mark by default which enables the detection of loop retention code when the remote end is in line or payload loopback When you set this parameter to loop retention the loop retention interframe time fill IFTF for the facility data link FDL is enabled after it sends loop up code Using the BCC To set this parameter navigate to the ftl prompt for example box ft1 1 1 and type fdl loop interframe timefill variable For example t1 1 14 fdl loop interframe fill loop retention 308648 14 00 Rev 00 8 13 Configuring WAN Line Services Setting a Loopback Configuration When set the Loopback Configuration p
387. th the configuration If the line is not up Operational State does not equal Up then three dashes appear If the line is up Operational State equals Up then the value appears in the form hhhmmmsss where hh is hours mm is minutes and ss is seconds For example the value might appear as 5h31m05s If the value is greater than 24 hours it appears in the form daddhhh mmm where dd is days hh is hours and mm is minutes For example the value might appear as 2d10h15m Media access control address the physical address of the line The line driver fills in this address from the 48 bit address stored in the link module number PROM for this connector Maximum transfer unit size the buffer size for the HSSI port also the largest frame that can be transmitted or received across the HSSI port The value ranges from 3 to 4608 bytes WAN protocol enabled on this interface The 1 byte local HDLC address of this interface The 1 byte remote HDLC address of this interface continued B 28 308648 14 00 Rev 00 BOFL BOFL TMO Receive Bytes Receive Frames Receive Average Packet Transmit Bytes Transmit Frames Transmit Average Packet Total Errors Receive Total Errors Transmit Number of Buffers Receive Number of Buffers Transmit Protocols Configured Receive Errors BCC show Commands Enables the transmission of proprietary BofL messages over a point to point connection between the loca
388. that apply to ports and DSO timeslots that an MCEI or MCTI link or net module supports Note DMCEI and DMCTI link modules contain a single clock chip that provides the timing signals for both ports Therefore clock parameters that you set for the first port apply to the second port on the module Timing is independent for the two ports on a DMCTI net module and for the four ports on a QMCTI and QMCTI w DSOA link module For these modules you select the timing source for each port Table 7 1 lists the options supported by specific link and net modules Table 7 1 MCE1 and MCT1 Clock Source Options BCC Clock Site Manager Applicable Source Clock Source Applicable ASN Options Option Link Modules Net Modules Result internal Internal All All Use the clock chip on the link or net module loop1 Porti Ext Loop DMCT1 QMCT1 DMCT1 Use the signal coming in from port 1 QMCT1 w DS0A loop2 Port2 Ext Loop DMCT1 QMCT1 DMCT1 Use the signal coming in from port 2 QMCT1 w DS0A loop3 Port3 Ext Loop QMCT1 N A Use the signal coming in from port 3 QMCT1 w DS0A loop4 Port4 Ext Loop QMCT1 N A Use the signal coming in from port 4 external Auxiliary Ext MCE1 DMCE1 MCE1 Use an external clock source via BNC connectors MCT1 DMCT1 N A Use an external clock source via DB 9 connectors QMCT1 N A Use an external clock source via QMCT1 w DSOA porti This option requires a special Y cable Nortel Networks Order No AA00180
389. the V 54 Loopback Timer 4 9 Loopback Test Modes 4 10 Configuring the V 54 Loopback Test State You can configure one of the following V 54 loopback test states Table 4 3 Loopback Test State Options BCC Option Site Manager Option no loopback NO LOOP local analog loopback ANALOG local digital loopback DIGITAL remote digital loopback REM DIGITAL remote digital loopback with pattern REM DIG PATTERN local analog loopback with pattern ANALOG PATTERN pattern 2047 generate PATTERN 2047 Select a test state or keep the default no loopback See Loopback Test Modes later in this chapter for detailed information about the tests Caution If the only connection with the remote router is through the DSU CSU selecting a loopback test state prevents the local router from communicating with the remote router for the duration of the test 4 8 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring BayStack DSU CSU Services Using the BCC To change the loopback test state navigate to the dsucsu prompt for example box dsucsu 1 1 and type loopback mode variable For example dsucsu 1 1 loopback mode local analog loopback Using Site Manager To configure DSU CSU loopback testing complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 In the Configuration Manager window The Edit Connector window opens click on the COM connector for the DSU CSU cir
390. the WAN protocol and click on OK For information about selecting WAN protocols see Configuring and Managing Routers with Site Manager and the appropriate protocol configuration guide The Select Protocols window opens Select the protocols to run on this logical line For instructions see the appropriate protocol configuration guide The Logical Line window opens showing the first FT1 circuit You can use the default name that appears in the Add Circuit window or change the name by clicking on the Circuit Name box and typing a new name Figure 8 1 illustrates how Site Manager generates the default logical line name The default name identifies the following Circuit type Physical connector slot and port number Number of the logical line on the FT1 port 8 22 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring FT1 Services Slot where connector Type of circuit resides Slot 1 EC Logical line Circuit name FEI 1 1 v re LS0023A Figure 8 1 Default Circuit Name for ARN Link Modules Customizing Logical Line Parameters Table 8 12 lists the configuration tasks described in this section and indicates whether you can use the BCC or Site Manager to perform each task Table 8 12 Logical Line Configuration Tasks Configuration Task BCC Site Manager Page Enabling or Disabling the Logical Line V
391. the remote peer If you enable BofL locally you must also enable BofL on the remote peer Nortel Networks recommends that you enable BofL for point to point connections between Nortel Networks routers However you must disable BofL if such a connection occurs through a wide area transport service such as frame relay or SMDS 308648 14 00 Rev 00 5 3 Configuring WAN Line Services Using the BCC To enable or disable the transmission of BofL messages navigate to the hssi prompt for example box hssi 2 1 and type bofl variable For example hssi 2 1 bofl enabled hssi 2 1 bofl disabled Using Site Manager See the BofL parameter on page A 13 for information Setting the BofL Interval The BofL Frequency timeout parameter is valid only if BofL is enabled on the interface After sending a BofL message the router starts a timer that has a value equal to five times the setting of this parameter If the router does not receive a BofL message from the remote peer before the timer expires the router disables the HSSI circuit and then attempts to restart it Both ends of the point to point connection must be configured with the same frequency value Set this parameter to a value from 1 to 60 seconds The default is 1 second Using the BCC To set the BofL timeout navigate to the hssi prompt for example box hssi 2 1 and type bofl timeout integer For example hssi 2 1 bofl timeout 20 5 4 308648 1
392. to set the RTS Enable parameter to Enable 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 68 KG84A Remote Resync Wait COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit SYNC Parameters 200 cycles 2151101251501 10012001 500 Specifies the number of cycles that the router waits for the remote KG84A device to complete a resynchronization operation when synchronization is lost and a remotely initiated resynchronization has been detected After this number of cycles the router software determines that the resynchronization has failed and initiates another resynchronization Note that if you press the RES YNC button on the local KG84A device the router responds as if it were a remotely initiated resynchronization Specify a different setting at each end of the point to point link to avoid a possible race condition Be sure to set the RTS Enable parameter to Enable 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 69 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring WAN Line Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID KG 84A Sync Pulse COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit SYNC Parameters 10 milliseconds 2 to 4096 milliseconds Specifies the length of the pulse in milliseconds that the router transmits to the KG84A device when it needs to initiate KG84A resynchronization The router uses the RTS signal of the V 35 interface Using a special cable the interface conne
393. top bits create a longer pause at the receiving router Click on Values and select a value that is appropriate for your network 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 118 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring WAN Line Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Pasync Baud Rate COM Connector gt Edit Line gt AOT gt Edit SYNC Parameters 600 150 300 600 1200 2400 4800 9600 19200 38400 57600 Sets the transmission speed for polled AOT packets between primary and secondary routers over a TCP connection Click on Values and select a baud rate that is appropriate for your network 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 119 T1 Line Parameters Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID You access the T1 line parameters from the Configuration Manager window Enable T1 Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit T1 Parameters Enable Enable Disable Enables or disables the T1 line Set to Disable if you want to disable the T1 line 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 10 1 2 Frame Type T1 Connector Edit Line Edit T1 Parameters ESF ESF D4 Selects either ESF extended superframe or D4 frame format D4 transmits superframes consisting of 12 individual frames ESF in contrast transmits superframes consisting of 24 individual D4 frames and provides enhanced signaling and synchroniz
394. tting Minimum Frame Spacing 4 4 2 14 Specifying Point to Point Addresses J 4 2 14 Viewing the Configured WAN Protocol J 4 gir Setting Pass Thru Addresses V V 2 17 Setting the CRC Size V V 2 19 Setting the Signaling Method V v 2 18 Enabling and Disabling DSR Polling V 2 20 Setting the Line Coding V V 2 21 Configuring the KG84A Security V e Specifying the Network Link Level V 2 24 Setting the Retry Count V 2 25 Setting the Link Idle Timer 4 225 Enabling and Disabling Extended Control v 225 Enabling and Disabling Receiver Ready Signals 4 2 26 Setting the Cable Type J 2 26 Setting the Retry Timer 4 2 27 Enabling and Disabling Extended Addressing V 2 27 Enabling and Disabling Remote Loopback Detection V 2 28 Setting a Priority 4 V 2 28 Setting the Hold Down Time V V 2 29 Setting the B Channel Override V V 2 29 Setting the IFTF Pattern V 2 30 Setting the WAN Serial Interface Type V V 2 31 continued 308648 14 00 Rev 00 2 3 Configuring WAN Line Services Table 2 1 Synchronous Line Configuration Tasks continued Task BCC Site Manager Page Setting the Asynchronous Baud Rate V 2 32 Setting the Pasync Parity Type V 2 33 Setting the Pasync Data Bits V 233 Setting the Pasync Stop Bits 4 2 33 Setting the Pasync Baud Rate V 2 34 Note Although there are several line parameters common to all synchronous COM ports many parameters apply only to certain hardware modules or WAN protocols Ena
395. tware image and transfer the image to the memory card C 2 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Glossary attribute Properties or functional aspects of a configurable MIB object See parameter channel The multiplexed signal for one voice or data conversation running simultaneously with other channels over a single logical or physical line circuit A data communication path established between two network hosts for example a permanent or switched virtual circuit PVC or SVC over a packet or cell switched network or over a dial or leased line connection connector The physical and electrical means to connect an interface module in a network device directly or indirectly to a physical network medium interface A data link physical layer connection to a physical network transmission medium An interface includes media specific driver software line The physical medium that completes a circuit path typically identified by connector slot and media type In a multiline circuit one circuit uses multiple lines for added bandwidth logical line A logical path on a physical circuit See line parameter A Site Manager variable that defines a specific MIB attribute or a set of MIB attributes See attribute port On a network device or a user end station a logical point of termination for data sent or received by a specific protocol or application See connector slot The physical and electrical means to connect an interface module in a networ
396. uit For example if you allocate channels 17 to 25 to circuit 1 on the first E1 connector you must make these channels idle or allocate them to circuit 2 on the second E1 connector Data and Voice Pass Through To enable data and voice pass through assign identical channels to data or voice on both E1 connectors For example if the first E1 connector allocates channels 2 to 8 to voice pass through and channels 9 to 16 to data pass through the second E1 connector must also allocate channels 2 to 8 to voice pass through and channels 9 to 16 to data pass through See the Mini Dacs parameter on page A 12 for information 308648 14 00 Rev 00 6 11 Chapter 7 Configuring MCE1 and MCT1 Services You configure and customize services for Multichannel E1 MCE1 or Multichannel T1 MCT1 circuits on a Nortel Networks router by setting the parameters as described in the following sections Section Page Overview of MCE1 and MCT1 Services 7 2 Configuring MCE1 and MCT1 Ports 7 3 Customizing MCE1 Port Parameters rors Customizing MCT1 Port Parameters 7 16 Configuring a DSOA Connection 7 30 Configuring Non PRI Logical Lines 7 34 Configuring ISDN PRI B Channels 7 54 Testing MCE1 and MCT1 Lines 7 56 308648 14 00 Rev 00 7 1 Configuring WAN Line Services Overview of MCE1 and MCT1 Services Nortel Networks supports MCE1 and MCTI circuits on a router that contains one of the following MC
397. ules only you can specify the source from which the router accepts send performance messages by setting one of the following options Table 7 10 Accept Performance Messages Options BCC Option Site Manager Option Description prm ci Customer Inst The default indicates that the customer installation supplies the messages prm carrier Carrier Indicates that the carrier supplies the messages Using the BCC To specify the source from which the router accepts send performance messages navigate to the mct1 prompt for example box mct1 1 1 and type accept prm cr address bit variable For example mct1 1 1 accept prm cr address bit prm carrier 7 26 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring MCE1 and MCT1 Services Using Site Manager See the Accept Perf Measurement CR Addr parameter on page A 34 for information Setting the Primary Clock Source Timing is independent for the two ports on a DMCTI net module and for the four ports on a QMCTI or QMCT1 w DSOA link module For these modules you select the timing source for each port Note DMCEI and DMCTI link modules contain a single clock chip that provides the timing signals for both ports Therefore clock parameters that you set for the first port apply to the second port on the module Table 7 11 shows the primary source options for timing signals Table 7 11 Primary Clock Source Options BCC Options Site Manager Options
398. umbers assigned to logical lines configured through this port Number of CRC 6 errors The FDL calculates CRC 6 on the incoming data Each time the calculation does not match the CRC 6 code word in the incoming enhanced super frame ESF data stream this count increments Number of bipolar line code violations The FDL counts bipolar violations whether its synchronizer is in sync or not If the FDL is set to receive B8ZS code words it does not count these code words as bipolar violations Number of out of frame errors An out of frame error occurs whenever two or more framing bits out of six in the Framing Pattern Sequence FPS are incorrect This event causes the FDL to resynchronize to the incoming data stream Number of individual bit errors in the FPS Number of Errored Seconds ES An ES is any 1 second time interval with either a frame bit error or a CRC 6 error Number of Severely Errored Seconds SES An SES is any 1 second time interval with an OOF error or more than 320 CRC errors Number of Severely Errored Seconds UAS A UAS is the number of seconds between 10 consecutive SES events inclusive and 10 consecutive non SES events exclusive For more information refer to the 1989 ANSI T1 403 specification Carrier to Customer Installation DS1 Metallic Interface Number of Errored Seconds reported in the Performance Report Messages PRMs Number of Severely Errored Seconds reported in the PRMs Number of P
399. up reboot or crash or a hardware reset occurs You can control the state of the relay by setting the Relay Control parameter In the BCC the options for Relay Control are e loop The default the relay will go into loopback as the port module is reinitialized e noloop The relay will remain in its present state as the port module is reinitialized To set relay control using the BCC navigate to the ftl prompt for example box ft1 1 1 and type relay control variable For example ft1 1 1 relay control noloop Configuring a Non PRI Logical Line Logical lines are the logical paths for data communication on a physical connection You can define only one logical line for FT1 ports For instructions on how to define logical lines see the sections that follow Defining Logical Lines Using the BCC A single FT1 port supports up to 24 logical lines Note If you want to group the logical lines into a multiline circuit see Chapter 9 Configuring Multiline Services Adding a Logical Line to an FT1 Port To add a logical line to an FT1 port navigate to the ft1 prompt for example box ft1 1 1 and type f t1 1 1 logical line 8 20 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring FT1 Services Specifying a Circuit Name You can use the current circuit name or specify a new name The current circuit name identifies the following e Circuit type e Physical connector slot and port number e Number of the logic
400. up to the value of the Retry Count parameter 3 Disconnects the link Set the Retry Timer parameter to a value from 1 to 9999 seconds Using Site Manager See the Retry Timer parameter on page A 75 for information Enabling or Disabling Extended Addressing By default the router does not test the address length of frames on a synchronous interface With the Extended Address parameter enabled the router tests the first bit of the address to determine the length of the address in octets Enable or disable extended addressing for the interface Using Site Manager See the Extended Address parameter on page A 76 for information 308648 14 00 Rev 00 2 27 Configuring WAN Line Services Enabling or Disabling Remote Loopback Detection By enabling remote loopback detection on an interface you can configure the router to automatically disable the interface upon detecting its own BofL messages If BofL is enabled the device driver disables the interface upon receiving its own BofL packets assuming that the link has been put into loopback mode This function is disabled by default Using the BCC To enable or disable remote loopback detection navigate to the serial prompt for example box serial 2 1 and type remote loopback detection variable For example serial 2 1 remote loopback detection enabled serial 2 1 remote loopback detection disabled Using Site Manager See the Remote Loopback Detection parameter on p
401. ure 6 2 Bipolar Format In bipolar format a negative pulse must always follow a positive pulse and vice versa A long string of zeros on a T1 line would cause the line to lose synchronization due to lack of pulses Nortel Networks offers B8ZS for T1 synchronization B8ZS substitutes a bipolar violation into a string of eight consecutive zeros at the transmitting end and removes the bipolar violation at the receiving end In a bipolar violation the first pulse is in the same direction positive or negative as the previous pulse Figure 6 3 308648 14 00 Rev 00 6 5 Configuring WAN Line Services Data 1 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 Bipolar violation Line voltage Substituted byte LS0010A Figure 6 3 Bipolar with 8 Zero Substitution B8ZS You can enable or disable B8ZS support on this interface depending on whether the associated T1 equipment supports B8ZS See the B8ZS Support parameter on page A 89 for information Specifying Line Buildout Line buildout conditions the router signals to mitigate attenuation Line buildout depends on the physical length of the T1 line The carrier determines line buildout for DS1 long haul DSX 1 short haul line buildout corresponds to the length of the cable 6 6 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring E1 and T1 Services By default the T1 line buildout for DSX 1 is based on a physical line length of 1 ft Configure a line length based on the approximate length o
402. uring WAN Line Services Using Site Manager See the Remote HDLC Address parameter on page A 38 for information Setting Rate Adaption Rate adaption determines the number of data bits transmitted and their bit positions within the timeslot to achieve the data rate The term rate adaption means that by setting this parameter you are adapting to the rate of your subscriber the software does not change the rate dynamically The logical line rate adaption is 64 Kb s by default You can select one of the options listed in Table 7 16 Table 7 16 Rate Adaption Options BCC Option Site Manager Option Description adaption 64k 64K Sets the data rate to 64 Kb s using all 8 bits in the timeslot adaption 56kmsb 56K MSB Sets the data rate to 56 Kb s using 7 of the 8 bits in the timeslot excluding the most significant bit MSB The MSB carries framing overhead adaption 56klsb 56K LSB Sets the data rate to 56 Kb s using 7 of the 8 bits in the timeslot excluding the least significant bit LSB The LSB carries framing overhead adaption 9dot6k 9 6K Sets the data rate to 9 6 Kb s using DSOA frame format adaption 19dot2k 19 2K Sets the data rate to 19 2 Kb s using DSOA frame format The 64K 56K MSB and 56K LSB options specify full DSO rates The 9 6K and 19 2K options specify DSOA subrates for an SDLC connection and are available only for an installed QMCT1 with DSOA link module If you choose
403. used logical line 7 Select and hold down the logical line The Select Logical Line window displays number Figure 10 11 the remaining unused logical lines 8 Select a logical line to include in the The Circuit Definition window opens multiline circuit and click on OK 9 Choose File gt Exit The MCE1 or MCT1 Logical Lines window opens displaying two logical lines associated with the multiline circuit Figure 10 12 10 Click on Circuit to display the Circuit Definition window 11 Repeat steps 6 through 8 12 Choose Lines gt Change Lines 13 Repeat steps 7 and 8 for each unused The logical lines are now grouped as a logical line you want to include in the circuit multiline circuit 14 Choose File gt Exit The MCE1 or MCT1 Logical Lines window opens displaying the multiline group Note that all logical lines now have the same circuit name MCE1 22 5 in the example 10 14 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring Multiline Services Done Add Delete 5 MCE1 22 5 Apply Port Details Circuit Timeslots Values Help Enable Disable ENABLE Breath Of Life BOFL Enable Disable ENABLE BOFL Timeout seconds 5 Fractional Loopback DISABLE WAN Protocol STANDARD Service LLC1 Figure 10 8 Logical Lines Window Showing the Circuit and Unused Logical Lines MCE1 Example 308648 14 00 Rev 00 10 15 Configuring WAN Line Services a Configuration Mode local SNMP Agent
404. uunuusecceceeetet tonius chm pese aee pubes uns 9 14 Table 9 9 send Commands for FET Port Teste ac rt rns 9 29 Table B 1 DSU CSU show Commands MER PEN T noe B 2 Tile BS srw Te Commands icccriisoiirn niania B 11 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Table B 3 FASS show GOLmiisrids 152 ecce htt o ra ERE a nte YER Fe Ene r dt Eze dE Rau B 25 Table B 4 MCT1 MCE1 show Commands eere B 37 Table B 5 Serial show Commande cece dae ooi Eesccon eran e noe pedes o dos B 53 308648 14 00 Rev 00 xxxi Preface This guide describes WAN line services and what you do to start and customize WAN line services on a Nortel Networks router You can use the Bay Command Console BCC or Site Manager to configure WAN line services on a router In this guide you will find instructions for using both the BCC and Site Manager Before You Begin Before using this guide you must complete the following procedures For a new router e Install the router see the installation guide that came with your router Connect the router to the network and create a pilot configuration file see Quick Starting Routers Configuring BayStack Remote Access or Connecting ASN Routers to a Network Make sure that you are running the latest version of Nortel Networks BayRS and Site Manager software For information about upgrading BayRS and Site Manager see the upgrading guide for your version of BayRS 308648 14 00 Rev 00 xxxiii Configu
405. y allows time for the primary line to recover before deactivating a backup line Specify the number of seconds to wait before bringing up this line 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 80 Network Link Level COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit SYNC Parameters NET2 NET2 GOSIP SYNC_TYPE_C03 Indicates the link level for this synchronous point to point connection Accept the default NET2 for most configurations or do the following Change to GOSIP when this synchronous point to point connection is part of a GOSIP compliant network such as the Department of Defense DoD Change to SYNC TYPE C03 when you are running X 25 on the QSync DST or ESAF synchronous link modules 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 81 Cable Type COM Connector Edit Line Edit SYNC Parameters Null Null RS232 RS422 v35 X21 Specifies the cable interface to the network When the interface connects to a dial up device for switched services set this parameter to reflect the cable interface type that connects the dial unit For an SDLC interface specify RS232 1 3 6 1 4 1 18 3 4 5 1 83 308648 14 00 Rev 00 Configuring WAN Line Services Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Parameter Path Default Options Function Instructions MIB Object ID Sync Line Coding COM Connector gt Edit Line gt Edit
406. y setting the Relay Control parameter using the BCC The options for Relay Control are e Loop The default the relay will go into loopback as the port module is reinitialized e Noloop The relay will remain in its present state as the port module is reinitialized Using the BCC To set relay control navigate to the mct1 prompt for example box mct1 1 1 and type relay control variable For example mct1 1 1 relay control noloop Setting the Source of Send Performance Messages On DMCT1 net modules and QMCT1 or QMCTI w DSOA link modules only you can specify the source of send performance messages by setting one of the following options Table 7 9 Send Performance Messages Options BCC Option Site Manager Option Description prm ci Customer Inst The default indicates that the customer installation supplies the messages prm carrier Carrier Indicates that the carrier supplies the messages 308648 14 00 Rev 00 7 25 Configuring WAN Line Services Using the BCC To specify the source of send performance messages navigate to the mct1 prompt for example box mct1 1 1 and type send prm cr address bit variable For example mct1 1 14 send prm cr address bit prm carrier Using Site Manager See the Send Performance Measurement CR Addr parameter on page A 34 for information Setting the Source of Accept Performance Messages On DMCT1 net modules and QMCT1 or QMCTI w DSOA link mod
407. you select enabled to put the line in loopback detection mode the driver will bring down the interface when it detects its BofL packets Using the BCC To enable or disable remote loopback detection navigate to the logical line prompt for example stack mce1 1 2 1 logical line mce1 121 1 and type remote loopback detection variable For example logical line mcel 121 14 remote loopback detection enabled Using Site Manager See the Remote Loopback Detection parameter on page A 40 for information Configuring BERT Diagnostic Pattern Tests DMCT1 net modules and QMCTI or QMCTI w DSOA link modules support the bit error rate test BERT on individual logical lines In BERT mode the router introduces deliberate error patterns into the transmitted bit stream on a single logical line It can generate patterns such as all ones all zeros or a quasi random signal sequence QRSS pattern 308648 14 00 Rev 00 7 A7 Configuring WAN Line Services Using Site Manager To configure BERT diagnostics complete the following tasks Site Manager Procedure You do this System responds 1 Enable BERT mode on the QMCT1 or Site Manager enables BERT mode DMCT1 logical line Click on Help or see the parameter description on page A 41 2 With BERT mode enabled specify the bit pattern transmitted during BERT diagnostics Click on Help or see the BERT Test Pattern parameter on page A 41 See Testing
408. your Nortel Networks Technical Solutions Center 308648 14 00 Rev 00 B 17 Configuring WAN Line Services show ft1e1 fdl ansi The show ft1e1 fdl ansi command displays the Facility Data Link FDL error statistics in ANSI 403 mode This command shows information only for FT1 The output contains the following information Slot Connector Line Number CRC Counts BPV Counts OOF Counts FE Counts ES Counts SES Counts UAS Counts PRMES Counts PRMSES Counts PRME Counts Name of the physical interface Number assigned to this line Number of CRC 6 error events Number of bipolar violations Number of out of frame error events Number of errors in the FPS framing pattern Number of erroneous seconds Number of severely erroneous seconds Number of unavailable seconds Number of erroneous seconds as reported in the performance report messages Number of severely erroneous seconds as reported in the performance report messages Number of erroneous performance report messages received 308648 14 00 Rev 00 show ft1e1 fdl att BCC show Commands The show ft1e1 fdl att command displays the Facility Data Link FDL error statistics This command shows information only for FT1 The output contains the following information Slot Connector Line Number ES Counts SES Counts SEFS Counts UAS Counts CSS Counts PVC Counts LES Counts BES Counts DM Counts LCV Counts Name of the physical interfac
409. ze variable For example logical line 1 14 crC size crc32bit logical line 1 14 crC Size crc16bit Using Site Manager See the CRC Size parameter on page A 53 for information 308648 14 00 Rev 00 8 29 Configuring WAN Line Services Setting the MTU Size The router uses the transmit receive buffer size MTU to configure the largest frame that the router can transmit or receive across this FT1 port The router discards frames larger than this value The MTU is 1600 bytes by default You can change it to any size from 3 to 4608 bytes for the logical line Using the BCC To specify the MTU size navigate to the logical line prompt for example box ft1 1 1 logical line 1 1 and type mtu integer For example logical line 1 1 mtu 10 Using Site Manager See the MTU Size bytes parameter on page A 53 for information Enabling or Disabling Remote Loopback Detection Setting the Remote Loopback Detection parameter enables or disables detection of the driver s BofL packets on this logical line as long as the BofL Enable Disable parameter is enabled for this interface If you select Enable to put the line in loopback detection mode the driver will bring down the interface when it detects its BofL packets This parameter is disabled by default Using the BCC To enable or disable remote loopback detection navigate to the logical line prompt for example box ft1 1 1 logical line 1 1 and type remote loopback detecti

Avaya Configuring WAN Lines Services User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents